Author Archives: paul.fraser@sfmagazines.com

Astounding Science-Fiction v34n03, November 1944

Summary:
An outstanding issue of Astounding that not only has Theodore Sturgeon’s Killdozer and Clifford Simak’s Desertion but also has good stories from Henry Kuttner & C. L. Moore (When the Bough Breaks), and Malcolm Jameson (Alien Envoy). Unusually, the only non-fiction in this issue is the editorial and a science essay.
[ISFDB page] [Archive.org copy]

Other reviews:1
Alva Rogers, A Requiem for Astounding  p. 129-134

_____________________

Editor, John W. Campbell Jr.; Assistant Editor, Catherine Tarrant

Fiction:
Killdozer! • novella by Theodore Sturgeon ∗∗∗∗
Desertion • short story by Clifford D. Simak
When the Bough Breaks • novelette by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore [as by Lewis Padgett] +
Alien Envoy • novelette by Malcolm Jameson
Redevelopment • novelette by George O. Smith [as by Wesley Long]
The Harmonizer • short story by A. E. van Vogt

Non-fiction:
Cover • by William Timmins
Interior artwork • by Paul Orban (x3), A. Williams (x23), Frank Kramer (x2)
CRT • editorial by John W. Campbell, Jr.
Time for a Universe • essay by R. S. Richardson

_____________________

The next issue of Astounding I intended to review was the July 1944 one but, seeing as it has been a while since the last one and, as that issue has the start of a 100,000 word 4-part serial by Raymond F. Jones (sigh), I thought I’d ease myself back into the swing of things with this. As it happens I’ve already reviewed three of the stories (the Sturgeon, Simak, and Kuttner/Moore), so it also made for a quick read.
Normally I’d put the stories I’ve already discussed at the end of this review but, for various reasons, I’ve decided not to do that this time (one is that the first 100 or so pages of this issue must be the most sustained level of quality seen in any magazine in any decade, and I want that to be obvious here).

The fiction leads off with Killdozer! by Theodore Sturgeon,2 which gets off to a (surprisingly, considering its ‘classic’ status) clunky, data-dump start which tells of an ancient war involving an alien lifeform of “tangible electrons” which ends up trapped on Earth. It would have been better if this had been chopped up into smaller sections and inserted into the narrative. That said, when the story gets going, it has an immersive opening section which portrays a small group of civilian contractors on a Pacific island during WWII, who are there to build a runway for the military. Tom Jaeger is the boss, and one of several clearly drawn individuals in a tale that is much better characterised than any other contemporaneous SF work I can think of. One of the men, Dennis, is the obvious troublemaker of the bunch, and a racist to boot. This latter characteristic comes to the fore in several passages which make the story one of the few of the time which has an obvious, if occasional, anti-racist slant. In the following extract Dennis comments about another man, Rivera, a Puerto Rican mechanic’s assistant:

“Why doesn’t that monkey stick to his grease guns?”
Tom turned and took the chewed end of a match stick out of his mouth. He said nothing, because he had for some time been trying to make a habit of saying nothing to Joe Dennis.
Dennis was an ex-accountant, drafted out of an office at the last gasp of a defunct project in the West Indies. He had become an operator because they needed operators badly. He had been released with alacrity from the office because of his propensity for small office politics. It was a game he still played, and completely aside from his boiled-looking red face and his slightly womanish walk, he was out of place in the field; for boot-licking and back-stabbing accomplish even less out on the field than they do in an office. Tom, trying so hard to keep his mind on his work, had to admit to himself that of all Dennis’ annoying traits the worst was that he was good a pan operator as could be found anywhere, and no one could deny it.
Dennis certainly didn’t.
“I’ve seen the day when anyone catching one of those goonies so much as sitting on a machine during lunch, would kick his fanny,” Dennis groused. “Now they give ’em a man’s work and a man’s pay.”
“Doin’ a man’s work, ain’t he?” Tom said.
“He’s a Puerto Rican!”
Tom turned and looked at him levelly. “Where was it you said you come from,” he mused. “Oh yeah. Georgia.”
“What do you mean by that?”
Tom was already striding away. “Tell you as soon as I have to,” he flung back over his shoulder.  p. 253-254

The action starts when Tom and Rivera go on a recce and come upon a mound where there is an odd looking stone. They move it and find what looks like a wall underneath. Tom guides Riviera in with the bulldozer and, when the wall gives way, the alien energy-being from the prologue escapes from the enclosure and possesses the machine. The bulldozer goes wild, and Riviera is thrown from it, his back broken. After Tom manages to fight the bulldozer to a stop with another machine he disables it by emptying the fuel tank. He then goes for help.
When Rivera is finally brought back to base the rescue party give Tom the shocking news that the bulldozer used the petrol starter motor (not its main engine) to move itself from its previous position to within twenty feet of Rivera before the former burnt out.

The next part of the story chronicles the mistrust that arises between the men, some of whom think that Tom attacked Rivera (who subsequently dies). Looming in the background is the bulldozer, which Chub the mechanic has started repairing. Even though Tom orders that no-one is to start the machine apart from him, Dennis does so once it is fixed. The final third of the story then tells of the alien-possessed machine’s killing spree, and the men’s attempt to destroy it.
This is a pretty good adventure story, but my four star rating is more for the character driven first two-thirds than the more straightforward (and perhaps overlong) action of the finale.

 

The fourth in the ‘City’ stories is Desertion, and it is set in a station on Jupiter, where they are transforming men into the native “loper” life form and sending them out onto the surface. The story opens with the chief of the station, Fowler, briefing Allen—the fifth candidate for conversion. Fowler does this against the backdrop of the converter operator’s, Miss Stanley, obvious disapproval (two earlier two-man teams have not returned).
The second half of the story sees Allen also fail to return, at which point Fowler decides to transform and go outside himself, along with his dog Towser. When this happens they find themselves in a wonderland where they can both talk to each other telepathically and, as they stand by an ammonia waterfall, they realise that they can both do much more:

“The music,” said Towser.
“Yes, what about it?”
“The music,” said Towser, “is vibrations. Vibrations of water falling.”
“But, Towser, you don’t know about vibrations.”
“Yes, I do,” contended Towser. “It just popped into my head.”
Fowler gulped mentally. “Just popped!”
And suddenly, within his own head, he held a formula—the formula for a process that would make metal to withstand the pressure of Jupiter.
He stared, astounded, at the waterfall and swiftly his mind took the many colors and placed them in their exact sequence in the spectrum. Just like that. Just out of blue sky. Out of nothing, for he knew nothing either of metals or of colors.
“Towser,” he cried. ‘Towser, something’s happening to us!”
“Yeah, I know,” said Towser.
“It’s our brains,” said Fowler. “We’re using them, all of them, down to the last hidden corner. Using them to figure out things we should have known all the time. Maybe the brains of Earth things naturally are slow and foggy. Maybe we are the morons of the universe. Maybe we are fixed so we have to do things the hard way.”
And, in the new sharp clarity of thought that seemed to grip him, he knew that it would not only be the matter of colors in a waterfall or metals that would resist the pressure of Jupiter, he sensed other things, things not yet quite clear.
A vague whispering that hinted of greater things, of mysteries beyond the pale of human thought, beyond even the pale of human imagination. Mysteries, fact, logic built on reasoning. Things that any brain should know if it used all its reasoning power.
“We’re still mostly Earth,” he said. “We’re just beginning to learn a few of the things we are to know—a few of the things that were kept from us as human beings, perhaps because we were human beings. Because our human bodies were poor bodies. Poorly equipped for thinking, poorly equipped in certain senses that one has to have to know. Perhaps even lacking in certain senses that are necessary to true knowledge.”
He stared back at the dome, a tiny black thing dwarfed by the distance.
Back there were men who couldn’t see the beauty that was Jupiter. Men who thought that swirling clouds and lashing rain obscured the face of the planet. Unseeing human eyes. Poor eyes. Eyes that could not see the beauty in the clouds, that could not see through the storms. Bodies that could not feel the thrill of trilling music stemming from the rush of broken water.
Men who walked alone, in terrible loneliness, talking with their tongue like Boy Scouts wigwagging out their messages, unable to reach out and touch one another’s mind as he could reach out and touch Towser’s mind. Shut off forever from that personal, intimate contact with other living things.

After these epiphanies, both Fowler and Towser are reluctant to return to the dome and devolve back to man and dog. This sets up the memorable closing lines of the story:

“I can’t go back,” said Towser.
“Nor I,” said Fowler.
“They would turn me back into a dog,” said Towser.
“And me,” said Fowler, “back into a man.”  p. 220

This truly classic story provided me with a massive sense-of-wonder hit when I was twelve or so, and it still holds up pretty well today (although the idea of a dog with fleas on a planetary station probably needs updating).
I note that this story, and the previous tale Census, both have an elegiac feel—at this stage in the series we are at a point where humanity and its civilization is dying. They are also, I would suggest, anti-Galactic Empire stories: rather than mankind spreading out through the universe and subjugating it to its will, it is quietly fading away.3

The magazine’s trifecta is completed with a story that isn’t quite as good as the first two, but which isn’t far behind. When the Bough Breaks by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore is one of the three stories that Kuttner and/or Moore published in Astounding in 1944, and it’s saying something that this good to very good piece is the weakest of the three, but only just.
The story opens with a young couple and their young child receiving a visit by four small men with big heads. They say they are from the future and have arrived to educate Alexander, who will grow up to become an immortal superman and leader in their time. After this explanation they paralyze the parents and start the process:

Dobish came over, clambered up, and pried Alexander out of his mother’s grip. Horror moved in her eyes.
“We won’t hurt him,” Dobish said. “We just want to give him his first lesson. Have you got the basics, Finn?”
“In the bag.” Finn extracted a foot-long bag from his garments. Things came out of that bag. They came out incredibly. Soon the carpet was littered with stuff—problematical in design, nature, and use. Calderon recognized a tesseract.
The fourth dwarf, whose name, it turned out, was Quat, smiled consolingly at the distressed parents. “You watch. You can’t learn; you’ve not got the potential. You’re homo saps. But Alexander, now—”
Alexander was in one of his moods. He was diabolically gay. With the devil-possession of all babies, he refused to collaborate. He crept rapidly backwards. He burst into loud, squalling sobs. He regarded his feet with amazed joy. He stuffed his fist into his mouth and cried bitterly at the result. He talked about invisible things in a soft, cryptic monotone. He punched Dobish in the eye.
The little men had inexhaustible patience. Two hours later they were through. Calderon couldn’t see that Alexander had learned much.
Bordent twirled the object again. He nodded affably, and led the retreat. The four little men went out of the apartment, and a moment later Calderon and Myra could move.  p. 225

The rest of the story charts Alexander’s development under the tutelage of the four men. He learns to talk, develops telepathic powers, and learns to teleport. He also learns how to teleport others and, at one point, sends his mother to the store for candy. Then he starts giving his parents electric shocks, and starts behaving more malevolently. At this point, Alexander’s father, Calderon, discusses disciplining Alexander with Bordent, the leader of the four, but the latter refuses.

The final section of the story (spoiler) has Alexander playing with a forbidden blue egg. At this point the traumatised and frightened parents vacillate about intervening, even though they fear that this may prove lethal for him. Alexander finally completes the egg, and vanishes in a flash of white light.
This latter part is well executed. Not only is the parents’ fear and ambivalent attitude to their son convincingly developed (one wonders to what extent this taps into all parents’ potential or sometime ambivalence about their spawn) but the manner of Alexander’s demise has a subtlety that would be missing in a more explicit attempt on his life by the parents (which is what I expected).

The story has an early 1940’s, Twonky-ish, execution for the most part (e.g. the inclusion of strange little men with big heads) although the subject matter is more Mimsy Were the Borogoves (educational devices transform children into super-beings). However, the ending is darker and more emotionally complicated than in that latter piece, and it has a satisfying, albeit troubling, ending. I almost gave it four stars.

There are three other stories in this issue, and the first of these, Alien Envoy by Malcolm Jameson, would have been one of the stronger pieces in a normal edition of the magazine. It opens with Ellwood, chief of the Bureau of Interplanetary Military Intelligence, receiving a call saying that the military has disabled and captured one of the hitherto impenetrable alien cruisers that have been landing on Jupiter and the outer planets for many years.
After some back story about the military’s lack of success in interdicting the Ursans, Elwood arrives in orbit to examine the ship and finds a surviving alien on board. He decides to suit up and go inside the chamber himself (the temperature and pressure are similar to Jupiter).
Later, he begins to teach this odd looking octopus-like creature English, a process that takes a number of weeks as he has to use audio, video, and Morse code (the aliens may communicate with radio waves). Eventually, the alien learns enough of the language to communicate with Elwood and, at this point, suggests that its way will be less painful, and quicker:

Ellwood turned off his set meekly.
It had not occurred to him before that mechanically generated radiation might have subtle differences in characteristics from the organically generated variety. He found himself praying that now that it was his turn and he was on the receiving end the converse effect would not be equally painful.
It proved not to be, though there were times when Ellwood felt he would go mad from the exquisite ecstasies that sometimes rose to intensities amounting almost to agony. For the Ursan discarded all dots and dashes and went straight to the source of thought. By means of its own uncanny mechanism it managed to tune in on the neural currents of the brain itself.
It was a dreamlike experience, verging occasionally on the nightmarish. Ellwood had a hard time later conveying some stretches of it to the Grand Council. Indeed, he had a hard time even remembering part of what he experienced, so utterly alien to human conception were many of the bizarre scenes he saw and activities witnessed.
First he had the giddy feeling one has when succumbing to a general anesthetic. It was as if his soul was being torn from his body and forced to float in space. There was never a time when he could be sure that he saw what he saw, or heard what he heard, or felt what he felt. Sensed? Divined? Perceived intuitively? Some such verb seemed more appropriate. But shortly Ellwood quit caring. He was in another world, a world so weird, so fantastic, so amazing in its extremes and distortions of ordinarily accepted laws of nature that he knew that up to then human science had no more than scratched the surface of general knowledge.

Throughout the education process we learn more about the human race’s lack of military success against the Ursans, and that the latter have only ever fired on the humans when they were fired upon themselves. Moreover, the aliens have shown no interest in the inner planets of the solar system, only the gas giants.
The Ursan offers Ellwood a peace deal: in exchange for access to the outer planets of the solar system the aliens will do the same for humans on suitable planets in other parts of the galaxy. The Ursan adds that, if the humans do not accept the offer, they will continue with their operations, and will ignore them unless attacked.

The story itself is fairly straightforward but there are a number of ideas that make it quite an original piece: first, there is the idea of a war starting between humans and aliens due to an inability to communicate; secondly, the Ursans are technologically superior to humans to the extent that they don’t really care about us; finally, and despite the latter, the aliens are capable of being altruistic and/or pragmatic, and even friendly—in the last scene the Ursan uses its pseudopod to shake hands with Ellwood. All of this makes it an atypical story for Astounding. Yes, another one.

Redevelopment by George O. Smith is the third of his ‘Plutonian Lens’ stories, and this one starts off with the “headstrong” Sandra Drake arriving at the Lens in a more collegiate mood, and looking for help from John McBride, the station director. Steve has gone missing in the Haywire Queen and she wants her drive modified to an FTL one so she can look for him. Cue this kind of thing:

McBride wasted no time. “Al,” he said, “you fit the mag-G for vertical bi-lobar field to cover the nose of the crate with the top lobe, and Westy, you see that the mech-G generator in the nose induces the proper vectors in the cupralum bar. I’ll get Hank and Jim to touch up the wiring and safety devices. We’ll have this crate back in space within the hour!”
“Working a little fast, aren’t you?” asked Sandra.
“No. I don’t think so. You’ve got most of the main stuff in place. It’s merely a matter of running the alphatron lines correctly—remember, Sandra, alphons are not electrons and even low-alphon lines require smooth, round bends, otherwise they squirt off in a crackling alphonic discharge that will eat the side out of a steel tank. You’ve done most of the heavy work. It just requires touching up here and there; getting the proper field-intensity out of the gravitic generators and adjusting the output of the alphatrons. Then there is some tricky relay work with the safety circuits; it wouldn’t improve your beauty to suddenly find yourself sitting in the pilot’s chair at seven thousand gravities.  pp. 138-139

Once her ship is modified Drake sets off for Sirius, supposedly look for Steve. Of course he later turns up on the station, and it becomes obvious that Drake has pulled a fast one, wanting her ship modified so she can be the first person to discover an extra-solarian planet.
McBride and Steve follow Drake to Sirius in the Haywire Queen, and eventually find her stranded on a planet inhabited by feathered humanoids. After some back and forth over the radio about her situation they approach the planet to land but find that the ship’s drive stops working. The rest of the story has them work through the problem with a lot of makey-up science involving a nearby moon:

Larry Timkins looked up from a page of scrawled equations. “A slab of cupralum a hundred miles in diameter, rotating in the mechanogravitic field thrown out by Sirius would certainly soak up every bit of power. Must be a slick tie-in. The gravitron puts our O.K. on a resistive load. Hooked to the drive, everything goes phhht.”
“Sure. That’s part of the trouble. It’s the drive, coupled with the general gravitic interference cut up by Soaky.”
“Soaky?”
“I have hung a name on the satellite. Heretofore it has been nameless. We have named it Soaky.”  p. 158

Meanwhile we see Drake behaving like a brat with the alien Telfuians, but she gets her comeuppance when they go to meet the landing Haywire Queen without her (they understand the science behind the drive even though they haven’t been able to get off the planet). The ship takes the two ambassadors on board but they have to leave Drake on the planet for six months because of more dodgy science, giving her a chance to cool her high heels.
This story has all the faults of the first two in the series and is even more padded (there is endless chit chat: “science” problems, domestic arrangements, banter, and patronising conversations with and about Drake).
There is another of this series due in an upcoming issue, sigh.

The last story in the issue is a fairly short piece by A. E. van Vogt, The Harmonizer, which starts off with a soldier noticing an unusual plant in his garden before he returns to the front. The story then flashes back to prehistoric times when an alien spaceship crashes on Earth—but not before spilling its cargo of ibis trees. One later reproduces, and we see the pacification effect that the seeds have on carnivorous dinosaurs like Tyrannosaurus rex, which later become extinct.
This is moderately interesting but the twist ending, which (spoiler) involves the soldier (now revealed as a German) coming home to his house to fall under the plant’s thrall, is just a war-time gimmick. I’m also not sure it makes any sense unless the soldier (and the rest of the Reich) eat the seeds.

The Cover by William Timmins is a rather dark and uninspiring affair, and not one of his best. The bulldozer, however, with the impression of a mouth in its underside, looks suitably monsterish.
The Interior artwork comes mostly from A. Williams, who has a staggering twenty three illustrations in the issue. Most of these are spot illustrations, and fairly average stuff. That said, the last one for the Kuttner/Moore story, the empty booties, is quite good. Or at least suggestive.
Paul Orban and Frank Kramer provide the rest of the internal artwork (and given the length of Killdozer I would have expected more than three illustrations).
There is a very limited amount of non-fiction in this issue. CRT by John W. Campbell, Jr. is another of his dull editorials where he drones on about bits of radios or electronics. In this case he discusses the larger cathode ray screens that are becoming available, and how radio-hams can use them.

Time for a Universe by R. S. Richardson looks at how the age of the universe has been calculated by various means (expansion of the universe, uranium clock, dynamics of clusters, and statistics of binaries) and the differences in the results.
There is also a good anecdote about the necessity of being cautious about data:

There is a story told about Robert lvirchoff, the physicist, and Wilhelm von Bunsen, inventor of the Bunsen burner, that is worth repeating. The two were strolling across the campus of the University of Heidelberg one sunny afternoon deep in conversation upon some abstruse subject. As they passed a silver-coated globe set on the lawn as an ornament Bunsen absent-mindedly ran his fingers over the reflecting surface. To his amazement the side exposed directly to the sun was cooler than the side in shadow.
Immediately the two stopped and began excitedly to investigate this anomalous heating effect. Here perhaps was a new phenomenon in heat conduction involving some mysterious interaction between solar radiation and the reflecting properties of silver. While they were busy devising a theory to account for it the school janitor came by and reversed the position of the globe.
“I have to keep turning it around every once in a while on these hot days,” he remarked.
The story is pretty good except that it seems doubtful whether a reflecting surface as good as silver would heat up so seriously.  p. 107

There is no Analytical Laboratory this time around.4

A very good issue, maybe even one of the best ever.  ●

_____________________

1. Alva Rogers had this to say about this issue (A Requiem For Astounding, 1964):

November was distinguished by two outstanding novelettes. The first of these, “When the Bough Breaks,” by Lewis Padgett, could be considered a companion piece to the same author’s earlier “Mimsy Were the Borogoves.” Alexander is a normal eighteen-month-old son of a normal couple until four gnome-like characters present themselves and announce that they are from five hundred years in the future where it seems this same Alexander is still alive, the first of a new race of homo superior. The gnome-like characters are here at the future Alexander’s instructions to give the infant Alexander advanced training so he can get a head start on the future, and the results of this training are tragic and catastrophic.
The second novelette was the classic “Killdozer!” by Theodore Sturgeon. Sturgeon’s last story in Astounding had been “Medusa,” a less than memorable short in the February, 1942 issue. “Killdozer!” was up to the par of his classic 1941 novelette, “Microcosmic God,” and is, perhaps, his greatest story of his early period of science fiction writing. (“It,” from Unknown, was the greatest thing he ever wrote, including More Than Human, Farrar, Straus and Young, 1953, but this little gem was an out-and-out horror story and it isn’t fair to compare his science fiction writings with it.)
In its own way, “Killdozer! , the story of a giant bulldozer on a Pacific atoll during World War II that is brought to terrifying life by a malevolent alien intelligence—raising merry hell in the process—is as much a horror story as “It.” The picture of an utilitarian piece of machinery such as a bulldozer, without human guidance operating with deadly purpose, was very unsettling, to say the least.

Although Rogers mentions the ‘City’ series, he does not mention Desertion—even though he refers to the other three stories.

2. Paul Williams provides extensive story notes for Killdozer! at the back of Killdozer!, Volume III: The Complete Stories of Theodore Sturgeon (North Atlantic Books, 1996). Here are some brief extracts:

In terms of money and acclaim, it was arguably the most successful story of the first decade of his career. And in Sturgeon’s own telling of his life story, it punctuates his longest bout of “writer’s block,” usually described by him (in interviews, and in the foreword to his 1971 collection Sturgeon Is Alive and Well . . .) as lasting for six years, 1940 to 1946, with “Killdozer!” a solitary interruption in the middle, 1943.
Close examination of documentary evidence, primarily copies of letters to and from Sturgeon during and after this period, allows a more accurate dating. He did continue to write as long as he was still in New York, which he left (in order to manage his uncle’s hotel at Treasure Beach on the island of Jamaica) on June 28, 1941. Although he and his wife expected that the hotel job and change of scene would make it easier for him to go on writing fiction, he did not do any writing until April of 1944, on St. Croix in the Virgin Islands, when he wrote a (probably mainstream, i.e. not aimed at the science fiction or fantasy market) short story propagandizing in favor of the much misunderstood Nisei, or American-born Japs. (Italicized phrases are quotes from Sturgeon, in this case from a letter writen to his mother on May 8, 1944.) This story immediately went to a new agent, Nannine Joseph, who was unable to sell it; the manuscript does not survive among Sturgeon’s papers.
The first week of May, 1944, while still completing “the Nisei story,” [a mainstream story written in St. Croix in the Virgin Islands] TS began “Killdozer!”, which he wrote in nine days and immediately sent to [John Campbell]. From a letter to his mother, Christine Hamilton Sturgeon, July 8, 1944: “When we were right at the end of the rope, in comes a check and a letter from Jack Campbell. The check was a godsend, but the letter is something that I’ll treasure for the rest of my life. I must have sold him thirty-five or forty stories and never have I had such a missive from him. ‘I don’t know how I can place it or when I’ll be able to use it, but there, my friend, you have a hunk of story. I’m giving you our highest rate, which brings the check to $542.50. I’m glad you’re back in the field, and if you have any more with anything like this level of tenseness, send ’em along. I want ’em.’ ”
[ . . . ]
How Ted became a ’dozer driver (abbreviated from a conversation between TS and Paul Williams, December 6, 1975): “So while we were in Jamaica, along came December the 7th, and Pearl Harbor, and here we were at the hotel, ninety miles away from Kingston, with gasoline supplies cut off and no chance of getting any guests out there at all. The Americans started building a very large base at Fort Simonds, and we went down there and applied for jobs. I ended up on the Jamaican payroll, handling mess halls and barracks, and a food warehouse. And finally a man came along, clearing up ground around the housing area, and driving a bulldozer. And I fell in love with that machine. So he let me get up on it, and I learned an awful lot. Then I was transferred from quarters and barracks to a gasoline station. We serviced all kinds of equipment, and I got to know some of the American operators, and finally I got hired as a bulldozer operator. I was making more money than I’d ever seen in my life. Then when the base began to fold up, a guy came around recruiting for another job, in Puerto Rico at a place called Ensenada Honda, where they were building an enormous shipfitting plant, and a dry dock, and a landing field. And ultimately we moved over to St. Croix and I settled down to write.” Sturgeon worked in Puerto Rico as a bulldozer operator from August ’42 to December ’43, after which he worked for the Navy for a few months as a supply clerk and cost analyst. In April he and Dorothe and their two daughters moved to St. Croix.
[. . .]
In a letter to his father, Edward Waldo, Feb. 27, 1946, he further reported: “[. . .]the editor thought so well of it that he cancelled his production schedule and had it in print within weeks, as the lead novel in his magazine, with a cover illustration. (The original oil painting for that cover now hangs in my living room.) The magazine hit the stands just as I arrived back in the States, and apparently caused quite a stir in the science-fiction crowd.
[. . .]
Crown Publishing Co. released a new anthology of science-fiction last week. [The Best of Science Fiction.] A month ago, an advance copy was read by a science editor out in California who, on seeing KILLDOZER leading its section in the book, wrote me and asked me if I would take on this series of juveniles.” [. . .] And Crown has just sent me a check for $155 for the reprint rights! In other words, what seemed like a mere temporary alleviation of my circumstances down in St. Croix and nothing more, has proved to be the focal point of a whole series of fine breaks.”

The notes also include information about the 1974 TV movie made from the story, and details about a revised version of the story* used in a later Sturgeon collection Aliens 4:

Sept. 23, 1958, Sturgeon wrote his agent: I would like to correct galleys on the collection called KILLDOZER. One reason . . . has to do with the title story, which has been talked about for films ever since it was written. It is a World War II story and needn’t be; a very little invisible mending will take care of that. It also needs a touch here and there in characterization and dialogue—for example, Street & Smith’s editing “damn” into “care” every time they saw it, so that your bulldozer operators keep saying “I don’t give a care . . .” and one or two other small repairs.
So Sturgeon did rewrite the last eight paragraphs.

* The updated version of Killdozer! is unhelpfully listed as a separate story by ISFDB: Killdozer! (revised).

3. As well as Desertion being an anti-Galactic Empire story, it is another which does not fit into the supposed human primacy/exceptionalism rule said to exist in Campbell’s Astounding.

4. The Analytical Laboratory results for this issue appeared in the February 1945 issue:

I get the impression Campbell wrote this one before lunch.  ●

rssrss

The Long List Anthology #5, edited by David Steffen, 2019 (part 2)

Summary:
This is an anthology that collects all the short stories and novelettes (and one novella) that made it on to the 2019 Hugo nominations list but didn’t have enough votes to make it to the finals. This second part of the review looks at the nine novelettes and one novella (the first review covered the short stories), which includes very good work by Suzanne Palmer and Kij Johnson, and good or better work by Kelly Robson, Carolyn Ives Gilman, José Pablo Iriarte, Brooke Bolander, and Greg Egan.

ISFDB link
Amazon UK/US copy

Other reviews:1
Goodreads, Various 1/2

_____________________

Editor, David Steffen

Fiction:
Mother Tongues • short story by S. Qiouyi Lu ∗∗∗+
Field Biology of the Wee Fairies • short story by Naomi Kritzer
Meat and Salt and Sparks • short story by Rich Larson +
Sour Milk Girls • short story by Erin Roberts
Asphalt, River, Mother, Child • short story by Isabel Yap
The Starship and the Temple Cat • short story by Yoon Ha Lee
Waterbirds • short story by G. V. Anderson
You Can Make a Dinosaur, But You Can’t Help Me • short story by K. M. Szpara
And Yet • short story by A. T. Greenblatt
She Still Loves the Dragon • short story by Elizabeth Bear
An Agent of Utopia • novelette by Andy Duncan
A Study in Oils • novelette by Kelly Robson +
The Substance of My Lives, the Accidents of Our Births • novelette by José Pablo Iriarte
No Flight Without the Shatter • novelette by Brooke Bolander
How to Swallow the Moon • novelette by Isabel Yap
A World to Die For • novelette by Tobias S. Buckell
Thirty-Three Percent Joe • novelette by Suzanne Palmer
The Privilege of the Happy Ending • novelette by Kij Johnson
The Nearest • novelette by Greg Egan
Umbernight • novella by Carolyn Ives Gilman +

Non-fiction:
Poisson D’Arte • cover by Amanda Makepeace
Foreword • by Dan Steffen

_____________________

This is the second part of the review of this anthology, and it looks at the nine novelettes and one novella (the first part, which you may want to read before this, considered the ten short stories).

The first of the novelettes (and the only story in the book that doesn’t come from a free online magazine) is An Agent of Utopia by Andy Duncan which, given the story opens with a traveller visiting Thomas More in the Tower of London, will be of interest to those of you who have read or watched Wolf Hall by Hilary Mantel. The man tells More he is Aliquo, and that he comes from Utopia. The significance of this latter comment becomes clear in a conversation Aliquo has later with More’s daughter (for those of you, who, like me, are unaware that Utopia is a fictional work of More’s):

“Call me Aliquo,” I said.
“Your position?”
“In this land, only emissary.”
“From whom? What business had you with my father?”
Heeding her manservant’s warning, I chose the truth. “I offered to free him,” I said, “and to convey him home in triumph.”
Her eyes widened. “You are mad. How? Home to Chelsea? Home to me?”
“No, Madame. To my homeland across the sea.”
“The impertinence! What name is given this homeland?”
“It is called Utopia. Your father wrote of it.”
She laughed aloud, and a score of heads turned our way in shock as the echoes rained down from the arches above. Beside the tomb, without interrupting his recitation, the guide shook his head, placed the stump of a finger to his chin, and blew.
“He wrote of it, indeed!” she said, in a lower voice. “A fairy story for his friend Erasmus, invented of whole cloth! A series of japes at the follies of the day.”
“Is all this a jape?” I asked, with a gesture at the soaring chapel all around. “Is this statue atop the tomb a jape, because he has a silver head, as the king did not in life? Mere representation is not a jape, Madame. Your father represented us, but we are not his invention.”

More is later executed off-stage, and the rest of the story concerns Aliquo’s attempts to retrieve More’s head from a spike on Stone Gate at London Bridge. This adventure is entertainingly and colourfully relayed, and has some good descriptions of London life at the time. However, at the end of the story (spoiler), Aliquo begins to hear More talking to him from the severed head. After he gives dead man’s remains to the daughter he then hears More’s voice in his own head. This is all a bit baffling, and never explained, and it spoils what had been a pretty good story to that point. That said, if you like Leiber’s ‘Fafhrd and the Gray Mouser’ stories, you’ll probably like this, regardless.
A Study in Oils by Kelly Robson2 has as its protagonist a Lunarian ice-hockey player called Zhang Lei, who has had a “disable switch” fitted, the result of an on-pitch fight where he killed an opposing player:

The day after he’d killed Dorgon, Zhang Lei’s team hauled him to a surgeon. Twenty minutes was all it took to install the noose around his carotid artery, then two minutes to connect the disable button and process the change to his ID. His teammates were as gentle as they could be. When it was all done, the team’s enforcer clasped Zhang Lei’s shoulder in a meaty hand.
“We test it now,” Korchenko said, and Zhang Lei had gone down like a slab of meat.
When he woke, his friends looked concerned, sympathetic, even a little regretful.
That attitude didn’t last long. After the surgery, the team traveled to a game in Surgut. Zhang Lei’s disable button was line-of-sight. Anyone who could see it could trigger it. He passed out five times along the way, and spent most of the game slumped on the bench, head lolling, his biom working hard to keep him from brain damage. His teammates had to carry him home.
For a few weeks, they treated him like a mascot, hauling him from residence to practice rink to arena and back again. They soon tired of it and began leaving him behind. The first time he went out alone he came back on a cargo float, with a shattered jaw and boot-print-shaped bruises on his gut. That was okay. He figured he deserved it.
Then one night after an embarrassing loss, the team began hitting the button for fun.

As a tribunal considers Lei’s case he flees to Earth to escape a gang of “Lunnite brawlers” who are searching for him, and hides out at an artist’s retreat in Paizuo, in China. After he settles into the artists’ colony, the rest of the story focuses on his painting (a career he would have pursued instead of ice-hockey if it had paid), as well as the culture shock he and the other artists experience there—the area is unusual in that it is a natural environment, and has a limited amount of the enmeshed tech and overlaid virtual reality of their time:

All of the Paizuo guest houses answered immediately. A map highlighted various routes up and down the valley. The guideway landing stage sent him the past two days of traffic history and offered average travel times to various downslope destinations. A lazy stream of ID information flowed from the guest artists, thirty in total.
Several hazard warnings floated over their targets: Watch for snakes. Beware of dog. Dangerous cliff. But no pings from the locals, or any of the crops, equipment, or businesses. Not even from the wooden hand-truck upended over a pile of dirt at the side of the path. But no way this village ran everything data-free.

Indeed, one of the great strengths of this piece is how Robson creates, in information dense but clear prose, a vivid and convincing future world which, unlike many other SF stories, almost stands up in 3D off the page.
In between Lei’s travels around the area (he speaks to the locals, fishes with his bare hands in the rice paddies, takes a water buffalo for a walk, etc.) Lei completes a painting:

His old viewcatcher compositions and stealthily-made reference sketches were gone forever, so he worked from memory. He attacked the canvas with his entire arsenal, blocking out a low-angle view of Mons Hadley and the shining towers of Sklad, with the hab’s vast hockey arena in the foreground under a gleaming crystal dome. The view might be three hundred and eighty thousand kilometers away, but it lay at his fingertips, and he created it anew every time he closed his eyes.
The paint leapt to Zhang Lei’s brush, clung to the canvas, spread thin and lean and true exactly where it should, the way it should, creating the effects he intended. After a week of flailing with sappy greens and sloppy, organic shapes, he finally had a canvas under control. He worked late, muttering good night to the other artists without raising his eyes from his work. When dawn stretched its fingers through the studio’s high windows, the painting was done—complete with a livid crimson stain spreading under the arena’s crystal dome.
He didn’t remember deciding to paint blood on the ice, or putting crimson on his palette. But the color belonged there. It was the truth. It showed what he did.

The painting is integral to the story’s conclusion, when (spoiler) his social worker Martha presents it to the tribunal as evidence of Lei’s regret.
I have a couple of minor criticisms: first, the idea of Lei’s disable mechanism is a rather draconian sanction from a culture that encourages a form of hockey akin to blood-sport; second, the story drags at the end, and it would have been better to have had the ice-hockey fight scene inserted between the water buffalo and pre-festival material (which, together, end up reading like What I Did On My Summer Holidays). But these are relatively minor niggles about what is otherwise a cohesive story set in a particularly well-realised future world.
The Substance of My Lives, the Accidents of Our Births starts with Jamie and Alicia, a couple of teenagers, watching a new arrival at their trailer-park—a man called Benjamin who is a recently released murderer. Then Jamie recognises the man, and we learn that Jamie is a reincarnated immortal who has had several past lives—and one of them was the woman that Benjamin murdered . . . .
The rest of the story charts Jamie’s growing pains (he is bullied at school because of his gender identity), his desire for a relationship with Alicia, and, predominantly, his effort to clear Benjamin’s name when he remembers/realises that Benjamin didn’t kill him/her.
The story is a bit on the slight side, and there is no explanation or examination of Jamie’s ability to reincarnate but, that said, there is some good story telling on display here and there are some neat one-liners.
No Flight Without the Shatter by Brooke Bolander has an impenetrable start (think R. A. Lafferty at his most oblique) but it eventually resolves into a story about a young girl called Linnea, the last human on an despoiled and exhausted Earth. She is cared for by three aunties who appear to be animals in human form, and they are building a spaceship.
Other animals arrive in the form of humans throughout the tale. Then one night they put their skins back on and tell their stories. Once they finish their testimony, they pass through the campfire so their shadows can board the ship. The last ones to do this are Linnea’s aunties, and then the ship leaves:

Shades marching two-by-two onto a shadowy ship—shadows of tiger and thylacine, dodo and dingo, elephant and sharphorned rhinoceros. They hop and fly and pace up the gangplank in silence. The fire beneath them dies to embers as the light in the east grows and the last disappears inside, the rusted old hatch slamming shut behind them with a clang.
Nothing happens, at first. Then there’s a slow rumbling from within the rocket’s guts, a rust-rattling, bolt-testing shudder that grows and grows and grows until the entire ship and all the ground around-abouts it are shaking like a penny in a tin can. The first red rays of the sun set fire to the scaffoldings and fins, the soldered seams that patch the scavenged eyetooth-length of the thing together. Orange dust rises like smoke. The long, pointed shadow at its base jitters faintly.
The ship begins to topple over. At the same time, its shadow pulls itself free of the dusty ground, ascending with a noise like a hurricane wind made up of the calls of every animal to ever creep or crawl or flap or low, a joyous, cacophonous menagerie. It lifts higher and higher, charging to meet the dawn as, far below, the ship collapses completely. The air is full of sand and twigs and old litter picked up by the whirl—candy wrappers, plastic bags, feathers. Chunks of scaffolding tumble-bang to earth end-over-appetite, adding their own clattering boom and roar to the morning as the shadow pulls away. It is a cloud—a bird—a mote swimming across the eye—and then it is nothing at all.
The triumphant menagerie song fades to an echo. A trick of the wind, occasionally interrupted by another piece of the ship’s struts coming down with a tooth-rattling thud.
Goodbye.

The story ends with Linnea building an airship and travelling the world to collect all of humanity’s spirits.
This plot synopsis doesn’t show, however, that this is really a discursive fable or elegy about the ills done to the Earth and its native species (there are several sections where an omniscient narrator invites the reader to view events from the Earth’s viewpoint, for example). As to how successful this is . . . well, that varies: the first half is more opaque than it needs to be, but the second is clearer and, at times, quite poetic too. A more straightforward beginning would have produced a stronger piece, but it’s still worth your time.
How to Swallow the Moon by Isabel Yap is the writer’s second story in this anthology, and it is set in a world where there is myth/history about a dragon eating two of the Earth’s moons, leaving only the one we have now. It opens with Amira the servant coming to Anyag (a cloistered noble woman who she secretly loves) and taking her down to the river to bathe. After some background material a suitor later comes to the court, and Amira realises that she will lose her mistress and have to return to her village.
The rest of the story has the pair admitting their love for each other, and charts their efforts to be together. At the conclusion of the story, the pair plan to flee after the wedding, but Amira catches the suitor (who she now realises is the dragon who ate the moons) taking Anyag away on a boat. They fight, and when Amira wins, the suitor transforms. The two women then end up in the dragon’s stomach, and they use song and magic to defeat it.
This is essentially a relationship story with fantasy trappings, and one which uses a lot of words to tell its slight tale.
A World to Die For by Tobias S. Buckell gets off to a Damnation Alley/Mad Max-type start as raiders in a post-Collapse middle America attack a trade convoy trying to pass through their patch without paying fees. However, the convoy is a trap, and the raiders surrender to the heavily armed Hauz Shad mercenaries who surprise them. They are looking for Chendra, the narrator, or someone who looks like her. When they find her, she is taken to Armand, who is a black marketeer who slips between various parallel worlds trading valuable goods and people.
After a variety of adventures in various climate-change challenged worlds, Chendra meets a version of herself called Che (who smuggles people from the bad outcome universes to an Edenic one), the story dissolves into an extended and tedious lecture which replicates the dystopian piousness of many current climate change stories. That is to say: set up a future world or worlds that have an environment far worse than anything predicted by the last IPCC report, and then do a lot of simplistic finger-wagging (there is, among the other bumper stickers here, a We Have to Make Hard Choices. Gosh, really?)
Those of you who liked Suzanne Palmer’s 2018 Hugo winning novelette, The Secret Life of Bots, have another treat waiting for you in Thirty-Three Percent Joe. This starts with Joe the soldier’s Cybernetic Cerebral Control unit welcoming a new replacement elbow and introducing it to Joe’s other AI body replacement parts. It isn’t long, however, before we see them squabbling in the wake of a comment that Joe’s visiting mother makes about his military service record:

[CC] While this is a matter that falls into your operational jurisdiction, Left Ear, it is my recommendation that, while Joe has the right to access all conversation made in his presence while he has been unconscious, we do not log this one or bring it to his attention unless pressed to do so by more urgent circumstances. Are you agreed?
[EAR::LEFT::AUG-IMPLANT] I agree.
[CC] I am open to direct and confidential dissent.
. . .
There being none, let the record show the vote was unanimous in favor. I am logging confusion from our provisionary New Elbow Unit on why we might do so, so I will explain. Joe did not aspire toward being a soldier at all, but a baker. The Mother Unit exerts influence on Joe through counterfactual and manipulative means that causes Joe to act in ways not optimal for his own well-being, or by extension, ours. Many of us are not the original cybernetic replacement parts.
[SPLEEN::UNIT] I am. I should be in charge by reasons of seniority, or at least get double the votes over the rest of the idiots here.
[HEART] You couldn’t manage shit, Spleen, you asshole.
[INTESTINAL::TRACT REPLACEMENT::LOWER] Hey. Watch it.
[CC] New Elbow, I am informed by the external diagnostics systems that you have been given a perfect passing score.
[. . .]
Welcome to Joe.

In between these exchanges, and the CC’s attempts to keep Joe from getting killed in the battle to retake Ohio, we see matters from Joe’s point of view. These sections mostly take place in the mess hall, where he banters with his friend Stotz, the base cook, and, with the CC’s help, Joe improves the quality of the food and indirectly his chances of survival. These latter sections are reminiscent of Harry Harrison’s Bill, the Galactic Hero, and have the same dark humour.
This is the story that I have so far enjoyed the most.
The Privilege of the Happy Ending by Kij Johnson is set in what initially seems like an early medieval version of the English countryside, but there are a couple of significant differences. The first is that the protagonist, a five-year-old girl called Ada, is accompanied by a talking chicken called Blanche, and the second is that the countryside is about to be overrun by swarms of wastoures, voracious creatures which resemble velociraptors—as Ada and Blanche find out when they hide up a tree in the forest:

The wastoures came. The trees shook and the tall grasses shivered, first from animals fleeing, every deer and mouse and marten and vole running for its life, but then from the wastoures themselves. They trampled the grasses as they poured like a flood across the clearing, eddied wherever they found some living thing to eat, crashed against the trees and scoured the bark with their claws and talons, until swarming they swept past. But always more.
The night was bright-mooned, alas. Ada saw a fallow doe pulled down in her flight (for she would not run faster than her fawn) and skeletonized quicker than a hen lays an egg, and the fawn even faster than she. The wastoures swirled around a pile of stones in the clearing until they unearthed a fox den and ate the kits. There was a great anguished roaring in the forest, which Blanche whispered surely was a bear pulled from her hiding place and killed. The wastoures could smell Ada and Blanche, and some spent the night leaping at the elm tree’s trunk. But wastoures cannot fly, nor could they jump high enough to reach that first low branch. After a while Ada saw that they could not get to her.
Hour after hour; the moon set, and still they churned below, a seething darkness in the dim starlight. Ada feared she and Blanche would fall, for she was not very good at knots yet, but nothing bad happened. She was only rocked gently like an infant in its cradle, far above the tossing sea of wastoures, and at last she slept, for a child cannot always be awake even in a time of terror.
But Blanche did not sleep, watching from her bright golden-black eyes.

The rest of the story tells of Ada and Blache’s return to their devastated village, and their further travels throughout the ruined land in search of sanctuary. After various adventures we find that Blanche cannot only talk but that she (spoiler) has the ability to face down the wastoures, and compel them to kill themselves and their own. The story ends with a climactic encounter in the lair of the wastoure queen.
What would be a pretty good fantasy adventure is further improved by the quirkiness of the talking hen, and also by the author’s frequent knowing asides to the reader about the fate of numerous minor characters. These comments range from the world weary to the mildly belligerent:

Are you counting the deaths in this story, keeping a roster, keeping score? Is it higher or lower than The Wizard of Oz? There are more than I have told you.

I can see why this story won the 2019 World Fantasy Award for Best Novella, and it is another one of my favourites in the anthology.
The Nearest by Greg Egan opens with a police sergeant called Kate arriving at a murder scene where a husband and two daughters are dead and the wife is missing:

When Kate reached the house there were two squad cars and a SOCO van parked in the street, but their presence had attracted no onlookers; it seemed the neighbors here had the decency not to flock around the blue-and-white tape, gawking, while the ever-economising clickbait sites were probably waiting for a chance to outsource their photographic needs to the next fast food delivery that overflew the crime scene.

The rest of the opening convincingly details the drone and VR examination of the site, and this is then followed by backstory which shows us Kate’s homelife with her husband and kids. Then, a day or so later, Kate gets a call that the wife’s car has been found.
At this point the story takes a major right turn, and chapter four opens with Kate waking up and realising that there is a strange man beside her in bed. When she gets out of bed and rushes to see if Michael, her baby, is alright, she finds something that looks like a mechanical doll in his bed. She then threatens the stranger and questions him about her son’s whereabouts before forcing the man to lead her to him. What the man does is take her to a nearby hospital, insisting that she gets examined, but security arrest him when she identifies herself as a detective. By the time Kate gets home, however, she finds the police there and sees Michael being taken away. She realise that the police are part of what is happening.
The rest of the story follows the renegade Kate as she tracks down other people who have suffered similar events—i.e. their close family members turning in to “hollow men” like her husband—and she eventually (spoiler) meets a group hiding out in a warehouse. They think the hollow men have been infected by a virus, and are planning an uprising against them.
All of these events take place in an atmosphere of Dickian paranoia, which crests when Kate phones an old friend abroad and realises that she too has become a hollow person. However, when Kate thinks about the call afterwards, she realises that a hollow person wouldn’t rerecord their phone message. Then she realises that—if there is a virus—then she and her fellow conspirators may be the infected group, and that their view of reality may be altered.
This—the idea that a virus could affect human perception so as to make it impossible to tell who correctly perceives reality—plays out in an interesting manner. However, the ending is, perhaps unavoidably, anti-climactic (not so much ‘I woke up and found it was all a dream’ as ‘I woke up and found I was mad’). It is a worthwhile read for all that.
Umbernight by Carolyn Ives Gilman is set on human-settled planet called Dust, which has a peculiar binary star system whose characteristics force the columnists to live underground: during “Umbernight,” the system’s second star Umber rises, and periodically opens its “shroud,” (i.e. the position of the shielding planetary nebula changes to allow deadly radiation to reach Dust):

I remember how my mother explained Umbernight to me as a child. “There’s a bad star in the sky, Michiko. We didn’t know it was there at first because there’s a shroud covering it. But sometimes, in winter, the shroud pulls back and we can see its light. Then we have to go inside, or we would die.”
After that, I had nightmares in which I looked up at the sky and there was the face of a corpse hanging there, covered with a shroud. I would watch in terror as the veil would slowly draw aside, revealing rotted flesh and putrid gray jelly eyes, glowing with a deadly unlight that killed everything it touched.
I didn’t know anything then about planetary nebulae or stars that emit in the UV and X-ray spectrum. I didn’t know we lived in a double-star system, circling a perfectly normal G-class star with a very strange, remote companion. I had learned all that by the time I was an adolescent and Umber finally rose in our sky. I never disputed why I had to spend my youth cooped up in the cave habitat trying to make things run. They told me then, “You’ll be all grown up with kids of your own before Umber comes again.” Not true. All grown up, that part was right. No kids.

The narrator Mick, their planetary surveyor, returns to the habitat to find factional wrangling about whether or not to go and recover a cargo capsule sent by their ancestors. The problem is that the package will land at their old base, Newton’s Eye, which is 200 hours travel away, and Umbernight has already begun. In particular, they are approaching the period where the shroud has previously opened.
Eventually the decision is made to send a team, and the first part of the story tells of their journey across the planet’s surface to Newton’s Eye. This is engrossing stuff: well characterised, and with good world-building. After a series of mini-challenges (partly with the environment, but also with each other) they arrive at the initial landing site:

We were moving fast by now, through a landscape formed by old eruptions. Misshapen claws of lava reached out of the darkness on either side, frozen in the act of menacing the road. At last, as we were thinking of stopping, we spied ahead the shape of towering ribs against the stars—the remains of the settlers’ original landing craft, or the parts of it too big to cannibalize. With our goal so close, we pushed on till we came to the cleared plain where it lay, the fossil skeleton of a monster that once swam the stars.
We all stood gazing at it, reluctant to approach and shatter its isolation.
[. . .]
The eastern sky glowed a cold pink and azure. The landing site was a basin of black volcanic rock. Steaming pools of water made milky with dissolved silicates dappled the plain, smelling of sodium bicarbonate. As I watched the day come, the pools turned the same startling blue as the sky, set like turquoise in jet.
The towering ribs of the lander now stood out in the strange, desolate landscape. I thought of all the sunrises they had seen—each one a passing fragment of time, a shard of a millennium in which this one was just a nanosecond of nothing.

After the team recover the payload and start back (spoiler), an X-ray alarm warns them the shroud has opened and, from this point forward, it becomes a different sort of story entirely as the planet spawns many forms of life which thrive in the high radiation environment. These life-forms are hostile, and the team has to fight and run to survive.
The story is a great read but it has a few suspension-of-disbelief problems that you don’t want to think too hard about. The first and greatest of these problems is their discovery of the planet’s alien life forms, whose existence is hinted at on the journey out. But it is not until the journey back—when they appear to come under attack from what seem like malevolent poltergeists—that we realise that something is really going on. When Mick later puts a luminescent look-through tree leaf across his faceplate, another world is revealed:

What looked like a rocky waste by the dim starlight was suddenly a brightly lit landscape. And everywhere I looked, the land bloomed with organic shapes unlike any I had ever seen. Under a rock by my feet was a low, domed mound pierced with holes like an overturned colander, glowing from within. Beneath the everlives were bread-loaf-shaped growths covered with plates that slid aside as I watched, to expose a hummocked mound inside. There were things with leathery rinds that folded out like petals to collect the unlight, which snapped shut the instant I turned on my lamp. In between the larger life-forms, the ground was crawling with smaller, insect-sized things, and in the distance I could see gauzy curtains held up by gas bladders floating on the wind.
An entire alternate biota had sprung to life in Umberlight. Dust was not just the barren place we saw by day, but a thriving dual ecosystem, half of which had been waiting as spores or seeds in the soil, to be awakened by Umber’s radiation. I knelt down to see why they had been so invisible. By our light, some of them were transparent as glass. Others were so black they blended in with the rock. By Umberlight, they lit up in bright colors, reflecting a spectrum we could not see.

This world, with its invisible-one-moment-visible-the-next flora and fauna, was the part of the story I had the greatest trouble with: I couldn’t understand why, at the very least, they wouldn’t have noticed these organisms underfoot as they walked.
Other problems with the story’s credibility are the team’s apparent lack of radio or GPS (the dog could have been picked up if they radioed base to send someone to follow them and pick it up, and GPS would have stopped Mick getting lost in Mazy Lakes on the way back). Maybe these technologies would not work in the high radiation environment, but if this was explained, I missed it.
Setting those quibbles aside the story has a realistic setting, an absorbing story, and the last part is quite a ride. If you are a fan of Hal Clement then you’ll like this as Gilman appears to be channelling that writer in the first part of the story, and outdoing him to the power of n in the second. I can see why this tale was selected for so many of the Year’s Bests, and I would have probably done so too.

There isn’t much non-fiction in this volume. The lovely cover, Poisson D’Arte, is by Amanda Makepeace (shame they had to shotgun it to death with all the author names—could the designer not have reduced the type-size and layout to avoid overprinting the flying boat—or at the very least dump the “Featuring”?)
There is also a very brief Foreword by Dan Steffen, where he praises his cover artist (who contributed the series’ previous two covers) and encourages people to nominate and vote for the Hugo Awards.

In conclusion, this volume is, almost inevitably, a mixed bag of stories—and a selection that almost exclusively comes from the free online magazines (you wonder what the Hugo nominators missed in the print and paid parts of the short fiction field).3 That said, I thoroughly enjoyed reading my way through it, and I feel marginally better informed about the current state of the field than I did before. Steffen should be commended for assembling these volumes.
I’ll look forward to seeing how these stories compare with the finalists for the year, and the Best of the Year volumes, all of which I’ll try to get around to reading in due course.  ●

_____________________

1. I don’t understand why this volume has been so overlooked by reviewers (at least according to ISFDB and a brief web search). Not even Locus seem to have covered it.

2. Robson’s story is apparently the fourth in ‘The Lucky Peach’ series. The ISFDB page for that is here. I’ll be digging out the others in due course (one of which was a Hugo Finalist).

3. It is worth looking at the contents of this volume is terms of which publications they come from, and how many of them appear in the other Best of the Year anthologies.

Publications: Clarkesworld (6 stories), Uncanny (4), Tor.com (3), Lightspeed, (2), Asimov’s SF, Apex, Strange Horizons, Beneath Ceaseless Skies, and Agent of Utopia: New & Selected Stories—an author collection (1 each). The stories I liked mostly came from Clarkesworld, and those I disliked mostly from Uncanny.
These stories, like the Hugo Award finalists, bias heavily towards free online magazines (there is only one selection that didn’t appear in that form), although recommendations in various social media bubbles may also have skewed the choices—it is easy to link to an online story online, so to speak.
I note that you only needed between 23 to 48 nominations to appear as an also-ran short story or novelette—not a lot of votes; the finalists gathered between 53 to 216 nominations—not much more.

Best of the Years: the other volumes published for 2018 were The Year’s Best Military & Adventure SF: Volume 5, edited by David Afsharirad; The Best Science Fiction of the Year: Volume Four, edited by Neil Clarke; The Best Horror of the Year: Volume Eleven, edited by Ellen Datlow; The Year’s Best Dark Fantasy & Horror: 2019, edited by Paula Guran; The Year’s Best Science Fiction & Fantasy 2019, edited by Rich Horton; The Year’s Top Robot and AI Stories, edited by Allan Kaster; Best of British Science Fiction 2018, edited by Donna Scott; The Best Science Fiction & Fantasy of the Year: Volume Thirteen, edited by Jonathan Strahan.
The stories from The Long List Anthology that also appeared in these volumes are (A=Afsharirad, C=Clarke, G=Guran, H=Horton, K=Kaster, Sc=Scott, St=Strahan; no stories appeared in Ellen Datlow’s anthologies):
Lu (C, St), Kritzer (St), Larson (C, K, St), Roberts (C, G), Yap#1 (G), Lee (H, St), Anderson (Sc), Szpara (-), Greenblatt (G), Bear (-), Duncan (St), Robson (-), Iriarte (-), Bolander (-), Yap#2 (-), Buckell (-), Palmer (A), Johnson (-), Egan (-), Gilman (C, H, K).
The Larson and Gilman stories make it into three volumes; the Lu, Roberts, and Lee make into two; half a dozen of the others make it into one.
A lot of the no-shows are not surprising, but I’m puzzled why no-one used the Johnson—although there is no annual Best Fantasy anthology. I find it odd that the Roberts and the Lee both made it into two other volumes.
There appears to be a distinct lack of overlap between the tastes (or rather the declared choices) of the Hugo nominators, and those of the Best of the Year anthologists. Maybe the latter just read more widely.  ●

rssrss

The Long List Anthology #5, edited by David Steffen, 2019 (part 1)

Summary:
This anthology collects all the short stories and novelettes (and one novella) that made it on to the 2019 Hugo nominations list but didn’t reach the final ballot. This part of the review looks at the ten short stories (the other ten are longer lengths) which include one very good story by G. V Anderson, Waterbirds, and good or better work by S. Qiouyi Lu, Rich Larson, Isabel Yap, and A. T. Greenblatt.

ISFDB link
Amazon UK/US copy

Other reviews:
Goodreads, Various 1/2

_____________________

Editor, David Steffen

Fiction:
Mother Tongues • short story by S. Qiouyi Lu ∗∗∗+
Field Biology of the Wee Fairies • short story by Naomi Kritzer
Meat and Salt and Sparks • short story by Rich Larson +
Sour Milk Girls • short story by Erin Roberts
Asphalt, River, Mother, Child • short story by Isabel Yap
The Starship and the Temple Cat • short story by Yoon Ha Lee
Waterbirds • short story by G. V. Anderson
You Can Make a Dinosaur, But You Can’t Help Me • short story by K. M. Szpara
And Yet • short story by A. T. Greenblatt
She Still Loves the Dragon • short story by Elizabeth Bear
An Agent of Utopia • novelette by Andy Duncan
A Study in Oils • novelette by Kelly Robson +
The Substance of My Lives, the Accidents of Our Births • novelette by José Pablo Iriarte
No Flight Without the Shatter • novelette by Brooke Bolander
How to Swallow the Moon • novelette by Isabel Yap
A World to Die For • novelette by Tobias S. Buckell
Thirty-Three Percent Joe • novelette by Suzanne Palmer
The Privilege of the Happy Ending • novelette by Kij Johnson
The Nearest • novelette by Greg Egan
Umbernight • novella by Carolyn Ives Gilman +

Non-fiction:
Poisson D’Arte • cover by Amanda Makepeace
Foreword • by David Steffen

_____________________

This book was suggested as a group read in The Best Science Fiction and Fantasy of the Year Facebook group1 that Jim Harris and I run (it was on special offer, so a number of us bought it), and we are currently about three-quarters the way through the volume.
As this is a big anthology I thought I’d break this review into two parts (a single 10,000 word post here would just add to the global death toll), so here is the first, which covers the ten short stories.

In the Introduction to the first volume of the series, David Steffan explains the idea behind the anthology:

I’ve followed the Hugo Awards for years, and have found them the most compelling of the science fiction literary awards for a variety of reasons. [Anyone] who pays for a Supporting membership for the year’s WorldCon2 also has the right to nominate for and vote for the Hugos. Another reason is the Hugo Packet, which is a package of many of the nominated works [that voters can reference before the final round of voting]. I pay for a Supporting membership every year for the packet, which makes a great recommended reading list. If that sounds like a great deal, it is [. . .].
[. . .]
Every year, after the Hugo Award Ceremony at WorldCon, WSFS publishes a longer list of works that were nominated by the Hugo voters. I use this list as a recommended reading list, too, but I have mused that it would be nice if that longer list were all in one place like the Hugo packet, for convenient reading.

Hence this anthology and the four earlier volumes in the series.

The first story is Mother Tongues by S. Qiouyi Lu, which opens with a woman called Jiawen Liu completing a spoken language test before going to see a language broker. The latter tells Liu that she hasn’t done as well as she thought in her English test, and Liu realises that she won’t be able to sell her poor English language skills for much money (the story’s gimmick is that machines can scan—and remove—a person’s language ability and implant it into another person). Now she may not be able to pay for her daughter’s education at Stanford.
The broker asks her if she wants to sell her native Mandarin, and Liu says she will consider the matter.
For the rest of that week Liu experiments with not using her native language, but it is difficult, especially when she shops with her elderly mother:

You can cheat with your mother a little bit: you know enough Cantonese to have a halting conversation with her, as she knows both Cantonese and Mandarin. But it’s frustrating, your pauses between words lengthy as you try to remember words and tones.
“干吗今天说广东话?” your mother asks in Mandarin. She’s pushing the shopping cart—she insists, even when you offer—and one of the wheels is squeaking. She hunches over the handle, but her eyes are bright.
Ngo jiu syut Gwongdungwaa,” you reply in Cantonese. Except it’s not exactly that you want to speak Cantonese; you have to, for now. You don’t know how to capture the nuance of everything you’re going through in Cantonese, either, so you leave it at that. Your mother gives you a look, but she doesn’t bring it up again and indulges you, speaking Cantonese as the two of you go around the supermarket and pile the shopping cart high with produce, meat, and fish.
You load the car with the groceries and help your mother into the passenger seat. As you adjust the mirrors, your mother speaks again.
“你在担心什么?” she asks. Startled, you look over at her. She’s peering at you, scrutinizing you; you can never hide anything from her. Of course she can read the worry on your face, the tension in your posture; of course she knows something’s wrong.

When she tells her mother about her test the latter is surprisingly sympathetic (the latter’s responses are in Mandarin, so English speakers don’t know exactly what is said).
The story ends (spoiler) with Liu selling her Mandarin and, as a result of the process (and this is perhaps the story’s weakness), she loses her ability to speak and read the language. When Liu, her daughter, and her mother get together for a meal she also discovers that some of her Cantonese has gone as well (the language has similar roots to Mandarin), and she doesn’t understand a lot of the dinner table conversation.
The use of untranslated Mandarin and Cantonese in the text is a clever touch as it makes English-only speaking readers—who will not understand—empathise with Liu at the end of the story (which also has a neat last paragraph and last line). One for the Best of the Year anthologies, perhaps.
Field Biology of the Wee Fairies by Naomi Kritzer is set in 1962 and starts with this:

When Amelia turned fourteen, everyone assured her that she’d find her fairy soon. Almost all girls did. You’d find a fairy, a beautiful little fairy, and catch her. And she’d give you a gift to let her go, and that gift was always beauty or charm or perfect hair or something else that made boys notice you. The neighbor girl, Betty, had caught her fairy when she was just nine, and so she’d never even had to go through an awkward adolescent stage; she’d been perfect and beautiful all along.
Not all fairies were equal, of course. Some of them would do a much better job for you. The First Lady Jackie Kennedy, for example, had caught the fairy queen.

Amelia is a science geek however, and not interested in boys. She thinks, “If I did catch a fairy, I’d keep her in a jar like my mice and study her,” and this pretty much outlines the arc of this emancipation story, which involves, among other scenes, Amelia sabotaging a hairdo that her friend Betty does for her; see a fairy but ignore it; perform Romeo and Juliet with a girl-only cast; and fail to get into the males-only school science club.
Then Amelia catches a determinedly attention-seeking fairy (spoiler) and imprisons it, eventually learning that fairies can’t grant wishes but can only look into the future. When the fairy does this for Amelia she learns that she will never be allowed to join the school science club. So, after winning a science project competition, Amelia convinces an elderly female teacher into starting a girl’s science club.
This story suffers on two fronts: first, it deflates like a punctured balloon when the quirky and entertaining fairy gimmick is laid bare; second, why did the author think it would be a good idea to write a story refighting 1962’s cultural battles? (Presumably because they are more black and white than today’s, and therefore easier to write about.)
Meat and Salt and Sparks by Rich Larson teams up a male detective called Huxley with an uplifted female Chimpanzee called Cu. They are investigating a murder, and the story opens with them attempting to interview the suspected shooter, an “echogirl”—someone who takes instructions from a remote viewer who can see where they are and what they do:

By the look of it, Elody had been in that same call for just under six months. Cu moves backward through the log, perplexed. There are small gaps, a few hours here and there, but Elody had been in near 24/7 communication with her client for half a year preceding the murder.
Cu tries to imagine it: a voice whispering in her ear when she woke up, telling her what to do, where to go, what to say, and whispering still as she fell asleep. All of it culminating in Elody Polle walking up behind a man in a subway and executing him in broad daylight.

Their investigation leads the detectives to a bar where other echogirls hang out, and it isn’t long before they find someone that knows Elody, and who reveals that Elody’s handler is called Baby. When the informant comments on the oddness of the extended 24/7 contract, seasoned readers will probably guess who or what Baby is.
After their visit to the bar Cu goes home, where she receives a short, enigmatic message that refers to her time as an experimental animal. We then get some backstory about Cu’s time in captivity—the period before she won her court battle for personhood:

For a long time Cu had no name for the place where they cut her without her feeling it, where they tracked her eyes and fed filaments through holes in her skull. But she learned the word nightmare from her cube, watching a man with metal hands hunt down his children, and the moniker made sense. By the time she learned about surgery, neural enhancement, possible cures for degenerative brain disease, the name was already cemented.
For the last few years she went to the nightmare room willingly and offered them her wrist for the anaesthetic drip. In exchange, they were kinder to her. They took restrictions off her cube—some she had already worked around herself—so more of the net was available to her. They let her walk in certain corridors of the facility. After a week of asking them, they even let her see her mother.
Going back to that particular memory wrenches her apart.
[. . .]
Her mother was bent and graying, fur shaved off in patches, surgical scars suturing her body, and she was angry. She jabbered and hooted, spittle flying from her mouth. Cu tried to sign to her, but received no reply. Cu tried to offer her food; her mother seized the orange from her and made a feint, teeth bared, that sent Cu scurrying back to the furthest corner of her cage.
“Tranq wore off sooner than we thought,” one of the women in white said. “We did warn you. We did tell you she wouldn’t be like you. You’re unique.”
Cu signed take her away, take her away, take her away.

Further research by Cu reveals that the murder victim was the head of the conglomerate that owned the research labs which kept her. Cu then wonders whether the sender of the message is also an uplifted chimpanzee, although this idea puzzles her as all the others were supposedly euthanized.
When the sender of the anonymous message gets in touch once more, Cu agrees to a meeting, partly in the hope of gaining some relief from the angst and loneliness she feels at being the only one of her kind. At the rendezvous (spoiler) she finds a man waiting, but he isn’t the contact and he points to a videolink before leaving. Cu discovers the sender of the messages isn’t another uplift but an AI, which tells her that it can’t bear its solitary existence, and wants Cu to execute the safeguard code that will erase it (the AI can’t do so itself, and it doesn’t want a human to do so).
After she runs the code that terminates the AI, Cu goes home and also contemplates suicide, but eventually makes, for the first time, a social call to Huxley.
All of this is slickly done, and is successful on two levels: first, it seamlessly meshes together a number of standard SFnal tropes (uplifts, telepresence, sentient AI, etc.) and, secondly, it sketches a convincing and affecting portrait of what it must be like to be (or feel like you are) the only one of your kind. However, when I finished the story I had reservations about describing it as “very good,” but couldn’t quite put my finger on why. After reflecting for some time I came to the conclusion that the final scene is a sentimental cop-out: the AI meets its existential angst by committing suicide while Cu attempts to address hers by phoning Huxley (which hints at a post-story Hollywood movie ending where intractable problems are solved by friendship or love).3
Given the story’s setup I think there was an opportunity to present a tougher ending which, perhaps, shows Cu accepting her despair and responding with stoicism. This (admittedly less crowd-pleasing) finish would be an organic fit with what had gone before, and it would have similar narrative weight to the AI’s actions. It would also have made the story art rather than entertainment.
I know this sounds like I’m criticising the story I wanted Larson to write and not the one he has, but I don’t think I’m doing that: the tale I’m talking about is clearly there.
(And yes, I’ll probably complain that the ending of Larson’s next story is “too gloomy.”)
Sour Milk Girls by Erin Roberts has as its protagonist Ghost, a teenage girl in an orphanage where the inmates have their painful memories removed and replaced with fakes (until they are eighteen, when they leave and get their real memories back). She watches along with two other inmates, Flash and Whispers, as a new girl, Brenda, arrives.
After Brenda settles in, and we find that she still has her own memories, Ghost organises a trip to a memory booth where they can swap. Ghost relives what Brenda thinks are happy memories of her father (which actually end with him dying in his rocking chair). Further investigation by Ghost as to why Brenda’s memories are still intact reveals that, although they are harrowing, Brenda shows no negative behaviours because of them. During this hack of the orphanage’s systems, Ghost also discovers that some of her own memories have been permanently deleted, and that she hasn’t been adopted because there has been “no demand” for her.
The story ends with (spoiler) Ghost and Brenda going back to the booth where, with Flash’s help, Ghost restrains Brenda, hacks the booth system, and extracts Brenda’s memories. She intends to implant them into herself so as to make herself more attractive to adopters but, after reviewing them, Ghost sees that Brenda’s memories are of a broken life (the mother leaves early on, the father is a drunk, etc.) and she gives Brenda’s memory cube to the lecherous booth attendant on the way out.
This story is competently plotted (although it drags at times), but it is essentially a misery memoir where semi-feral girls screw each other over.
Asphalt, River, Mother, Child by Isabel Yap is a supernatural story about government death squads in the Phillipines, and opens with Mebuyen greeting one of the victims of their extra-judicial murders in what we later learn is the underworld. As she speaks to the young girl who has just arrived, we learn that Mebuyen is a mother/ferryman figure who is there to guide people along the river to the “next place”.
The sections that follow tell of the arrival of two other victims (a suspected drug dealer and a trans girl). We then see how all three met their ends, which is told from the point of view of JM, a policemen involved in the murders. We also learn of his increasing disillusionment with his role in the killings.
Mebuyen is troubled by these arrivals, and decides to visit her brother in our world:

She sends her emissary, a little maya bird, to let her brother know she will be ascending. She makes sure to add that because it is so rare for her to do so, and her knees are particularly creaky these days, he may perhaps wish to meet her halfway.
He greets her at Carriedo Station in Manila, wearing a nice button-down polo and maong jeans. Lumabat looks older, but his skin is much nicer than hers, which makes her a little jealous. Mebuyen has not come up in what men might describe as a decade, so she feels proud of her sleeveless shirt and khaki shorts, which make her look like any other manang. She notices everyone holding a small, rectangular skinny box, and glaring at it, their thumbs pounding away.
“Those? Those are cellphones,” Lumabat says. “Oh, they call them smartphones these days.”
“Phones? But they aren’t talking at all?”
“They’re texting. Or surfing the web. You know, Facebook?”
Mebuyen is mystified, but does not try to understand. The world gets stranger each time she visits.
Over lunch at Ma Mon Luk, she explains her quandary.
“They’re different. You know how I haven’t had a visitor in a while, that men these days aren’t beholden to our magic? But suddenly, there they are, by my river . . . they’re older, they’re not infants, but somehow they are still innocent.” She pours soy sauce into her mami, brooding. “The river cannot wash their stains away. It runs clear, not dark. They aren’t moving on to the next place. What have you observed?”

Her brother tells her about his nightmares, and says that she needs to see what is happening for herself. That evening they drift over the city so she can observe what is happening below, and they watch as the death squads commit several murders.
After another section involving JM the policeman (who is now having nightmares too, and has also started to question his superior’s orders), Mebuyen takes her three dead charges into the dreamworld where they confront him.
The story finishes with Mebuyen washing the three in the river, and they move on.
This superior piece has some good local colour and a gripping, contemporary storyline but, if I have one criticism, it is that JM the cop is perhaps portrayed too sympathetically, and gets off too easily. This gives the piece a soft, slightly anticlimactic ending and, but for that, it would have been a four-star story.
The Starship and the Temple Cat by Yoon Ha Lee is the only story here I’ve read previously, and gets off to a promising start:

She had been a young cat when the Fleet Lords burned the City of High Bells.
Strictly speaking, the City had been a space station rather than a planet-bound metropolis, jewel-spinning in orbit around one of the gas giants of a system inhabited now by dust and debris and the ever-blanketing dark. While fire had consumed some of the old tapestries, the scrolls of bamboo strips, the altars of wood and bone and beaten bronze, the destruction had started when the Fleet Lords, who could not tolerate the City’s priests, bombarded it with missiles and laser fire. But the cat did not know about such distinctions.
Properly, the cat’s name was Seventy-Eighth Temple Cat of the High Bells, along with a number of ceremonial titles that needn’t concern us. But the people who had called her that no longer lived in the station’s ruins. Every day as she made her rounds in what had been the boundaries of the temple, she saw and smelled the artefacts they had left behind, from bloodstains to scorch marks, from decaying books to singed spacesuits, and yowled her grief.
To be precise, the cat no longer lived in the station, either. She did not remember her death with any degree of clarity. The ghosts of cats rarely do, even when the deaths are violent.

One of the starships involved in the attack returns years later, a renegade pursued by the Fleet Lords. While the ship talks to the cat they catch up, and then battle commences. The cat (spoiler) summons other ghosts to aid the ship and, after they win, joins it on its journey.
The story does not combine the fantasy and SF elements successfully, and does not suspend disbelief.
My favourite story in the first half of this book is Waterbirds by G. V. Anderson, which opens with a policeman called Kershaw interrogating Celia, a female android companion whose employer has committed suicide. After Kershaw finishes his enquiries and leaves the holiday home that Celia and her employer were renting, the android recalls her first encounter with Kershaw several years earlier, when he was an unpleasant teenager in a bar asking her whether she was a “fuckbot”. We then get an account of Kershaw’s subsequent serial abuse of Celia during her and her employer’s annual holiday visits to the cottage (the aftermath of the final encounter is related in squirm-inducing detail). These encounters only stop when Mrs Lawson, Celia’s employer, becomes aware of the situation and intervenes.
The second part of the story tells of the relationship between Celia and a local artist called Irene, which develops over the course of several annual visits before Mrs Lawson’s death. The story’s conclusion draws all these threads together in a surprising and satisfying conclusion.
The story’s mousetrap ending and seaside location vaguely reminded me of Michael Coney’s work, but there is much more here as well: Celia’s “hostess” programming, her inability to refuse consent, the egret feathers motif, etc.
If this has one weakness it is that the rules which govern Celia’s behaviour seem a little fuzzy (you could maybe call them Three Laws-ish) but it is, nevertheless, a very good piece, and the best of this first group of stories.
You Can Make a Dinosaur, But You Can’t Help Me by K. M. Szpara starts with the protagonist Emerick and her boyfriend Leo choosing which dinosaur-themed dildo they should use while they have sex (both are trans, I think, but I still wasn’t entirely sure after ten minutes of trying to puzzle it out). During, and after, this scene there are big data dumps about the protagonist’s transition, his problematic (“toxic”) parental relationships, and his wish that he had been born cis. There is also a brief mention about his father’s “portal”, which pretty obviously (spoiler), and even at this early stage of the story, telegraphs the story’s future arc as a trans wish-fulfilment story.
When the couple later go to Dad’s island, and site of the portal, they have a car-crash breakfast with Emerick’s father, who still treats her as his son; matters do not improve when Dad gushingly introduces his assistant Noelle, who then dead-names Emerick too.
Although the father is something of a straw-man (he seems remarkably dim for someone who has invented a portal to another world), the character interplay in this section makes it seem as if the story might spark into life, but all we get from this point on is a lot of nonsense about how the dinosaurs (yes, more dinosaur-themed fun) that Dad has brought through the portal have changed sex:

“You probably know, Owen Corp had been attempting to engineer its own dinosaurs—unsuccessfully, for many years. You see, the portal mutates DNA. They had no idea where to start. Not until I walked through.”
Noelle chuckles to herself as she holds up her hands.
“Sometimes, I feel like an imposter, despite the degrees I earned in my home world. Whatever happened to the dinosaurs, when they crossed through the portal, happened to me. I can perform genetic manipulations no one in this world ever imagined. It’s almost—and I feel silly using the word—like magic?
“Anyway.” She shoves her hands back in her vest pockets. “I’ve made a few mistakes along the way, while we figure out the science behind it all. These dinosaurs are isolated because they had spontaneous sex changes!” Noelle looks at the two of you as if you will of course find this hilarious. “Apparently the single-sex environment did not agree with their DNA. They dissolved their genitals and re-grew the opposite. Awesome, but not in line with our safety protocols.”

This ends predictably enough with (spoiler) Em trying to break into the lab to go through the portal. She is caught by Noelle and, after a Big Talk, she eventually assists Em to achieve her transition by means of some hand-wavy genetic manipulation.
However much one may sympathise with the issues raised in this story there is no escaping the ridiculous plot, and the transgender data dumps that periodically strangle the story. I realise that there wouldn’t be much left without the latter, but I can’t see the difference between these and the scientific lectures you get in 1930’s SF in terms of their effect on the story. I’m also not a fan of stories where characters work out their Daddy issues.
And Yet by A. T. Greenblatt starts with woman4 who is a theoretical physicist going back to a “haunted house” of her youth:

Nothing in the house has stayed the same since the last time you worked up the nerve to come in. Nothing. This shouldn’t surprise you, because you have this theory that the house reacts to its visitors. The visitor is the catalyst and the catalyst is not a bullied eight-year-old kid anymore. Thus the reaction is different. And yet.
You were hoping, god you were hoping you could take the same path as before. Have the same escape routes. But the haunted house of your childhood has become an unfamiliar landscape. Instead of the front door opening to a wide landing and a staircase, you are standing in a foyer, at the mouth of a narrow hall with rooms on either side. There’s no staircase in sight.
The walls are slanted inward. They’re covered in dark, dizzyingly patterned wallpaper and you aren’t claustrophobic until you are. Vertigo and your pulse skips so badly you don’t even notice the frames on the walls at first. But when you do, you bite back a scream.
They’re full of pictures of you

She eventually stumbles into a room full of her childhood friends, who are watching a looping video of various permutations of a truck accident involving her kid brother (which later caused his death). After seeing this she suspects that the house may contain multiple parallel universes. When she explores further she ends up on the floor above and, when she climbs out of the window using a rope ladder, she finds herself outside the house twenty years in the past—on the day she first went in.
This is essentially a story about the protagonist’s childhood and her (spoiler) trying to save her brother, but it is all wrapped up in a tricksy multiple-worlds house scenario that vaguely recalls Heinlein’s “—And There Was A Crooked House—. It’s not entirely convincing, but it’s not bad.
The last of the short stories is She Still Loves the Dragon by Elizabeth Bear, which is over-written, pretentious, and has too many passages in italics.5 It begins with a female knight-errant climbing a mountain to meet a dragon, whereupon (as the story would put it) they have Deep Conversations:

“I made myself,” says the dragon. “A long time ago. By deciding to exist, and take up space in the world.”
“Is that all it takes for you to be real?”
“Are you the litany of things you have accomplished?”
The woman is silent for a while. Then she says, “Yes. That is how we make ourselves real. That is what we are.”
.
An eye that as one regards it, is in its turn regarding one as well.
.
“You are because you are,” the woman says. Her hair is growing in again, a thick black cloud that has never pressed beneath a helm. “And I love you because you are.”
.
Everything is pain.
Beneath the pain is freedom.

I suspect that (spoiler) the knight’s burns (she eventually gets a light toasting from the dragon) and the subsequent healing process is a metaphor for the pain love causes and people’s eventual recovery.
One final point from the Fantasy Language department:

She is still singing as she achieves the hollow top of the mountain where the dragon nests, glaciers gently sublimating into steam against its belly.

Ice sublimates into water vapour at normal temperatures and pressures, not steam, which is invisible (the misty stuff you see when you boil a kettle is water vapour, tiny droplets of water suspended in the air). Regardless of whether I’m right about all that (my Physics and Chemistry degree was a long time ago), “sublimating” is likely to cause the googling of triple point diagrams in the middle of your fantasy mini-epic.

Not a bad bunch so far: let’s see what the second half of the anthology brings (my hunch is that the novelettes—SF’s natural length—will be stronger).  The second part of the review is here. ●

_____________________

1. The Facebook group is The Best Science Fiction and Fantasy Short Fiction of the Year.
The next group read (if we ever get finished the current one) looks like it will be The Best from Fantasy and Science Fiction, A Special 25th Anniversary Anthology, edited by Edward L. Ferman, 1974—unless a load of dodgy postal votes reach us before midnight on Saturday.
This anthology collects the stories and ancillaries from the first six “Special Author” issues of F&SF (Theodore Sturgeon, Ray Bradbury, Isaac Asimov, Fritz Leiber, Poul Anderson, James Blish). The full contents list of this volume is at ISFDB, but it contains these stories:

When You Care, When You Love • (1962) • novelette by Theodore Sturgeon
To the Chicago Abyss • (1963) • short story by Ray Bradbury
The Key • [Wendell Urth] • (1966) • novelette by Isaac Asimov
Ship of Shadows • (1969) • novella by Fritz Leiber
The Queen of Air and Darkness • (1971) • novella by Poul Anderson
Midsummer Century • (1972) • novella by James Blish

2. Supporting membership for this year’s Worldcon can be obtained here. Currently $75 NZ, around £35/$45.

3. On the discussion thread for Larson’s story, Jim Harris made a couple of interesting comments:

That’s the trouble with a lot of SF stories, they go for the easy/obvious answer [. . .] it would have been more interesting if Cu had come up with a deeper philosophical or emotional solution to her isolation.
.
I worry that writers are too influenced by TV/movies. They picture their stories being filmed, and the ending does feel like something that would end a TV show. What makes a story really stand out is when a writer imagines something that feels like it’s right or real, but something we never thought of ourselves, so it gives us an Ah-Ha moment. What would an uplifted chimp really feel? It was interesting that Cu went into law enforcement because she observed things in humans that most humans don’t. That’s kind of logical. But what would make an uplifted chimp feel at home in human society?

4. The gender of the narrator isn’t explicitly stated in Greenblatt’s piece but reading your brother bedtime stories is more a big sister thing (big brothers would just wedgie your pyjamas), and both the narrator’s best friend and personal trainer are female.

5. My understanding is that large blocks of italics are hard for dyslexic readers to process, which is why I changed the formatting of the quoted text here some time ago.
The Triple Point diagram for water makes my head hurt.  ●

Edited 10th May 2020 to add ratings and link to second review.

rssrss

Argosy (UK), October 1955

Summary:
This British fiction digest regularly published science fiction in its pages (sometimes as a “Science Fiction Choice”), and this issue has the second (and final) instalment of a novella-length version of John Wyndham’s The Chrysalids, a post-nuclear-holocaust tale about persecuted mutant telepaths. There is also Forty Day Road, which is a timeslip story from Christopher Landon, author of Ice Cold in Alex, the source novel for a classic WWII movie.
The rest of the magazine is non-SF material, most notable of which is H. E. Bates’ surprisingly transgressive (for its time) The Good Corn. There are also good stories from Brian Cleeve and David Beaty.

Galactic Central link
Archive.org copy

_____________________

Editor not listed

Fiction:
Trust Little Al • short story by Michael Gilbert ∗∗
Haunted Summer • short story by Mary Lee Settle +
Cat’s-Paw • short story by W. S. Money
The Good Corn • short story by H. E. Bates +
Six Legs Are Welcome • short story by Geoffrey Household +
Duel • short story by Brian Cleeve
Forty Day Road • short story by Christopher Landon +
Heart of the Storm • novelette by David Beaty
Air on a G-String • reprint short story by Cordelia Baird Gross –
The Chrysalids [Part 2 of 2] • novella serial by John Wyndham +

Non-fiction:
Fuchsias • poem by John Pudney
Mixed Bag • quiz
Rendezvous • poem and prose extracts
River Music • poem by Fleur Mountain
Carte Blanche • poem by Ogden Nash
Garden Pleasures
• poem and prose extracts
Argosy Crossword

_____________________

John Wyndham’s novella version of The Chrysalids concludes in this issue with what is essentially the ‘chase’ half of the much longer novel (a more comprehensive review of the latter can be found here, and you may wish to skim that before reading on).
This part starts with a horseman coming upon some of the group as they cluster round Petra after she has telepathically shouted for help for a second time (a ferocious mutant predator attacked her mount while she was horse-riding in the woods). The horseman is suspicious as to why several people have come from different directions to help her, but they manage to assuage his misgivings before taking Petra home. The group later discuss what happened, and agree that David should train Petra so she can control her telepathic ability. During this training she mentions to David that she can detect “thought-shapes” that are being sent from the distant south-west.
Uncle Axel later warns David that people are asking questions about the group found with Petra. When David discusses it with the others they conclude that, if the authorities interrogate Petra, they will find out about their group, so they make contingency plans to escape the village. Later, however, it is Katherine and Sally who are arrested and questioned, while David, Petra, and Rosalind narrowly avoid being captured and flee towards the Fringes. A posse from the village pursues them, and Michael—who isn’t identified by the authorities as one of the group—joins it so he can give them constant updates about the its progress.
During the threesome’s journey towards what they hope will be safety, Petra mentions that the thoughts from far away are getting stronger and, after messages  relayed through Petra, they learn that (spoiler): the sender a woman; she lives in a place called Zealand (in a city with flying machines passing overhead; and that it is day there and not night. The woman tells David and Rosalind that Petra’s telepathic strength is exceptional, and that she must be protected at all costs. She also reveals her humourless superiority:

“We are the New People—so are you. The people who can think-together. We’re the people who are going to build a new world—a different world from the Old People’s and the savages’.”
“The kind of people that God intended?” I [David] suggested, with a feeling of being on familiar ground.
“I don’t know about that. But we do know that we can make a better world than the Old People. They were savages, half men. Shut off from one another, with only inadequate words to link them; tribes shut off by different languages; minds shut off by different religions. There was never any unity in them.
“Individually, some of them could think: collectively, they could not. The more complex they made their world, the less capable they were of dealing with it. They had no means of consensus. They could co-operate constructively in small units, but only destructively in large ones. They aspired greedily, and then refused the responsibilities they had created. With one hand they grasped reason, with the other they rejected it. Singly, some of them tried to be men; in groups, they remained primitive. There was, you see, no real communication between them: the system of words could work at all only where individuals were very similar: applied to large numbers, it broke down.
“They brought down Tribulation, which all but destroyed them. They were inadequate.”  p. 125

After more adventures in the woods (the Fringe folk capture the three and take them to their camp where they meet the spiderman, etc.) there is a climactic battle between the posse from the village and the Fringe folk. In the middle of the fight the Zealand woman arrives overhead in a helicopter and sprays everyone below with sticky webs which incapacitate them. The helicopter lands, and the woman releases the three children (while leaving the untermensch—and the horses—to die). David, Rosalind and Petra leave in the helicopter with the woman.
The last scene has them overhead the city in Zealand, where David senses the hive-mind below.
Although this part isn’t as good as the first it isn’t bad—and is a lot better than the version in the novel. This is because a lot of the padding—the idea of God’s image, and the Zealand woman’s evolutionary destiny lectures—is excised. That said, the whole thing is somewhat over-compressed, but this version is definitely worthy of consideration for any Best of the Year anthology.

There is only one other fantasy or science fiction piece in this issue (there were three last time), and that is a timeslip story, Forty Day Road by Christopher Landon (Landon is best known for the novel Ice Cold in Alex,1 which became a popular British WWII movie.)
This story, like Ice Cold for Alex, is also set in the desert, where the demobbed narrator is sent by his company to search for signs of a locust swarm. During this expedition the team end up camping on an old slavers’ route, the “Forty Day Road.” One night, after celebrating the birthday of an American biologist with the group, the narrator wakes up in the small hours and goes for a walk up the road. When he stops to rest, he falls asleep.
He wakes to the sound of a large camel train coming up the road and, as it starts to pass him, he sees the slaves. Then the flank guards capture him and he joins the train. For the next four days he travels up the road with the slavers before (spoiler) slipping back through time to the future.
This is a slight piece (man falls through time, and then falls back) but there is some good description of the camel train and its people, and a neat, if perhaps unoriginal, last line that confirms his journey wasn’t a dream.

The rest of the fiction includes Trust Little Al by Michael Gilbert, which is a lightweight espionage story where a secret services type looks after a scientist on holiday in Austria. The latter is an unreliable womaniser (who paradoxically doesn’t brush his teeth much), so it makes for a demanding job. There is also a femme fatale, a (spoiler) abduction attempt, and a final twist where we learn that a couple of the characters are not who they seem. Slick, but it’s hard to care much about what happens.

Although it isn’t a ghost story (spoiler: the explanation at the end is mundane), Haunted Summer by Mary Lee Settle certainly feels like one for most of the way through, and starts with this:

I was ten. I spent the first part of the summer being wonderfully frightened by slipping into her room, and reading Ghost Stories or True Spiritual Experiences or Voices from Beyond. I would sit in the corner in the afternoon, for she was never there then, she always slept in the hammock on the downstairs back porch.
There in the half-dark, in the cool half-dark (for the blinds were drawn against the heat outside), the room was deep green, strangely larger than when the sun was allowed in, and it had the still silence of a room waiting—or asleep. Her big rocker would be empty, but the overstuffed seat was bent with use so that it didn’t seem empty.
Against the wall stood the huge bed that my Aunt Phemie had died in; my Aunt Eliza said she lingered for months after and that the hole never healed at all, not from the time they brought her home. The big bed sank in the middle, too, and that too seemed occupied, occupied by—I was learning a new language—ectoplasm and heat.
There I would sit with my back tight against the wall, for what I could see I didn’t fear so much, and I would read from the dusky pulp magazines about the ever-recurring spot on the floor, made by the drowned sailor, or stories about Things that weren’t anything but seemed made of flesh and slithered under the study door and crawled onto the study desk where the man who was writing the story used to sit.  pp. 18-19

This is (for the most part) a convincingly atmospheric tale about a young girl who lives in a big house in the deep South, and who thinks that the attic contains an “It.” When she eventually sees a woman with lank black hair who gestures at her, she flees. After summoning her courage, the girl goes back for another look . . . .
The explanation is disappointingly rational, which is a shame, but it’s worth a look.

Cat’s-Paw by W. S. Money begins with two sailors on a ship, one of whom, Charlie, expresses a vehement dislike of the resident ginger tomcat. Charlie goes on to complain about his sister-in-law and her cat, who both live with him and his wife. Then, on the return trip, he sees a shipmate with a monkey that chases off the ship’s tomcat, so he buys it, thinking that it will sort out his problems at home.
On the next trip the narrator speaks to Charlie and discovers that (spoiler) the monkey made friends with the cat but attacked the sister-in-law, who then left with the cat! Much to Charlie’s two-birds-with-one-stone delight.
If you are in the mood for a story about an unpleasant protagonist with family grievances and a poor attitude towards animals, this will be right up your street. It wasn’t up mine.

Highlight of the issue, apart from the Wyndham, is The Good Corn by H. E. Bates, which begins with much scene setting that involves a married couple on their rural small-holding. They put away money at the end of every market day for the family they plan to have but, after twenty five years, the woman has not conceived. When a new-born calf dies, she becomes depressed, and the doctor suggests to the husband that they make a fresh start somewhere else, and without livestock.
The second half of the story sees the couple mainly growing corn at their new farm. Later on they employ a girl to help the wife with the chores, and we eventually we find that the she previously had an illegitimate child. As she didn’t want to keep it her family gave it away. One day the husband and the girl talk while they are out in the fields, and (spoiler) he ends up kissing her. . . .
When the girl gets pregnant for a second time, the wife adopts a surprisingly pragmatic response to both her unfaithful husband and to the child that is born.
Bates manages to get an amazing number of what I thought would be 1950’s taboos into this story: failure to conceive, illegitimate birth, adultery, lack of maternal concern, and a wife adopting a husband’s child by another woman.
I’m becoming increasingly interested in this writer, and look forward to more of his work in the magazine.

Six Legs Are Welcome by Geoffrey Household has an intriguing start:

It’s no good waving at them. Take this one, for example! She’ll get bored with crawling up my arm in a moment, and fly off. For twenty-seven days in the month there’s just the usual mixture of insects, and on the twenty-eighth, for no reason at all, one species gets completely out of hand and fills up all the available air.
No, I don’t know what these are called—apart from their Indian name. Odd-looking creatures, aren’t they? Six legs. Red and black Asdic. And about an inch and a half of torpedo tube in the stern. That’s only a flying ant in your gin. Just pick it out. There you are—neither of you one penny the worse!
We’ll go inside in another half-hour when the mosquitoes come on duty. But you needn’t pay any attention at all to these fellows. They’re just satisfying their curiosity, with only one day to do it in perhaps. Well, yes, there are limits. I quite agree. I don’t hold with those Buddhist chaps who won’t squash a cockroach in case it turns out to be their defunct mother-in-law. I’ve no fellow-feeling for any of the little pests.
But if it hadn’t been for them I should be halfway through a life sentence now instead of farming this wonderful place. A man can never quite forget a bit of luck like that. It’s bound to influence him. Let me get you another glass. That one’s drowned herself. Weak heart, probably. Live and let live—that’s all I say.
This bit of Paraguay belongs to them quite as much as to me.  p. 43

There then follows a tale about a young woman recruited from a convent by an insalubrious bar-owner. When the narrator meets her he tries, over a period of several days, to make friends with the woman, but eventually her angry brother arrives. There is (spoiler) a knife fight where the bar owner dies, followed by the narrator, brother, and sister escaping into the night with the police pursuing.
Just when they look like they will be caught, a swarm of fireflies blinds their pursuers and lets them escape. This is a clever ending and nice image, but the bulk of the story isn’t entirely convincing.

Duel by Brian Cleeve2 is a tale of unrequited love and jealousy in a small Irish village, and starts with the narrator, “Jamie the Book,” walking a girl home after a dance:

I could feel the warmth of her, and sometimes her arm would brush against mine by accident. There was a faint scent from her dress, and her hair was like a dark shadow swinging at her shoulders.
I wanted to say something to her, tell her how beautiful she was, but I was afraid. I knew how she’d turn to me, her eyes grey-green and cold as the sea, her mouth contemptuous, and she wouldn’t need to answer me. And I’d just blush and stammer, as I had a dozen and two dozen times before.
That was the kind of thing that drove the other boys away from her. The sureness of her, the bold swing of her when she walked, and the way she’d look a man straight in the face. They may like that kind of thing in the cinema in Ireland, but they don’t like it in a wife. It’s the girl with the little, meek voice and a couple of hundred pounds put by from her wages that they’re looking for.
A girl like Fran only frightens them, when she doesn’t annoy them.  p. 56

Later, Fran meets a stranger, and the narrator has to cope with his jealousy:

And for an hour I stravaiged up and down the hillsides round Ballysaggart, looking for the pair of them, although I still hadn’t an idea in my mind as to why I was doing it. I scrambled through the heather and over grey, naked rocks that burnt my hands with the heat of them from the sun, until my bad leg ached and the sweat blinded my eyes so much that I couldn’t have seen them if they were standing within five yards of me. At last I gave it up and went home again, flinging myself down on the bed and lying there until it was dark and the rage of jealousy inside me drove me out into the street again.
I wasn’t out long before I heard all about the stranger that had danced with Fran and come for her that same morning, laying his hand on her in broad daylight in the open street, and she letting him. The slut, they said. We always knew she was that kind of girl, we always knew it. And I didn’t know whether I wanted to kill them for saying it, or Fran for giving them reason, or myself for misery. But I only asked them about the stranger.
“From Clare,” they said, “where his father is an auctioneer. Rotten with money, and the boy down here spying out the land for a bit of a farm for himself. And maybe a wife.”
They looked sideways at me when they said that, and laughed, and I know now why men sometimes run crazy in the streets and kill whomever they meet.  pp. 59-60

Fran and the stranger eventually become a couple until one day when she is cruelly jilted in public. When she slaps the stranger he retaliates, and Jamie comes down from his vantage point up at the top of the street. He and the stranger fight each other with blackthorn sticks. Jamie wins, and Fran laughs. They walk defiantly down the street together.
This is a convincing portrait of village life, with good description of the characters and their emotional states.

Heart of the Storm by David Beaty starts with a description of a developing hurricane in the Caribbean before cutting to a BOAC airliner flying through the storm. The aircraft’s radio operator then picks up an SOS from a ship and, when the tugs can’t find the ship, Kelson (the aircraft captain and a dry, stiff upper lip type) decides to go and look for it. The rest of the crew don’t seem so keen (they don’t have that much spare fuel), but Kelson made his mind up, so off they go.
Most of the first half of the story comprises of description of crew interaction and operation, such as when they fly towards a radio beacon on the islands to fix their position before letting down through the cloud to low level:

To Bates, listening hard, it seemed almost unbelievable that there was anything beyond these clouds, that the world’s laws of physics and motion still held good in this grey, limitless universe. As though some unseen hand was disciplining it, the needle on the radio compass started to hunt only about twenty degrees either side of dead ahead.
Seeing its performance, Bates felt more cheerful. “We’re getting nearer, Skipper,” he said. “Seems just slightly port. Could you alter 5 degrees to the left?”
“I’m following the needle now,” Kelston replied, “as far as it’ll let me.”
Ten minutes later, the pointer steadied. Still slightly left. FY was pounding out now with a much more heartening strength. Suddenly, the needle seemed lost. It turned now one way, now the other, as though trying to make up its mind. Then decisively, it toppled over, and pointed behind them.
“Over it, sir,” Bates shouted.
“So I see,” Kelston said. “I’m turning on to one-three-five degrees . . . out to sea. Throttles right back.”
The engines died down to nothing. “I’ll have to put gear and half flap down, Mr. Hawkins. We’ve got to get down fast and I don’t want the speed to build up. Not in this turbulence.” The pump whined as it forced the hydraulic fluid into the terrific pressure needed to put the wheels down. When they were locked, Kelston lowered the flaps. Due to their drag effect, only 140 knots showed on the indicator, yet Easy Zebra was approaching the sea at over 4,000 feet a minute.  p. 82

If you don’t have an aviation background or interest, you’ll probably find this kind of thing as dull as ditchwater—but if you do, you’ll find these descriptions of steam driven aviation fascinating. Either way, these sections aren’t too long and don’t detract from the story.
Once the aircraft descends below the cloud they search the area and eventually find the ship, and then go to find the tugs. However, as they are low on fuel, they have to leave the area before the tugs and ship find each other. The aircraft eventually lands at San Miguel, after making an unorthodox visual approach below cloud.
The second half of the story is quite different from the first part, and we see a more reflective Kelston in his hotel room:

Now that he was back on the ground, like most other airline pilots, Kelston had a lost look about him which even the kindliness of the room could not quite drive away. Not even his own house where he spent a week out of every three, could be called his home. The nearest thing to it was the inside of a Marlborough. That noisy, confined little kingdom was where normally he felt happiest
When he was not flying, Kelston tended to feel frustrated, conscious of the many things he had not done with his life He had gone into his father’s export business, which had been one of the first casualties of the war. He had joined the Air Force, learnt to fly, acquired a certain tight-lipped stoniness on his face, which conveniently walled out his thoughts from other people.
And afterwards, partly because there was nothing else to do, partly because flying was now in his blood, he had joined British Empire Airways.
It was a familiar pattern that he shared with many people, but in his heart he was not satisfied with it. As a kind of sop to an active and intelligent brain that largely lay idle, for his work was mainly routine, he wrote articles on the technical side of flying for several aviation magazines.  p. 89

Kelston falls asleep, misses dinner time, and grumpily goes down to the bar. He is surprised when the head waiter comes to bring him to the restaurant, where they have kept food for him. The waiter asks him to phone the owner of the ship, and Kelston realises that the waiter and the serving staff (and nearly everyone else on the island) has a family connection of some sort to the crew on the ship—hence his special treatment.
During the call, Kelston discovers that the tugs will try to bring the ship into harbour as the eye of the storm passes over the island, and the owner invites him to come down and watch.
After some more scene setting at the docks, and the introduction of a female character called Karena, the operation concludes successfully. This second half puts the more technical/adventure oriented first part into a human context.
I enjoyed this. It’s certainly of its period (the ex-forces and taciturn Kelston, the wearing of pajamas for a two hour nap(!), etc.) but there is a lot of interesting period description of both the aircraft and the characters.3

Last, and most definitely least (I disliked this even more than Money’s cat story) is Air on a G-String by Cordelia Baird Gross (Harper’s Magazine). This is about Pansy St Clare, a teenage stripper (her mother started her in the occupation “when her voice changed”) who wants to be a cook. Then one day she sees a competition where the prize is a stove . . . .
Wrong in so many ways, but it has a clever last line.

There are three poems in this issue, Fuchsias by John Pudney (Sixpenny Songs, John Lane, 1953), River Music by Fleur Mountain, and Carte Blanche by Ogden Nash (The New Yorker, 1955), all of which seem dreadfully old fashioned or naff, and none of which I cared for. Ditto for the two poem and prose extract features, Rendezvous and Garden Pleasures.
There is also a quiz, Mixed Bag, and the Argosy Crossword.

This isn’t as good an issue as the last one but there is still a lot of interesting and/or entertaining work here.  ●

_____________________

1. Christopher Landon’s Wikipedia page is here. He also wrote the script of Ice Cold in Alex, and one the movie’s final scenes spawned years of Carlsberg lager adverts. (PS The barman in that clip should have faced a war-crimes tribunal for the way he pours the beer.)

2. Brian Cleeve was an award-winning broadcaster with RTE, as well as being a prolific novelist, and his short work mostly appeared in the likes of Argosy and The Saturday Evening Post. However, he also had two stories in F&SF in 1968, The Devil and Jake O’Hara (August), and The Devil in Exile (November).
His stories are listed on Galactic Central, and he has an extensive Wikipedia page.

3. David Beaty’s Heart of the Storm is an extract from the novel of the same title. Normally I can’t stand extracts as they aren’t self-contained, but this one is, and it also interested me enough to make me dig out a copy of the novel from the Internet Archive. The better quality PDF of the US edition is available here (under a different title, The Four Winds, and a cover that makes it look like a romance novel).
Beaty himself is an interesting character: after his flying career (the wartime RAF, where he won a DFC and bar, and then BOAC) he subsequently became a writer and later trained as a psychologist. Using this latter qualification, he went on to be one of the first people in the aviation field to write on the subject of Human Factors. His Wikipedia page is here, and there is an informative Independent obituary here.  ●

rssrss

Argosy (UK), September 1955

Summary:
This digest-sized British fiction magazine regularly published science fiction in its pages (sometimes as a “Science Fiction Choice”), and this issue not only has the very good first part of the novella-length version of John Wyndham’s The Chrysalids (a post-nuclear-holocaust novel about persecuted mutant telepaths) but also has good fantasies from Willard Marsh and Joan Aiken. The other non-SF material (which includes stories by H. E. Bates and Paul Gallico) is, more or less, of equal standard. All of it is unpretentiously entertaining.

Galactic Central link
Archive.org copy

_____________________

Editor not listed

Fiction:
Queer Fish • short story by Kem Bennett
Star Over Frisco • reprint short story by Willard Marsh +
Summer in Salander • novelette by H. E. Bates
Brandy for the Colonel • short story by Paul Gallico
Elixir of Love • short story by C. S. Forester
Last Message • story story by C. H. Milsom
Music for the Wicked Countess • short story by Joan Aiken
Memory of a Fight • short story by Gerald Kersh
Both Watches of the Hands • short story by Rowan Ayers
The Chrysalids (Part 1 of 2) • novella serial by John Wyndham ∗∗∗∗

Non-fiction:
Not Quite Cricket • poetry and prose extracts
Animal Crackers • poetry and prose extracts
Food for Thought • quiz
Apples • poem by Laurie Lee
Argosy Crossword

_____________________

Argosy1 (the UK digest magazine, not the American pulp) isn’t an SF magazine but, as I was skimming through some issues, I noticed that a couple of them had a serial version of John Wyndham’s The Chrysalids.2 Further research revealed that this was a variant and much shorter version of the novel, so I thought it would be interesting to read both and compare them here (I’ve just reviewed the much longer novel: you may wish to skim that post before reading on).
The plot of the novella is essentially the same as the one in the novel: David, the narrator, is a (secret) telepath in a post-nuclear-holocaust world whose agrarian society has harsh laws to deal with any sign of difference or mutation. In this first instalment these strictures are limned in a number of set pieces: when raiders from the Fringes appear, one of the freakishly long-limbed mutants they capture bears a striking resemblance to David’s father; when David’s sister is born, no-one in the house acknowledges the birth until the inspector calls to issue a certificate of normalcy; David’s father Joseph Strorm falls out with a neighbour over huge greathorses that Strorm considers deviant. We also learn more generally about this world, and its offences and blasphemies, etc.
All of the aforementioned is brought into stark focus when David’s Aunt Harriet arrives at the family house with her own new-born child. In an excellent scene, we learn the baby is a mutant, and that she wants to swap it temporarily for Petra to fool her local inspector. Not only do David’s parents refuse but they denounce her as well. After she leaves, she drowns herself in a river.
This is followed by a long section where Uncle Axel describes the outside world, its radioactive Badlands and Blacklands, and its mutant races—all of this knowledge gained from his days as a sailor.
Petra then reveals herself as a massively powerful telepath when she almost drowns. This, and a second incident, sow the seeds of suspicion in David’s community . . . .
A very good first half.

I expected that the Wyndham piece would be the only science fiction or fantasy story here (other copies have a “Science Fiction Choice” indicated) but there are others. The first of these is a fantasy, Star Over Frisco by Willard Marsh (first published3 as Astronomy Lesson in The Yale Review, 1954). This begins with a man and a woman meeting for the first time as they leave a cinema in San Francisco. When they go for a coffee, we find out that she is Pearl Rembrandt, a switchboard operator, and he is Humphrey, a sandwich maker at a restaurant.
They go for a walk and fall in love. As they look at the sky Pearl sees a shooting star and makes a wish. She tells Humphrey that she wished for a star of her own, and then:

They came down into the leaf-locked slope of Portsmouth Square, opposite the Hall of Justice where no one should have been behind bars, no misery should have been abroad when love, their love, was proof enough against all chaos.
And then Humphrey tripped over the star.
At first they didn’t recognize it. It lay, small and deceptive, in a cushion of grass. They knelt above it, jointly lifting it to the wayward light. It was cool to the palm, and blurrily orange-coloured. It had five points that seemed to shift and twinkle, depending on how you looked at them.
“I thought they’d be bigger, somehow,” Pearl said.
“They’re all different sizes,” Humphrey said, with a casualness he had to force. It was a beauty, all right, no getting around it.
“Sort of makes a nice souvenir, doesn’t it? To round the evening off.”
Humphrey weighed the star experimentally. “Maybe we could have it dipped in bronze or something to preserve it. You know, like baby-shoes.”
He didn’t realize the psychological implication of the remark till Pearl giggled in embarrassment.  p. 20

The next day Humphrey has time to kill before meeting Pearl again that evening, so he goes to a museum where he notices a meteorite on display. He learns from the attendant that it contains many valuable metals, and realises that the star (which Pearl has kept) may be valuable. When Humphrey then goes to his regular bar he tells Ace the bartender about the previous night’s find, and mentions that it may be of value. Ace suggests that Pearl will have come to a similar conclusion, and plants a seed of paranoia in Humphrey’s mind.
The story ends with Humphrey going to Pearl’s house earlier than planned and, when he gets into her apartment, he is aggressive and threatening. Initially she is bewildered, but agrees to give him the star back. Then she realises it may be of value, and tells him she is going to keep it.
The last few lines (spoiler), in which the star destroys more than their love, is a genuinely surprising end to the story and one that lifts this piece into an entirely different league. It should be better known.

The second fantasy in this issue is Music for the Wicked Countess by Joan Aiken,4 which concerns a new schoolteacher called Mr Bond arriving at Castle Kerrig, a small village in Ireland. One day, after he starts at the school, he plays the piano for the children. They like his performance and tell him that he should play for the Wicked Countess who lives in the castle in the middle of the woods (there is also a casual mention of leprechauns). Mr Bond thinks they are pulling his leg as he knows there is no castle in the area, something he confirms later on a fruitless walk:

He ate some bread and cheese in a bad temper and sat down to play it off at his own piano. He played several dances from Purcell’s Fairy Queen, and had soon soothed himself into forgetfulness of the children’s provoking behaviour. Little did he know that three white faces, framed in long golden hair, were gazing through the window behind his back. When he had finished playing for the night, the maidens from the forest turned and went regretfully back to the Castle.
.
“Well,” asked the Wicked Countess, “and does he play as well as the village talk has it?”
“He plays till the ears come down off your head and go waltzing along the road. Sure, there’s none is his equal in the whole wide world, at all.”
“I expect you are exaggerating,” said the Countess sadly. “Still, he would be a useful replacement for Bran the Harpist, ever since the fool went and had his head chopped off at the Debatable Ford.”
She looked crossly over to a corner where a headless harpist was learning to knit, for, being unable to read music, he could no longer play.  p. 86-87

After this, the Countess tries various ruses to get the teacher to her castle: lost keys; one of the maidens changes into a snake and gets pickled in a jar; a potion in his milk is drunk by the blue tits; an invitation goes unread, etc.
Eventually the Countess approaches Mr Bond as he walks in the forest, and invites him to the castle. He manages to avoid drinking the tea (and potion) provided, but agrees to play for her. After two leprechauns return with his piano (and carry it up the stairs), she invites him to play one of his own compositions. This sets up the story’s payoff, which is that, released from the chore of playing folk songs and country dances for the children, he launches into his own avant-garde compositions. These destroy the magic tower block by block, leaving the occupants to flee and Mr Bond alone in a clearing with his piano.
Thereafter the Countess and Mr Bond ignore each other . . . .
This is minor stuff, and I don’t think the ending will necessarily convince anyone, but it’s pleasant and lightweight fun.

Elixir of Love by C. S. Forester probably qualifies as an SF story, too, although it’s a fairly slight piece. In this one an Oxford professor sees the mass-mating of goldfish in the narrator’s garden pond. He concludes the goldfish’s simultaneous behaviour must be because of something in the water. He tasks his laboratory staff to isolate the compound.
Some weeks later the professor is atypically forward with a blind date at a dinner party the narrator sets up; the story eventually ends with some decorous description of an amorous wedding party.

One other story which may be of interest to fantasy readers is Both Watches of the Hands by Rowan Ayers—it isn’t fantasy but is such a wild flight of fancy it is halfway there.
The story opens with a despondent ex-Navy lieutenant called Michael Hancock, who is now in civvy street operating pleasure cruises and not enjoying the experience:

Nothing ever seemed to work out as it should. When the tides were right, the weather drove the holiday-makers inland to cinemas and amusement arcades. When the weather was right, Silver Streak was generally lying uselessly and unproductively on the soft, oozy mud that remained when the tide had run half a mile out to sea.
And on the rare occasions when both were right, there was usually something wrong with the engines, and he had to spend several sickening, dirty hours bent double in the narrow engine-room space, while his rival, the Mary Lou, chugged mockingly about the bay, loaded to the gunwales with eager passengers.  p. 97

Just as he is about to depart on another trip three naval ratings Hancock knows from his military service arrive and ask permission to come aboard. Not only do they treat Hancock like he is still their skipper, but they begin to carry out their duties as if they are on a Navy ship. Not only that, they subject the passengers of the pleasure boat trip to naval procedure. There is initial resistance from them and, to a certain extent, from Hancock, but everyone soon gets into the swing of things:

Michael still could not believe the situation. Before him, on either side, stood ten solemn men and women, ostensibly at ease. Neither their sex nor their age seemed to intrude any more into the neat pattern of well-established naval discipline, and he felt that he had to make no concessions, even to himself.
He was the Captain, this was his ship, and these were his crew. Nothing else could now be allowed to challenge the fantastic absurdity of the position. He hoped and prayed that Leo, his own regular bowman, who always went below for a sleep the minute the Silver Streak left the jetty, would not emerge through the open hatch to restore any of the reality.
“I should just like to say a few words,” Michael began, and was surprised by the tone of his voice. Someone in the ranks began to mutter.
“Keep silence, there,” shouted Brewis with dramatic effect.
“For some of you,” continued the Captain, “this may be your first seagoing appointment.” It was an opening he had used before many times. “And you may find things a little strange at first. But I want you to settle down into the routine as quickly as possible, and make this a really happy and efficient ship.”
He dug his hands into the pockets of his duffel and glowered at the motley crew before him. “That can only be achieved,” he said, “by teamwork, and complete co-operation, from the oldest among you, right down to the youngest boy.”
For a moment he caught sight of the awe-stricken child who had been proving such a pest, and the sight nearly deflated him.
“That is all I have to say,” he added quickly, “except to wish you good luck, and safe landfalls.”
“Hear, hear,” said the reedy voice of the small man.
The young blonde in the port watch began to clap very softly, until Brewis turned on her savagely and withered her into silence with one of his special disciplinary glances. A couple in the starboard watch were gazing at Michael, wide-eyed. They too had somehow been caught up in the fantasy of the moment, and saw before them a strange new life opening out. Visions of walking the plank, keelhauling, cockroaches, whippings, and being clapped in irons hovered indistinctly about their brains.  p. 104

Matters take a semi-serious turn when the passengers form a watch on both sides of the boat, and the enemy is sighted (the Mary Lou). Action Stations is called, and they set course for it at full speed . . . .
This one is a lot of fun.

As for the rest of the fiction, Summer in Salander by H. E. Bates5 is a novelette labelled as a “New Short Complete Novel.” Initially it reads like mid-period J. G. Ballard:

Manson lifted one corner of the green gauze window-blind of the shipping office and watched, for an indifferent moment or two, the swift cortege of a late funeral racing up the hill. It flashed along the water-front like a train of cellulose beetles, black and glittering, each of the thirty cars a reflection of the glare of sun on sea.
He wondered, as the cars leapt away up the avenue of jade and carmine villas, eyeless in the bright evening under closed white shades, why funerals in Salandar were always such races, unpompous and frenzied, as if they were really chasing the dead. He wondered too why he never saw them coming back again. They dashed in black undignified weeping haste to somewhere along the sea-coast, where blue and yellow espada boats beat with high moonlike prows under rocks ashen with burnt seaweed, and then vanished for ever.  p. 26

To an extent the Ballard comparison holds true for the rest of the story as it is, essentially, a psychological portrait of the protagonist, Manson, although he is a more conventional character than would be found in Ballard’s work.
We learn that Manson is a shipping manager or some such in an unspecified Mediterranean backwater, and that he is due to meet an out of season ship when it arrives that afternoon. When he gets on board the purser tells him that the only passenger disembarking cabled ahead asking Manson to organise a hotel room for her. Manson has no knowledge of any cable, and expresses his irritation at being used as a travel agent. Manson then meets Vane, the female passenger, for the first time:

 “It was awfully good of you to meet me,” a voice said.
When he turned, abruptly, at the same time as the sweat-bright faces of the policeman, the customs officer, and the purser, he saw her standing behind him, a tall, black-haired girl, with an amazing combination of large pure blue eyes and black lashes, her hair striped across the front with a leonine streak of tawny blonde.
He found himself at once resenting and resisting this paler streak of hair.
“It was really very good of you,” she said. “My name is Vane.”
He checked an impulse to say, “Spelt in which way?” and she held out a hand covered with a long yellow glove.  p. 28-29

Although Manson is discomfited and annoyed at the situation he is in, Vane soon proves to the dominant character. It isn’t long before Manson is eating out of her hands, beginning with him recovering a left-behind handbag from her cabin (the unmade bed and smell of perfume give Manson a “startling sensation of intimacy”), helping her with her bags, and then taking her to his hotel.
The rest of the story shows how Manson, generally a passive, beached character, is drawn into Vane’s orbit (she is, by contrast, assertive and energetic). When Vane says she would like to go to the hills that weekend, he ends up going with her.
The second part of the story has them travel by car and mule to a house in the mountains, along with a servant Manuel. During their stay, Manson becomes ever more infatuated with her, and eventually comes out of his shell to insist that they should go up to the high plateau together (hopefully leaving Manuel behind so they can be alone together). Manuel suggests that the trip is not a good idea, but Manson pressures Vane to go on what turns out to be a fateful trip.
I’m not sure that the story ultimately amounts to much, but it provides such good descriptions of both place and person and character that it’s definitely worth a read. It certainly made me think about digging out more of Bates’ work. (Since writing this last, I’ve read his transgressive The Good Corn in next month’s issue—more of this in my next Argosy review.)

Queer Fish by Kem Bennett is a story about Arthur, a dock worker and sometime boatman, and his bete noire (because of Arthur’s occasionally illegal salmon fishing), the local water-bailiff. After Arthur baits the bailiff in the pub one evening he goes to his boat. There he is held up at gunpoint by two strangers who were in the bar earlier, and forced to take them to France. Or at least it seems that way until we learn that (spoiler) Arthur has put them ashore on another part of the English coast (they were too seasick to notice). Arthur is greeted by the police on return but, because of his actions, he gets the better of the bailiff (the police don’t care about the salmon he caught on the way back). A cleverly plotted if minor, story.

Brandy for the Colonel by Paul Gallico6 opens with a retired French colonel overhearing his housemaid talking to a young man, an aspiring painter. He learns they are unhappy because they cannot go to Paris to live together as she will lose her dowry if she does. After this passage there is a character sketch of the retired colonel, which tells us of his love of the local brandy, and the termagant of a wife who keeps him away from it:

And, to conclude this portrait of a man better than most of us, if Colonel Bobet had any complaints about the character of his wife, he kept them to himself. He had chosen her when she was young, beautiful, kind, and good-tempered. If age and disappointment in what life had brought her had now curdled these attributes, it was not her fault, he reasoned. Even a life in which much can be arranged can play shabby tricks, such as the old wound that cost him his brigade and perhaps the marshal’s baton. And besides, every man was born to bear trials, and she was his.  p. 63

The colonel then attempts to resolve the matter with his wife (who controls the maid’s dowry) and the wealthy Marquis (who owns the local brandy company, and may have been a war-time collaborator), but fails. After this the colonel summons his old Resistance comrade Pantoufle, and sets in progress a plan which gets the couple the money they need to go to Paris, and also satisfies his wife’s desire to get her house painted.
The final act reveals (spoiler) that Pantoufle is now the advertising manager of a brandy firm that is a rival to the Marquis’, and the paint job on the colonel’s house now reveals an advertising slogan that can only be seen from the Marquis’ house.
The ending isn’t terribly convincing, but the story is a pleasant and interestingly contrived tale with some good, if stereotypical, French colour.

Last Message by C. H. Milsom (a one-shot wonder according to Galactic Central) is set on a ship in heavy weather whose radio operator picks up an SOS from a ditched aircraft. After the ship rescues the survivors (spoiler) the pilot tells the ship’s captain that they sent no distress message as the aircraft’s radio operator died trying to fix the aerial.
The nautical description in this story is convincing but the reveal is rather abrupt.

Memory of a Fight by Gerald Kersh is a relatively brief (and minor) vignette of a Roman boxer’s career. This involves meeting his twin brother in his last fight.

The magazine has, as well as the fiction, a number of filler items. Two of these are poem and prose features, Not Quite Cricket, which has two poems and one vignette (which escaped me) on that subject, and Animal Crackers, which is three pages of forgettable verse and prose extracts about animals. That said, I was taken by a line from a 1681 letter of Sir Thomas Browne to his son, “I beleeve you must be carefull of your Ostridge this returne of cold wether . . .”

Apples is an okay poem from Laurie Lee. The magazine also contains Food for Thought, a quiz, and the Argosy Crossword.

I enjoyed this magazine more than any other I’ve read recently. Some of it is particularly good (the Wyndham and the Marsh), and most of the rest is either noteworthy (the Bates) or just good, unpretentious entertainment7 (the Gallico, Aiken, Ayers, etc.). This mid-1950’s British magazine is also a lot less buttoned-up and conformist than I expected. Recommended.  ●

_____________________

1. There is some limited information about this magazine on Wikipedia and Galactic Central.

2. The serialisation of SF novels in mainstream publications wasn’t unusual in the 1950s: John Christopher’s The Death of Grass appeared in The Saturday Evening Post, for example, while a version of Wyndham’s The Day of the Triffids (as Revolt of the Triffids) appeared in Collier’s.

3. Willard Marsh’s story was also reprinted in F&SF, June 1955 (using its Yale Review title, Astronomy Lesson).

4. The Wikipedia piece above about Argosy reveals that Joan Aiken (known for the The Wolves of Willoughby Chase) was the magazine’s feature editor from 1955 to 1960. Her Science Fiction Encyclopedia page is here.

5. H. E. Bates is best perhaps best known for his Darling Buds of May books (which were made into a very successful TV series which I’m not sure I ever watched). His Wikipedia page is here.
There are a couple of useful websites listed in that latter webpage. One, the H. E. Bates Companion, gives this information about Summer in Salander:

In the second volume of his autobiography (The Blossoming World, 67), Bates would summarize the tale as follows: “a woman both rich and selfish sets out, having left her own husband, to destroy, rather after the manner of a spider with a fly, a young man she meets while on holiday on an island.” In a late essay (“H.E. Bates — By Himself”) Bates cites this story as the rare case in which a work of imagination is later replicated in real life, with a “precise replica of the Mrs Vane of my story: rich, selfish, bored, running away from her husband and looking for someone to play cat and mouse with” appearing on board ship when Bates and his wife were returning to the island he used as the story’s setting.

I don’t think this accurately describes the story. First, Vane doesn’t play “cat and mouse” with Manson—she dominates their relationship from the start but doesn’t intentionally torment him—and she doesn’t set out to “destroy” him either. Manson is the one who insists on going up to the high plateau despite Vane’s resistance, and his fall is an unfortunate accident.

6. Paul Gallico wrote The Poseidon Adventure among others. His best known story appears to be The Snow Goose, which is available as a PDF on the Saturday Evening Post website.

7. One wonders if there is an opening in the current SF magazine market for a publication which runs more entertaining stories—an Isaac Asimov’s Science Fiction Magazine* for the twenties, if you will.
*The Scithers version (in spirit if not in actuality).  ●

rssrss

The Chrysalids by John Wyndham, 1955


Summary:
Wyndham’s third published novel (published as Re-Birth in the USA) is a post-holocaust/persecution of mutants/coming of age tale narrated by David, who recounts his childhood days in a primitive farming community located in Labrador. His village is not far from the Fringes and the radioactive Badlands.
The first part of the story mostly focuses on the characters and their local customs and prohibitions (BEWARE THOU THE MUTANT!), and it has some particularly well executed scenes; the second half of the novel (spoiler) exposes David and his telepathic group to the rest of the villagers, resulting in some of the former escaping to the Fringes. En route, and as they are pursued, they make a telepathic connection with a woman in distant “Sealand.” She comes to rescue them.
The theme of humanity’s racial and/or evolutionary destiny, and to a lesser extent the idea of change, is woven into the narrative throughout.
ISFDB link
Amazon UK/USA copies

Other reviews:1
Anthony Boucher, The Magazine of Fantasy and Science Fiction, August 1955
Groff Conklin, Galaxy Science Fiction, September 1955
P. Schuyler Miller, Astounding Science Fiction, October 1955
Hans Stefan Santesson, Fantastic Universe, October 1955
Villiers Gerson, Amazing Stories, November 1955
Leslie Flood, New Worlds Science Fiction, #42 December 1955
Damon Knight, Science Fiction Stories, January 1956
P. Schuyler Miller, Analog Science Fiction/Science Fact, July 1966
Charlie Brown, Locus, #59 July 16, 1970
P. Schuyler Miller, Analog Science Fiction/Science Fact, April 1971
Douglas Menville, Forgotten Fantasy, June 1971
Paul McGuire, III, Science Fiction Review, July 1978
Joseph Nicholas, Paperback Parlour, October 1979
Don D’Ammassa, Science Fiction Chronicle, #169 January 1994
Darrell Bain, My 100 Most Readable (and Re-Readable) Science Fiction Novels
Jo Walton, Tor.com
Graham Sleight, Locus, #599 December 2010
Colin Steele, SF Commentary, #81, p. 39
Duncan Lawie, Slashdot
Philip Womack, The Observer
Various, Goodreads
NYRB Reading Groups Guide

_____________________

Fiction:
The Chrysalids • novel by John Wyndham ∗∗∗

Non-fiction:
Introduction • by M. John Harrison1

_____________________

I don’t often bother with novels nowadays2 but, as a result of browsing through a pile of Argosy magazines from 1955 (the UK digest sized magazine, not the better known American pulp), I ended up reading this one. In two of those Argosys (the September and October 1955 issues3) there is a serial version of The Chrysalids (a.k.a. Re-Birth), and when I mentioned this on the Fictionmags listserv the ensuing discussion revealed that the novella4 serial was a variant version of the novel. When I said I’d probably read both (to see how they compared), I was advised to read the novel first, which I did (spoilers follow).

The Chrysalids opens with its narrator, David, recalling his childhood dreams of a city (the entire novel is narrated from some unspecified future), and it soon becomes apparent from his comments that cities do not exist in his world: he lives in a more primitive time, in a farming society set after the “Tribulation”.
When he later meets Sophie (another local child) at the river they play together. When she traps her foot under a branch David helps free her, and he discovers that she has six toes—apparently a blasphemy against “The Definition of Man”. This is the first indication we get that mutations are not tolerated in this post-holocaust world.
These prohibitions are gone into in more detail in subsequent chapters, where we find out about “Offences,” “Blasphemies” and “Deviations,” as well as the local geography of David’s world, which includes the Fringes, the Badlands and the Wild Country:

[The] occurrence of an Offence was sometimes quite an impressive occasion. Usually the first sign that one had happened was that my father came into the house in a bad temper. Then, in the evening, he would call us all together, including everyone who worked on the farm. We would all kneel while he proclaimed our repentance and led prayers for forgiveness. The next morning we would all be up before daylight and gather in the yard. As the sun rose we would sing a hymn while my father ceremonially slaughtered the two-headed calf, four-legged chicken, or whatever other kind of Offence it happened to be. Sometimes it would be a much queerer thing than those . . .
Nor were Offences limited to the livestock. Sometimes there would be some stalks of corn, or some vegetables, that my father produced and cast on the kitchen table in anger and shame. If it were merely a matter of a few rows of vegetables, they just came out and were destroyed. But if a whole field had gone wrong we would wait for good weather, and then set fire to it, singing hymns while it burnt. I used to find that a very fine sight.  pp. 18-19 (NYRB edition)

We also learn about David’s family, in particular his father Joseph Strorm who is a pious observer of this society’s anti-mutant laws (the family house contains many decorative wooden panels with sayings from the Repentances, such as THE NORM IS THE WILL OF GOD, and WATCH THOU FOR THE MUTANT!). When David makes a careless remark about wishing he had a third arm to help with some task or other, he enrages his father, and is at the receiving end of an anti-mutant tirade. That night, David dreams of Sophie:

We were all gathered in the yard, just as we had been at the last Purification. Then it had been a little hairless calf that stood waiting, blinking stupidly at the knife in my father’s hand; this time it was a little girl, Sophie, standing barefooted and trying uselessly to hide the whole long row of toes that everyone could see on each foot. We all stood looking at her, and waiting. Presently she started to run from one person to another, imploring them to help her, but none of them moved, and none of their faces had any expression. My father started to walk towards her, the knife shining in his hand. Sophie grew frantic; she flitted from one unmoving person to another, tears running down her face. My father, stern, implacable, kept on coming nearer; still no one would move to help her. My father came closer still, with long arms outspread to prevent her bolting as he cornered her.
He caught her, and dragged her back to the middle of the yard. The sun’s edge began to show above the horizon, and everyone started to sing a hymn. My father held Sophie with one arm just as he had held the struggling calf. He raised his other hand high, and as he swept it down the knife flashed in the light of the rising sun, just as it had flashed when he cut the calf’s throat . . .  p. 28 (NYRB)

We then discover that David is a mutant too; this happens when he recalls how his Uncle Axel discovered his telepathic ability when he saw him apparently talking to himself. David tells Axel that he can communicate telepathically with Rosalind, his half-cousin, prompting his uncle to tell David to keep it a secret. That evening David warns both Rosalind and the rest of the small telepathic mutant group he is in contact with.
We learn more about David’s world in a couple of subsequent episodes. The first of these involves an attack by raiders from the Fringes, when one of the men is captured and brought to the village. He talks and looks remarkably like David’s father, but his legs and arms are monstrously long and thin. The “spiderman” talks briefly to David before he is taken away.
The other episode details a dispute between David’s father and David’s half-uncle Angus (who is also Rosalind’s father) about two giant “greathorses” the latter owns. Joseph Strorm claims they are Offences, but the local inspector disagrees, saying they comply with government regulations. During all this we find that David’s village, Waknuk, is in Labrador, in what was Canada.
Later on in the story, David and Sophie are once again at the pool when another boy comes upon them and sees Sophie’s secret. There is a fight where the boy is knocked unconscious: Sophie flees to her home, and her family pack up and flee. David stays out overnight, and when he returns the next day his father whips him.
After this, David considers running away, and discusses the idea with his Uncle Axel. The latter advises against it and, from his days as a sailor, gives a vivid description of the lands and mutant races that would face David outside normal society:5

When sailors first saw those parts they were pretty scared. They felt they were leaving all Purity behind, and sailing farther and farther away from God, where He’d not be able to help them. Everybody knows that if you walk on Badlands you die, and they’d none of them expected ever to see them so close with their own eyes. But what worried them most—and worried the people they talked to when they got back—was to see how the things which are against God’s laws of nature flourish there, just as if they had a right to.
And a shocking sight it must have been at first, too. You can see giant, distorted heads of corn growing higher than small trees; big saprophytes growing on rocks, with their roots trailing out on the wind like bunches of hair, fathoms long; in some places there are fungus colonies that you’d take at first sight for big white boulders; you can see succulents like barrels, but as big as small houses, and with spines ten feet long. There are plants which grow on the clifftops and send thick, green cables down a hundred feet and more into the sea; and you wonder whether it’s a land plant that’s got to the salt water, or a sea plant that’s somehow climbed ashore. There are hundreds of kinds of queer things, and scarcely a normal one among them—it’s a kind of jungle of Deviations, going on for miles and miles. There don’t seem to be many animals, but occasionally you catch sight of one, though you’d never be able to name it. There are a fair number of birds, though, sea-birds mostly; and once or twice people have seen big things flying in the distance, too far away to make out anything except that the motion didn’t look right for birds. It’s a weird, evil land; and many a man who sees it suddenly understands what might happen here if it weren’t for the Purity Laws and the inspector.  p. 59 (NYRB)

The lands down there aren’t civilized. Mostly they don’t have any sense of sin so they don’t stop Deviations; and where they do have a sense of sin, they’ve got it mixed up. A lot of them aren’t ashamed of Mutants; it doesn’t seem to worry them when children turn out wrong, provided they’re right enough to live and to learn to look after themselves. Other places, though, you’ll find Deviations who think they are normal. There’s one tribe where both the men and women are hairless, and they think that hair is the devil’s mark; and there’s another where they all have white hair and pink eyes. In one place they don’t think you’re properly human unless you have webbed fingers and toes; in another, they don’t allow any woman who is not multi-breasted to have children.
You’ll find islands where the people are all thickset, and others where they’re thin; there are even said to be some islands where both the men and women would be passed as true images if it weren’t that some strange deviation has turned them all completely black – though even that’s easier to believe than the one about a race of Deviations that has dwindled to two feet high, grown fur and a tail, and taken to living in trees.  p. 62 (NYRB)

What is already a superior piece of post-apocalyptic fiction becomes a near-excellent one in the next chapter, which more or less ends the first major arc of the novel (involving David’s early childhood, this world’s background, and Sophie’s escape), and sows the seeds of the second (his sister Petra’s birth and their eventual flight from the village to the Fringes and external rescue).
This chapter details the birth of David’s sister, which again highlights the bad feeling between Joseph Strorm and the local inspector. In this world no-one acknowledges births until the inspector issues a certificate of normality so, inevitably, when Petra is born the inspector torments David’s father by taking his time to come out to the house, and then drags out the inspection process as well as generally humming and hawing before issuing the certificate.
Later the same month, David’s Aunt Harriet arrives at the house with her own—as we discover later, mutant—child, and suggests to David’s mother that they swap children for a few days so she can get hers certificated. David’s mother bluntly refuse her plea, and then Joseph Strorm turns up and starts denouncing her. Aunt Harriet gives her heretical views on the way out:

There were two light footsteps. The baby gave a little whimper as Aunt Harriet picked it up. She came towards the door and lifted the latch, then she paused.
‘I shall pray,’ she said. ‘Yes, I shall pray.’ She paused, then she went on, her voice steady and harder: ‘I shall pray God to send charity into this hideous world, and sympathy for the weak, and love for the unhappy and unfortunate. I shall ask Him if it is indeed His will that a child should suffer and its soul be damned for a little blemish of the body . . . And I shall pray Him, too, that the hearts of the self-righteous may be broken . . .’
Then the door closed and I heard her pass slowly along the passage.
I moved cautiously back to the window, and watched her come out and lay the white bundle gently in the trap. She stood looking down on it for a few seconds, then she unhitched the horse, climbed up on the seat, and took the bundle on to her lap, with one arm guarding it in her cloak.
She turned, and left a picture that is fixed in my mind. The baby cradled in her arm, her cloak half open, showing the upper part of the brown, braid-edged cross on her fawn dress; eyes that seemed to see nothing as they looked towards the house from a face set hard as granite . . .  p. 73 (NYRB)

Aunt Harriet is later found dead in a nearby river; there is no sign of the child.

The second part of the novel takes place several years later, when one of the group, Michael, goes to a school in the nearest city Rigo. As a result of this the group become better-informed about the world they live in.
Then the eight telepaths in the village become nine. This happens when David’s sister Petra falls into a nearby river and gives a mental shout for help, revealing herself as a particularly strong—and commanding—telepath. A number of the group rush to her rescue, causing some suspicion among the other villagers. Petra lapses back into dormancy after this trauma, which saves David having to have an awkward and potentially perilous conversation with his six-year-old sister (she may blab). Petra’s abilities, and a repeat episode, eventually cause the mutants to flee the village and head for the Fringes.
Petra’s abilities, and the events she precipitates, unfortunately provide problems for the novel as well as for the telepaths. The first of these problems is that the focus of the book drifts from David towards the group and, after the first incident, it feels as if they are almost permanently in contact: sometimes it feels like David can’t decide what to have for breakfast without consulting the group and receiving advice (I exaggerate, but not by much). Moreover, the way their telepathic communication is described is quite dull. It strikes me that if you want to write about this subject you can do so in one of two ways—you can go down the innermost-intimate-thoughts route, or you can make the process more pyrotechnic. What we get instead are endlessly dull descriptions of the “thought-shapes” that they send each other (there are pages of this in the middle of Chapter 11, when David tries to train Petra to control her power).
Also, the more time the telepaths spend together as a group, the more the characters seem to morph into a group of middle class teenagers on some jolly adventure (Michael increasingly sounds more like a head prefect than mutant superman. At one point, Rosalind says to a boasting Petra, “Beware, odious smug child”; and, after the climactic battle at the end of the novel , Petra announces, “That was very horrid.”)
While this last takes the shine off of the book, what really spoiled it for me is what happens when the threesome are eventually caught by a Fringes tribe led by the “spiderman,” and taken to his camp. During this, a distant telepath contacts Petra, and we eventually learn the sender is a woman located in “Sealand” (New Zealand). When David and Rosalind eventually come into her telepathic range she impresses on them that Petra has unprecedented telepathic power, and that help is coming. So far, so good, but in her subsequent contacts, she bangs on about the evolutionary destiny of the human race, and how telepaths are the next stage. When David later considers whether he should fight and kill his father in the upcoming battle between the village posse and the Fringe tribe, she tells him this:

‘Let him be,’ came the severe, clear pattern from the Sealand woman. ‘Your work is to survive. Neither his kind, nor his kind of thinking will survive long. They are the crown of creation, they are ambition fulfilled—they have nowhere more to go. But life is change, that is how it differs from the rocks, change is its very nature. Who, then, were the recent lords of creation, that they should expect to remain unchanged?
‘The living form defies evolution at its peril; if it does not adapt, it will be broken. The idea of completed man is the supreme vanity: the finished image is a sacrilegious myth.
‘The Old People brought down Tribulation, and were broken into fragments by it. Your father and his kind are a part of those fragments. They have become history without being aware of it. They are determined still that there is a final form to defend: soon they will attain the stability they strive for, in the only form it is granted—a place among the fossils . . .’
[. . .]
‘There is comfort in a mother’s breast, but there has to be a weaning. The attainment of independence, the severing of ties, is, at best, a bleak process for both sides; but it is necessary, even though each may grudge it and hold it against the other. The cord has been cut at the other end already; it will only be a futile entanglement if you do not cut it at your end, too.
‘Whether harsh intolerance and bitter rectitude are the armour worn over fear and disappointment, or whether they are the festival-dress of the sadist, they cover an enemy of the life-force. The difference in kind can be bridged only by self-sacrifice: his self-sacrifice, for yours would bridge nothing. So, there is the severance. We have a new world to conquer: they have only a lost cause to lose.’
She ceased, leaving me somewhat bemused. Rosalind, too, looked as if she were still catching up on it. Petra seemed bored.  pp. 182-183 (NYRB)

Petra wasn’t the only one.
All these racial/evolutionary destiny lectures come to a head when the Sealand helicopter arrives overhead the camp, and deploys threads of gossamer that bind and incapacitate the battling Waknuk posse and Fringe tribes below. After the battle stops, the Sealand woman gets off the helicopter and sprays a solvent on David, Rosalind, and Petra, dissolving the threads that hold them, while leaving the untermensch—and their horses—to die in the threads’ ever-tightening grip:

‘Yes,’ the Sealand woman told her simply. ‘They’re all dead. The plastic threads contract as they dry. A man who struggles and entangles himself soon becomes unconscious. It is more merciful than your arrows and spears.’  p. 195 (NYRB)

But not as merciful as releasing your helpless, slowly asphyxiating prisoners.
The woman then launches into a speech that has all the charm of Robert Heinlein channelling Joseph Goebbels:

‘The unhappy Fringes people were condemned through no act of their own to a life of squalor and misery— there could be no future for them. As for those who condemned them—well, that, too, is the way of it. There have been lords of life before, you know. Did you ever hear of the great lizards? When the time came for them to be superseded they had to pass away.
‘Sometime there will come a day when we ourselves shall have to give place to a new thing. Very certainly we shall struggle against the inevitable just as these remnants of the Old People do. We shall try with all our strength to grind it back into the earth from which it is emerging, for treachery to one’s own species must always seem a crime. We shall force it to prove itself, and when it does, we shall go; as, by the same process, these are going.
‘In loyalty to their kind they cannot tolerate our rise; in loyalty to our kind, we cannot tolerate their obstruction.
‘If the process shocks you, it is because you have not been able to stand off and, knowing what you are, see what a difference in kind must mean. Your minds are confused by your ties and your upbringing: you are still half-thinking of them as the same kind as yourselves. That is why you are shocked. And that is why they have you at a disadvantage, for they are not confused. They are alert, corporately aware of danger to their species. They can see quite well that if it is to survive they have not only to preserve it from deterioration, but they must protect it from the even more serious threat of the superior variant.
‘For ours is a superior variant, and we are only just beginning.’  pp. 195-196 (NYRB)

Can’t we all just get along? Or at the very least commit mass murder without the self-righteousness?
This chill speciesism (or racism, or whatever it is) that this character expresses makes for uncomfortable reading—why this wasn’t the case when it first appeared beats me; it was, after all, less than ten years after the Holocaust (or perhaps that is what made it unexceptional). I suspect the usual “Fans are Slans” attitude applied, i.e. the readers identify with the persecuted superhuman minority (and the mundanes are written off).6
The story finishes with David, Rosalind, and Petra arriving by air at the Sealander woman’s city, and sensing the mass telepathic presence below.

In conclusion, a game of two halves: a very good first half, and a not very good second one.  ●

_____________________

1. I’ve decided to comment on the introductions by M. John Harrison (Penguin edition) and Christopher Priest (New York Review of Books edition) alongside the other review comments.
The Penguin Books edition Introduction by M. John Harrison is an interesting piece which highlights several points in the novel that hadn’t registered with me (the religious aspect of Strorm’s conformity, for instance), or I quickly forgot about. It also provides some useful background about the times during which the novel was written:

In 1955 a new social class was emerging in Great Britain. Increased funding for higher education had encouraged a stream of working-and lower-middle-class adolescents into the redbrick universities. In a country where education was still considered a privilege, they went to another town for three years, and were maintained there by public funds, and compelled into an exchange of ideas; and when they came back they were irrevocably changed. They had more in common with each other than with their parents.
Their career expectations were raised. Their social expectations were raised. They had politics, they had sex: they were in possession of new languages. They ate different kinds of food. They knew more. Their parents were horrified: the umbilical cord had been cut again, this time by what seemed like sorcery. Would parental values now mean nothing in the face of book-learning? Not if they had anything to do with it. Cultural confrontation was inevitable. The Generation Gap—which would widen within ten years into outright rebellion—was opening up. If the educated young were beginning to feel like strangers in their own homes, their elders were beginning to see them as dangerous, out of control: deviant.

At other points the commentary wanders off into Harrison’s own ideas about the times, but it’s worth a read (and you can find it using the “Look Inside” feature on Amazon.co.uk).

The NYRB Introduction by Christopher Priest is, for me, the better of the two introductions. This one gives a lot of useful biographical detail, and usefully contextualises both Wyndham and his novel in the times he lived. There are a number of interesting snippets for someone, like me, who is not a Wyndham expert:

Wyndham has sometimes been described by people who knew him as an aloof figure, an outsider, not someone who enjoyed the company of other writers.  p. ix (NYRB)

Wyndham’s early work is not substantially different from that of other writers of the period. In later years he appeared uncomfortable with his prewar stories, and all the evidence is that he felt embarrassed by them. (Most of this early work has been subsequently reprinted, but only after his death in 1969.)  p. x (NYRB)

After the war he returned to science fiction, adopting the John Wyndham name for the first time. In modern terminology, he re-invented himself. He had matured during his wartime experiences and although he was still interested in science fiction, he no longer wanted to approach the material in the fast-moving, sensational style of the pulp magazines. He chose instead to go back to the more thoughtful approach of H. G. Wells. To all intents and purposes, Wyndham became a new writer[.]  p. x (NYRB)

There is more of interest. (You can read five of the seven pages using the “Look Inside” feature on Amazon.com.)

As to the reviews of the book, Anthony Boucher (F&SF, August 1955) says that Re-Birth is:

[Outstanding] among the latest volumes of science fiction [. . .] in a so far undistinguished year, it’s rivaled, only by Arthur C. Clarke’s Earthlight in its combination of literary skill with solid thinking about the future. Its theme will hardly be unfamiliar to any SF reader: the problems of a group of telepathic children in a post-atomic culture [. . .] Wyndham makes something completely fresh and moving out of his telepathic mutants—partly by the accumulation of minutely plausible detail at which he has always excelled, partly by a greater depth and maturity than he has shown in previous novels.  p. 93-94

Groff Conklin (Galaxy Science Fiction, September 1955) says, in part:

This is a fresh new version of the old plot about a post-atomic-war mutant society. It is so skillfully done that the fact that it’s not a shiny new idea makes absolutely no difference.
I have put it on my shelf next to Padgett’s Mutant; and when you compare the two, I think you will agree that variety within existing frameworks is one of the truly healthy directions for science fiction to take.  p. 91

P. Schuyler Miller (Astounding Science Fiction, October 1955) says:

If Arthur C. Clarke is at the moment Britain’s ranking practitioner of science fiction, John Wyndham is running him a close second and improving fast. In “Re-Birth,” quite without straining for novelty, he has made the Mutant theme believable in a way that “Odd John,” “Slan,” and the stories of the Baldies never quite were.
[. . .]
In its quiet way, I think you’ll agree that this is one of the best of the Ballantine originals.  p. 145-146

Hans Stefan Santesson (Fantastic Universe, October 1955) describes the plot and setting of the novel (during which he also quotes the two-headed calf/four-legged chicken passage above), and finishes with this:

Certainly Wyndham’s most mature novel, it is not necessarily “a triumphant assertion of the further potentiality of Man” (to quote the publishers). It grants a possible future—no more. Wyndham, in the struggle for survival of the young telepaths, David, Rosalind and Petra, has drawn a challenging picture of a broken Earth, afraid of the past and as afraid of the future, and still with the seeds of that future within it. Re-Birth is important. Read it!  p. 109-110

Villiers Gerson (Amazing Stories, November 1955) says in part:

Good science fiction writes slowly, and reads fast. It writes slowly because a gifted author such as Mr. Wyndham develops his people and their surroundings with magnificent unity—with thought, and time, and effort. We become intensely interested in our harried protagonists; we follow their flight and its triumphant conclusion with distress and devotion, with an absorption which makes this novel hard to lay down. The author has evoked not only a fully rounded and believable world; he has also evoked an emotional structure, a mood which makes this his best book to date. Highly recommended.  p. 114-115

Leslie Flood (New Worlds Science Fiction, #42 December 1955) says in part:

Mr. Wyndham excels in adding lustre to themes familiar to science fiction readers by attention to realistic detail and considerable literary skill in plotting and characterisation.
[. . .]
[His] new novel concerns the problems of telepathic children in a post-atomic community which fanatically eschews any deviation from the premutation ‘pure’ strain, but happily his ‘freaks’ win through in the end to establish a new era. There is a wealth of warm emotion in this sincere picture of the advent of homo superior, and an increasing maturity of vision which left me very satisfied at the finish.  p. 124

Damon Knight (Science Fiction Stories, January 1956) writes a long review which includes this:

[The new Wyndham] has turned out to be something remarkably like a new H. G. Wells: not the wise-old-owl Wells, more interested in sermon than story, but the young Wells, with that astonishing, unaccountable, compelling gift of pure story-telling.
Written in the first person [. . .] this book introduces us to the most believable After-the-Atom society on record. [. . .] It’s sharply real, because the people and their world are real. These first few chapters have the genuine autobiographical sense—that Wellsian retrospective clarity, the torment of writers who can’t do it themselves.
More’s the pity that Wyndham, for once, failed to realize now good a thing he had. The sixth toe was immensely believable, and sufficient: but Wyndham has dragged in a telepathic mutation on top of it, has made David himself one of the nine child telepaths, and hauled the whole plot away from his carefully built background, into just one more damned chase with a rousing cliché at the end of it.
Wyndham’s unflaggingly expert writing, all the way through, only proves that there are no exceptions: this error is fatal. [. . .] One forest is like another forest, one chase like another chase, one rescue like another rescue. Those who want to read stale derring-do don’t have to come to science fiction: back issues of pulps, at three for a quarter, are foundering full of it. Crooks chase man and girl who Know Too Much; lawman chases badman; over and over and over; why else do you suppose the pulps died? [. . .]
A rolling story gathers no meaning. Most of the frantic physical action in science fiction, of which sophisticated critics rightly complain, is no more than a nervous twitch.
Let us sit still, and unroll our mats, and tell our tales.  p. 118-119

The whole review is worth reading.
P. Schuyler Miller (Analog Science Fiction/Science Fact, July 1966) adds in his second review of this book:

This is the first science fiction in what is apparently a new Ballantine series of paperbacks selected for teenagers. An introduction for teachers and parents emphasizes that there are indeed serious themes in such stories of a nightmare future, and spells out what they are. The kids will undoubtedly have noted them—and others—in passing.  p. 155

P. Schuyler Miller (Analog Science Fiction/Science Fact, April 1971) adds in his third review:

This is the only one of the lot with previous hardback publication in the U.S. It was one of the titles in Ballantine’s short-lived simultaneous hard/paperback series, and a classic in its own right.  p. 165

Paul McGuire, III, (Science Fiction Review, July 1978) says:

Roughly the first two-thirds of this novel is the episodic narration of the protagonist’s youth. It is strong on characterization, with a few effective vignettes.
[. . .]
Eventually, as one might expect, discovery is made and Dave, his sister, and girlfriend flee for their lives to the “fringes”, where outlaw mutants have a refuge. The question is, can they survive long enough for the deus ex machina to come and make everything all wonderful.
Two familiar (too familiar?) and related themes tie everything together; telepaths are superior human beings and telepaths will be persecuted. Nothing terribly original, but after all, the book was published in 1955. Still, the book doesn’t really deserve to be called a classic, but then, few of the books labeled that by publishers in this young genre do either.
[. . .]
Occasionally, RE-BIRTH seems to be the READER’S DIGEST version of a larger work, but it is interesting and generally well-written.

Colin Steele (SF Commentary, #81) only briefly mentions The Chrysalids (I’m not convinced he read it) before discussing, at much greater length, the publication of an early (and originally rejected) novel, Plan for Chaos. (The review is on p. 39 of that issue.)

Duncan Lawie (Slashdot) says, in part:

The Chrysalids is skilfully written, displaying the increasing danger and frustration for a hidden community of telepaths in a society which prizes normalcy above all else. Their striving for “averageness” despite an ability which allows them insight far beyond their fellows and in the face of widespread communal fear of the different strikes a chord with generation after generation of reader. There is also clear advocacy for change in this novel. While accepting that any creature will fight to preserve itself and its type, there is an emphasis on the importance of change as the only means of improvement and a belief that evolution has no ultimate end point. This leads to the thesis that it is inherently right that humanity give way to those who come after us. This Darwinian perspective may seem reasonable in the long view but the book draws into renewed sharpness questions which have been debated for decades.
The final pages are almost overwhelmed by Wyndham’s need to state his position clearly, but the novel does regain equilibrium. As a whole, the book achieves considerable complexity of idea and action whilst maintaining straightforward language. The story progresses primarily through character development, which allows a natural flow and shape in the plot. It is a book which rarely pulls its punches and this is a contributing factor to its continued success and validity almost 50 years after its original publication. The Chrysalids is a tight, well developed novel from a master of a peculiarly English style of science fiction.

Jo Walton (Tor.com) concludes with:

The real strength of The Chrysalids is the seamless including of the way it builds up a picture of the future world from the point of view of a child entirely immersed in it. I also give it points for not making the rescuers from Zealand entirely nice—something I totally missed as a child. There are many conventional ways in which Wyndham is not a good writer—I’ve mentioned the characterisation, and his plots often work out much too neatly. He was much better at thinking up situations than having something actually happen in them. But there’s a writing skill that doesn’t have a name, unless it’s called readability, with which he was well endowed—the ability to write a sentence that makes you want to keep reading the next sentence and so on and on. He has that compelling quality, whatever it is, that makes me want to keep reading a book and not put it down. It got me even on this nth re-read in which I knew in advance every single event of the novel and was also looking deeply askance at the female characters. I was reading it standing up at the bus stop, I was reading it on the bus so that I almost missed my stop, I sat down and kept right on reading it when I came in instead of making dinner.

Philip Womack (The Observer) concludes with:

It becomes apparent that David’s village is isolated in its customs and beliefs. [. . .] Whose is the true pattern and whose the mutation? These questions underlie Wyndham’s crystalline, evocative writing, as thrilling as John Buchan’s as we follow David’s final gallop towards what we can only hope is freedom. Wyndham’s genius, though, is to show that even rescue is compromised.

The New York Review of Books issued a Reading Groups Guide when they reprinted the book. It is worth looking at, and had a couple of observations/questions that didn’t occur to me, including this:

The web-like weapon at the end of the book leads to imagery of metamorphosis and rebirth (a chrysalis is a pupal caterpillar in the stage before it emerges from the cocoon as a butterfly), even though it suffocates and kills everyone except the heroes. David, Rosalind, and Petra are saved from their enemies, but how are they reborn?

I suspect my answer would get me drummed out of most book clubs.

2. I started giving up on novels in the 1980s, when books started bloating from the usual 160-200 pp. size to many hundreds of pages—what I think of as the “never mind the quality, feel the width” transition the field went through after the Star Wars movies in the mid-1970s. Most of the doorsteps I’ve picked up since confirm that prejudice, and few wouldn’t have been improved by substantial trimming.

3. The UK Argosy of this period has a piece of SF in nearly every issue as far as I can see (there are a lot of stories by Ray Bradbury, and some are described as a “Science Fiction Choice”). There are also various other names that I recognise (Gerald Kersh, and Joan Aiken, who has a fantasy story in the September issue containing the first part of the Wyndham serial). Here are some of the magazine’s contents lists on Galactic Central.

4. The novella is 28,000 words (13k+15k) long; the novel is 70,000 words.
I am told by a Wyndham enthusiast that no information exists about the circumstances surrounding the creation and publication of the novella version, but the table below shows the content and structure difference of the two works. From memory—it is all a bit of a blur—the main differences are that the novella, apart from its overall compression, loses the Sophie (six toes) and Anne (marriage outside the group) subplots, and the raid by the Fringes tribes is moved to the beginning of the story.

5. Axel’s nautical anecdotes, and the advanced technological society that appears at the end of The Chrysalids, vaguely reminded me of parts of Keith Roberts’ Drek Yarman and Tremarest (the last two of his ‘Kiteworld’ stories). I wonder if The Chrysalids influenced Roberts?—he also wrote a few psi/telepathy stories in his early career: Manipulation, The Inner Wheel, The Worlds That Were.

6. The Chrysalids has a certain similarity to C. M. Kornbluth’s The Marching Morons and James Tiptree’s Houston, Houston, Do You Read?, in that those portrayed as the persecuted (Wyndham’s mutants), the put upon (Kornbluth’s technocrats), or the previously oppressed (Tiptree’s women) turn out to be as as ghastly as those that they oppose and/or replace. That would never happen nowadays.
For another take on how supermen treat those who have come before, have a look at the recently reviewed Kindness by Lester del Rey (review and links to a copy here).  ●

rssrss

1945 Retro Hugo Award and 2020 Hugo Award Finalists

The 1945 Retro Hugo and 2020 Hugo Award finalists were announced a few days ago. Here are the links (for anyone that has been hiding in a bunker):

http://www.thehugoawards.org/hugo-h…/1945-retro-hugo-awards/

http://www.thehugoawards.org/hugo-history/2020-hugo-awards/

Brief comments follow (for those in search of more detail, have a look at Cora Buhlert’s blog, link on the right).

1945 Retro-Hugo Awards

Best Novel:
The Golden Fleece by Robert Graves (Cassell)
Land of Terror by Edgar Rice Burroughs (Edgar Rice Burroughs, Inc.)
Shadow Over Mars (The Nemesis from Terra) by Leigh Brackett (Startling Stories, Fall 1944)
Sirius: A Fantasy of Love and Discord by Olaf Stapledon (Secker & Warburg)
The Wind on the Moon by Eric Linklater (Macmillan)
The Winged Man by A.E. van Vogt and E. Mayne Hull (Astounding Science Fiction, May-June 1944)

I’ve only read the Hull/van Vogt novel, and the Stapledon years ago. Looks like a weak year for novels to me.

Best Novella:
The Changeling by A.E. van Vogt (Astounding Science Fiction, April 1944)
A God Named Kroo by Henry Kuttner (Thrilling Wonder Stories, Winter 1944)
Intruders from the Stars by Ross Rocklynne (Amazing Stories, January 1944)
The Jewel of Bas by Leigh Brackett (Planet Stories, Spring 1944)
Killdozer! by Theodore Sturgeon (Astounding Science Fiction, November 1944)
Trog by Murray Leinster (Astounding Science Fiction, June 1944)

Another weak category. I’ve read three: the Sturgeon is a strong story, the van Vogt is mediocre and the Leinster is plain awful. I’ve been meaning to read the issue that has the Kuttner novel, and this will provide some encouragement.

Best Novelette:
Arena by Fredric Brown (Astounding Science Fiction, June 1944)
The Big and the Little (The Merchant Princes), by Isaac Asimov (Astounding Science Fiction, August 1944)
The Children’s Hour by Lawrence O’Donnell (C.L. Moore and Henry Kuttner) (Astounding Science Fiction, March 1944)
City by Clifford D. Simak (Astounding Science Fiction, May 1944)
No Woman Born by C.L. Moore (Astounding Science Fiction, December 1944)
When the Bough Breaks by Lewis Padgett (C.L. Moore and Henry Kuttner) (Astounding Science Fiction, November 1944)

The C. L. Moore story is a novella (19,600 words when I OCRd the Great SF Stories version; the magazine version came out higher).
A strong category, although I don’t know what City is doing here (Census is a stronger piece if you must have a ‘City’ story in this category). I haven’t read the Asimov recently (and I hope the voters don’t award this series another Hugo). Brackett’s The Veil of Astellar should probably be here.
The Children’s Hour would be my pick, even if No Woman Born isn’t transferred to the novella category.

Best Short Story:
And the Gods Laughed by Fredric Brown (Planet Stories, Spring 1944)
Desertion by Clifford D. Simak (Astounding Science Fiction, November 1944)
Far Centaurus by A. E. van Vogt (Astounding Science Fiction, January 1944)
Huddling Place by Clifford D. Simak (Astounding Science Fiction, July 1944)
I, Rocket by Ray Bradbury (Amazing Stories, May 1944)
The Wedge (The Traders), by Isaac Asimov (Astounding Science Fiction, October 1944)

I’ve only read half of these. I don’t think the van Vogt should be here (strong start but weak ending), and I was lukewarm about Huddling Place (but there are obviously a lot of agoraphobia fans or sufferers out there). Ditto my comments about the Asimov.
Desertion seems the obvious choice to me.

Best Editor, Short Form:
John W. Campbell, Jr.
Oscar J. Friend
Mary Gnaedinger
Dorothy McIlwraith
Raymond A. Palmer
W. Scott Peacock

Campbell again I think.

Best Professional Artist:
Earle Bergey
Margaret Brundage
Boris Dolgov
Matt Fox
Paul Orban
William Timmins

Woo-hoo, my nominations actually count for something for once. Dolgov gets a Hugo nod, and so does Timmins.
I think I may vote for Brundage though, as it may be the last chance to do so (I think her artwork peters out after 1944).

2020 Hugo Awards

I’ve only read a couple of the shorter pieces of fiction (the Siobhan Carroll story is cute but it’s not Hugo worthy, and Rivers Solomon’s short story is awful), so general comments only:

Women continue to dominate the novel, novella, novelette, and short story categories, with 6 out of 6 in the novel, 3½ (plus one non-binary) out of 6 in the novella (Solomon’s piece is listed as a solo work by ISFDB, and does not list any co-contributors), 5 out of 6 in the novelette, and 5 out of 6 in the short story. Of the male writers, I think one is white, and he has ½ a nomination as a collaborator (i.e. he wouldn’t have got there without his female beard).
This tribal voting is completely out of whack with writer demographics (never mind what may actually be the “best” in the field), and it is, if memory serves, at least the third year in a row that this has happened.
I also note that nearly all the novelette and short fiction comes from free vs. pay-for publications.
If the aforementioned gender and race bias isn’t dispiriting enough, Jeanette Ng’s personal attack on John Campbell (and wider attack on the field) at last year’s Hugo Award ceremony is a finalist for the Best Related Work Hugo. I don’t know what is more depressing, that several hundred so-called fans decided to do some Trumpian doubling-down on this unpleasant incident, or that Ng actually accepted the nomination (all potential finalists are contacted ahead of time and given the opportunity to withdraw). Just think about the thought process that happened there.
It looks like the lunatics are still in charge of the asylum (or at least the main building and a couple of the wings).

Edited 10th April 2020: Changed “4½” to “3½ (plus one non-binary)” in novella.

rssrss

The Great SF Stories #6, 1944, edited by Isaac Asimov & Martin H. Greenberg

Summary:
Another mixed bag of stories, this time from 1944. The best known will be Arena by Fredric Brown, Killdozer by Theodore Sturgeon, No Woman Born by C. L. Moore, the three ‘City’ stories from Clifford D. Simak (which includes the classic Desertion), and Cleve Cartmill’s Deadline, which precipitated a visit to editor John W. Campbell from the FBI because of the discussion of atomic bomb technology in that story.
Others that should be better known are the The Veil of Astellar by Leigh Brackett, and When the Bough Breaks by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore. A notable omission from the volume is the latter couple’s The Children’s Hour.
ISFDB link
Archive.org copy

Other reviews:1
Lawrence I. Charters, Science Fiction & Fantasy Book Review, #4, May 1982
Tom Easton, Analog Science Fiction/Science Fact, July 1982
George Kelley, Friday’s Forgotten Books
Various, Goodreads

_____________________

Editors, Isaac Asimov and Martin H. Greenberg

Fiction:
Far Centaurus • short story by A. E. van Vogt ∗∗
Deadline • novelette by Cleve Cartmill
The Veil of Astellar • novelette by Leigh Brackett +
Sanity • short story by Fritz Leiber
Invariant • short story by John R. Pierce
City • novelette by Clifford D. Simak
Arena • novelette by Fredric Brown +
Huddling Place • short story by Clifford D. Simak
Kindness • short story by Lester del Rey
Desertion • short story by Clifford D. Simak
When the Bough Breaks • novelette by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore [as by Lewis Padgett] +
Killdozer! • novella by Theodore Sturgeon ∗∗
No Woman Born • novelette by C. L. Moore

Non-fiction:
Introduction • by Martin H. Greenberg
Story Introductions • by Martin H. Greenberg and Isaac Asimov

_____________________

I’d originally intended to write and publish this review before the Retro Hugo nominations closed the other week but real life intervened (and not COVID-19 either), hence the long delay.
Some of the stories in this volume have already been reviewed in the half-dozen issues of Astounding I’ve read recently, so I’ve cut and pasted those half-dozen (starting with van Vogt’s Far Centaurus) in at the end—with the exception of City, which is discussed with Huddling Place and Desertion (all stories in Clifford D. Simak’s ‘City’ series).

The first of the stories that I hadn’t seen is The Veil of Astellar by Leigh Brackett, an ‘Asteroid Belt’ story. This opens with a brief prologue that tells of a manuscript arriving at Space Authority HQ, which tells of the “Veil of Astellar”, “the light that came from nowhere to swallow ships”. Them the action starts:

There had been a brawl at Madam Kan’s, on the Jekkara Low-Canal. Some little Martian glory-holer had got too high on thil, and pretty soon the spiked knuckle-dusters they use around there began to flash, and the little Martian had pulled his last feed-valve.
They threw what was left of him out onto the stones of the embankment almost at my feet. I suppose that was why I stopped—because I had to, or trip over him. And then I stared.
The thin red sunlight came down out of a clear green sky. Red sand whispered in the desert beyond the city walls, and red-brown water ran slow and sullen in the canal. The Martian lay twisted over on his back, with his torn throat spilling the reddest red of all across the dirty stones.
He was dead. He had green eyes, wide open, and he was dead.  p. 66

The narrator is a spacer called J. Goat, who, after the fight, notices a couple standing near to the body: one of these is a woman called Virgie, who reminds Goat of an old flame of his called Missy. He then notices a silver locket that she wears, and also gets vague telepathic flashes from her. After the couple leave, Goat goes to a bar, where he fights with a man called Gallery.
To be honest, this is all a little confusing to begin with (it’s hard to work out what the arc of the story is going to be), and matters don’t become much clearer when Goat meets Virgie again on return to his job on the spaceship Queen of Jupiter. There, he learns that (spoiler) the locket Virgie has is the one he gave to Missy three hundred years ago, and has been passed down through the generations: Virgie is his descendant. Just as Goat realises this, the Veil surrounds the ship and teleports it to the interior of Astellar, a hollowed out asteroid in the centre of the Veil. We then find that Goat is a “Judas Goat”, an Astellarian who lives in the Veil, and was on the ship so that the Astellarians could find it.
Matters clarify considerably in the second half, where the passengers disembark and march in a dreamlike trance towards the X-crystals which control the Veil, and to their deaths (their life force will be absorbed). We also learn that the X-crystals give Goat and the other Astellarians renewed life in exchange for luring spaceships into the Veil.
The rest of the story tells of Goat’s guilt about his actions—he describes himself at one point as a “space-vampire”, and he eventually betrays his friends (and lover, Shirina) on Astellar and rebels. This involves him rescuing his daughter and destroying the X-crystals. Astellar explodes after Goat and his daughter leave, and the Veil is no more.
My account probably gives the impression that the story is rather pulp, but it is written in a way that works, and works well. It is also quite an ambitious tale, and one that weaves in a number of religious allusions and images, as well as having an ending which is (for its time and place of publication) an extraordinary wail of angst:

Somewhere in the solar system there must be somebody willing to pray for me. They used to teach me, when I was a kid, that prayer helped. I want somebody to pray for my soul, because I can’t do it for myself.
If I were glad of what I’ve done, if I had changed, perhaps then I could pray.
But I’ve gone beyond humanity, and I can’t turn back.
Maybe prayer doesn’t matter. Maybe there’s nothing beyond death but oblivion. I hope so! If I could only stop being, stop thinking, stop remembering.
I hope to all the gods of all the universes that death is the end. But I don’t know, and I’m afraid.
Afraid. Judas—Judas—Judas! I betrayed two worlds, and there couldn’t be a hell deeper than the one I live in now.
And still I’m afraid.
Why? Why should I care what happens to me? I destroyed Astellar. I destroyed Shirina, whom I loved better than anything in Creation. I destroyed my friends, my comrades—and I have destroyed myself.
And you’re not worth it. Not all the human cattle that breed in the solar system were worth Astellar, and Shirina, and the things we did beyond space and time, together.
Why did I give Missy that locket?
Why did I have to meet Virgie, with her red hair?
Why did I remember? Why did I care? Why did I do what I did?
Why was I ever born?  p. 92

Parts of this story remind me of Zelazny’s work, and Asimov’s comment in the introduction seems spot on:

Could her stories of the Forties have been written in the Sixties instead, the best magazines in the field would have clawed at each other for the privilege of publishing them.  p. 64

I’ll close by saying that this story doesn’t seem that different, in terms of literary intent and execution, to some of Moore’s work in Astounding. I wonder, if Brackett had got on better with Campbell,2 whether this one could have appeared there too.

Kindness by Lester del Rey has Danny as the last representative of homo sapiens on Earth: the rest of mankind has evolved into homo intelligens. Although this new race are are physically similar to Danny, they are more intelligent and perceptive, and can draw conclusions from very limited information. This is shown in two scenes: the first is where a childhood friend of Danny’s speaks to him and realises that Danny plans to escape to the belt using a spaceship in a nearby museum; the other is when Danny calls at the library to find that a historical novelist has completed a magazine serial for him, although the writer only had the first part to work from.
When Danny eventually goes to the museum he meets a professor there who takes him inside the ship and shows him around. Danny hides in the museum afterwards and, after everyone has left, he steals the ship. Danny eventually ends up on a planetoid in the Asteroid Belt that was homo sapiens last redoubt, and finds a note in one of the deserted houses that suggests there may be other homo sapien survivors, and one of them may be a woman.
The last page has the various members of homo intelligens discussing Danny’s trip, and it becomes clear that they set it up for him. The story finishes on a reflective note, where the group talk about why they did what they did, and how new races treat old ones:

The two older men watched Larsen and Thorpe leave, and silence and tobacco smoke filled the room. Finally Kenning shrugged and turned to face the professor.
“By now he’s found the note. I wonder if it was a good idea, after all? When I first came across it in that old story, I was thinking of Jack’s preliminary report on Number 67, but now I don’t know; she’s an unknown quantity, at best. Anyhow, I meant it for kindness.”
“Kindness! Kindness to repay with a few million credits and a few thousands of hours of work—plus a lie here and there—for all that we owe the boy’s race!” The professor’s voice was tired, as he dumped the contents of his pipe into a snuffer, and strode over slowly toward the great window that looked out on the night sky. “I wonder sometimes, Bryant, what kindness Neanderthaler found when the last one came to die. Or whether the race that will follow us when the darkness falls on us will have something better than such kindness.”  p. 207

The story’s setup is a bit clunky and artificial, but the ending drags it up a notch. Not bad, but not ‘Best of the Year’ material.

When the Bough Breaks by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore [as by Lewis Padgett] is one of the three stories that Kuttner and/or Moore published in Astounding in 1944, and it’s saying something that this good to very good piece is the weakest of the three, but only just.
The story opens with a young couple and their young child receiving a visit by four small men with big heads. They say they are from the future and have arrived to educate Alexander, who will grow up to become an immortal superman and leader in their time. After this explanation they paralyze the parents and start the process:

Dobish came over, clambered up, and pried Alexander out of his mother’s grip. Horror moved in her eyes.
“We won’t hurt him,” Dobish said. “We just want to give him his first lesson. Have you got the basics, Finn?”
“In the bag.” Finn extracted a foot-long bag from his garments. Things came out of that bag. They came out incredibly. Soon the carpet was littered with stuff—problematical in design, nature, and use. Calderon recognized a tesseract.
The fourth dwarf, whose name, it turned out, was Quat, smiled consolingly at the distressed parents. “You watch. You can’t learn; you’ve not got the potential. You’re homo saps. But Alexander, now—”
Alexander was in one of his moods. He was diabolically gay. With the devil-possession of all babies, he refused to collaborate. He crept rapidly backwards. He burst into loud, squalling sobs. He regarded his feet with amazed joy. He stuffed his fist into his mouth and cried bitterly at the result. He talked about invisible things in a soft, cryptic monotone. He punched Dobish in the eye.
The little men had inexhaustible patience. Two hours later they were through. Calderon couldn’t see that Alexander had learned much.
Bordent twirled the object again. He nodded affably, and led the retreat. The four little men went out of the apartment, and a moment later Calderon and Myra could move.  p. 225

The rest of the story charts Alexander’s development under the tutelage of the four men. He learns to talk, develops telepathic powers, and learns to teleport. He also learns how to teleport others and, at one point, sends his mother to the store for candy. Then he starts giving his parents electric shocks, and starts behaving more malevolently. At this point, Alexander’s father, Calderon, discusses disciplining Alexander with Bordent, the leader of the four, but the latter refuses.
The final section of the story (spoiler) has Alexander playing with a forbidden blue egg. At this point the traumatised and frightened parents vacillate about intervening, even though they suspect the results may be lethal. Alexander completes the egg, and vanishes in a flash of white light.
This latter section is well executed. Not only is the parents’ fear and ambivalent attitude to their son convincingly developed (one wonders to what extent this taps into all parents’ potential or sometime ambivalence about their spawn) but the manner of Alexander’s demise has a subtlety that would be missing in a more explicit attempt on his life by the parents (which is what I expected).
This story has an early 1940’s, Twonky-ish, execution for the most part (e.g. the inclusion of strange little men with big heads) although the subject matter is more Mimsy Were the Borogoves (educational devices transform children into super-beings). However, the ending is darker and more emotionally complicated than in that latter piece, and it has a satisfying, albeit troubling, ending. I almost gave it four stars.

Killdozer! by Theodore Sturgeon3 gets off to (surprisingly, considering its ‘classic’ status) a clunky, data-dump start which tells of an ancient war involving an alien lifeform of “tangible electrons” which ends up trapped on Earth. It would have been better if this had been chopped up into smaller sections and inserted into the narrative. That said, when the story gets going, it has an immersive opening section which portrays a small group of civilian contractors on a Pacific island during WWII, who are there to build a runway for the military. Tom Jaeger is the boss, and one of several clearly drawn individuals in a tale that is much better characterised than any other contemporaneous SF work I can think of. One of the men, Dennis, is the obvious troublemaker of the bunch, and a racist to boot. This latter characteristic comes to the fore in several passages which make the story one of the few of the time which has an obvious, if occasional, anti-racist slant. In the following extract Dennis comments about another man, Rivera, a Puerto Rican mechanic’s assistant:

“Why doesn’t that monkey stick to his grease guns?”
Tom turned and took the chewed end of a match stick out of his mouth. He said nothing, because he had for some time been trying to make a habit of saying nothing to Joe Dennis.
Dennis was an ex-accountant, drafted out of an office at the last gasp of a defunct project in the West Indies. He had become an operator because they needed operators badly. He had been released with alacrity from the office because of his propensity for small office politics. It was a game he still played, and completely aside from his boiled-looking red face and his slightly womanish walk, he was out of place in the field; for boot-licking and back-stabbing accomplish even less out on the field than they do in an office. Tom, trying so hard to keep his mind on his work, had to admit to himself that of all Dennis’ annoying traits the worst was that he was good a pan operator as could be found anywhere, and no one could deny it.
Dennis certainly didn’t.
“I’ve seen the day when anyone catching one of those goonies so much as sitting on a machine during lunch, would kick his fanny,” Dennis groused. “Now they give ’em a man’s work and a man’s pay.”
“Doin’ a man’s work, ain’t he?” Tom said.
“He’s a Puerto Rican!”
Tom turned and looked at him levelly. “Where was it you said you come from,” he mused. “Oh yeah. Georgia.”
“What do you mean by that?”
Tom was already striding away. “Tell you as soon as I have to,” he flung back over his shoulder.  p. 253-254

The action starts when Tom and Rivera go on a recce and come upon a mound where there is an odd looking stone. They move it and find what looks like a wall underneath. Tom guides Riviera in with the bulldozer and, when the wall gives way, the alien energy-being from the prologue escapes from the enclosure and possesses the machine. The bulldozer goes wild, and Riviera is thrown from it, his back broken. After Tom manages to fight the bulldozer to a stop he disables it by emptying the fuel tank before going for help.
When Rivera is finally brought back to base, Tom gets the shocking news that the bulldozer used the petrol starter motor (not its main engine) to move itself to within twenty feet of Rivera before it burnt out.
The next part of the story chronicles the mistrust that arises between the men, some of whom think that Tom attacked Rivera (who subsequently dies). Looming in the background is the bulldozer, which Chub the mechanic has started repairing. Even though Tom orders that no-one is to start the machine apart from him, Dennis does so once it is fixed. The final third of the story then tells of the alien-possessed machine’s killing spree, and the men’s attempt to destroy it.
This is a pretty good adventure story, but my four star rating is more for the character driven first two-thirds than the more straightforward (and perhaps overlong) action of the finale.

No Woman Born by C. L. Moore opens with narrator James Harris visiting Deirdre and Maltzer: Deirdre is a superstar actress who, after an accident, has had her brain put into a robot body designed by Maltzer.
During this first part, Harris sees her for the first time, and later sees how her body, although quite different from the original, conveys her essence:

The first impression that his eyes and mind took from sight of her was shocked and incredulous, for his brain said to him unbelievingly, “This is Deirdre! She hasn’t changed at all!
Then the shift of perspective took over, and even more shockingly, eye and brain said, “No, not Deirdre—not human. Nothing but metal coils. Not Deirdre at all—” And that was the worst. It was like waking from a dream of someone beloved and lost, and facing anew, after that heartbreaking reassurance of sleep, the inflexible fact that nothing can bring the lost to life again. Deirdre was gone, and this was only machinery heaped in a flowered chair.
Then the machinery moved, exquisitely, smoothly, with a grace as familiar as the swaying form he remembered. The sweet, husky voice of Deirdre said, “It’s me, John darling. It really is, you know.”  p. 325

Then she put her featureless helmeted head a little to one side, and he heard her laughter as familiar in its small, throaty, intimate sound as he had ever heard it from her living throat. And every gesture, every attitude, every flowing of motion into motion was so utterly Deirdre that the overwhelming illusion swept his mind again and this was the flesh-and-blood woman as clearly as if he saw her standing there whole once more, like Phoenix from the fire.  p. 329

Deirdre and Harris talk at length, and their conversation concludes with her announcement that, rather than hide away from humanity as Maltzer would like, she is going to do a surprise performance that evening. Maltzer, however, has concerns about her mental state, and notes that any performance may be affected by the fact that she only has two of five senses, sight and hearing. However, when Deirdre later performs, she is a huge success.
Afterwards, Meltzer shows signs of increasing agitation, and determines to make Deirdre stop performing. Harris disagrees with him, and doesn’t believe that Maltzer would force her, but Maltzer eventually confronts Deirdre, and what he sees as her increasing despair, by threatening to commit suicide. At this point there is a long discussion about Frankenstein’s monster, which ends when she quickly moves to pull Maltzer away from the window ledge he is perched on. She tells him she is not despairing, but is scared that she has become superhuman and may lose touch with the human race.
The last few lines suggest this is indeed the case:

Her voice was soft and familiar in Harris’s ears, the voice Deirdre had spoken and sung with, sweetly enough to enchant a world. But as preoccupation came over her a certain flatness crept into the sound. When she was not listening to her own voice, it did not keep quite to the pitch of trueness. It sounded as if she spoke in a room of brass, and echoes from the walls resounded in the tones that spoke there.
“I wonder,” she repeated, the distant taint of metal already in her voice.  p. 368

This is one of those stories that is quite hard to synopsise as the story is actually quite slight, and most of the (well-written) wordage is used to create mood or images, although there are also various philosophical discussions throughout about what it is to be human, mortal, etc.:

Maltzer says my brain will probably wear out quite normally—except, of course, that I won’t have to worry about looking old!—and when it gets tired and stops, the body I’m in won’t be any longer. The magnetic muscles that hold it into my own shape and motions will let go when the brain lets go, and there’ll be nothing but a . . . a pile of disconnected rings. If they ever assemble it again, it won’t be me.” She hesitated. “I like that, John,” she said, and he felt from behind the mask a searching of his face.
He knew and understood that somber satisfaction. He could not put it into words; neither of them wanted to do that. But he understood. It was the conviction of mortality, in spite of her immortal body. She was not cut off from the rest of her race in the essence of their humanity, for though she wore a body of steel and they perishable flesh, yet she must perish too, and the same fears and faiths still united her to mortals and humans, though she wore the body of Oberon’s inhuman knight. Even in her death she must be unique—dissolution in a shower of tinkling and clashing rings, he thought, and almost envied her the finality and beauty of that particular death—but afterward, oneness with humanity in however much or little awaited them all. So she could feel that this exile in metal was only temporary, in spite of everything.
(And providing, of course, that the mind inside the metal did not veer from its inherited humanity as the years went by. A dweller in a house may impress his personality upon the walls, but subtly the walls too, may impress their own shape upon the ego of the man. Neither of them thought of that, at the time.)  p. 333-334

“I’m not—well, sub-human,” she said [to Maltzer], a faint note of indignation in her voice. “I’ll prove it in a minute, but I want to say something else first. You must promise to wait and listen. There’s a flaw in your argument, and I resent it. I’m not a Frankenstein monster made out of dead flesh. I’m myself—alive. You didn’t create my life, you only preserved it I’m not a robot, with compulsions built into me that I have to obey. I’m free-willed and independent and Maltzer—I’m human.”  p. 359

If you like literary SF you’ll probably like this; if you are more attuned to science fiction with more mechanistic underpinnings then it may find it little more than a well-written melodrama. Maltzer’s fears, which drive the narrative, seem rather confected to be honest, and there is no real explanation given for Deirdre’s superhuman powers (beyond the fact that these just happened during her construction.)
I enjoyed the story while I was in the process of reading it, and it’s certainly impressive in parts, but it seems rather frothy to me—afterwards, I wasn’t quite sure what the story was about, other than the idea, perhaps, that the cyborgisation of a person may rob them, over time, of some of their humanity.4
This anthology has three of the four ‘City’ series stories which Clifford D. Simak published in Astounding in 1944. These, and a handful of other stories (most of the rest of which also appeared in Astounding from 1946-7) would eventually be incorporated, with linking material, into the International Fantasy Award-winning novel City.5

The first of the three stories here is also called City, and has a beginning which will, to those of us who have robot vacuum cleaners and the like, feel quite contemporary:

Gramp Stevens sat in a lawn chair, watching the mower at work, feeling the warm, soft sunshine seep into his bones. The mower reached the edge of the lawn, clucked to itself like a contented hen, made a neat turn and trundled down another swath. The bag holding the clippings bulged.
Suddenly the mower stopped and clicked excitedly. A panel in its side snapped open and a cranelike arm reached out. Grasping steel fingers fished around in the grass, came up triumphantly with a stone clutched tightly, dropped the stone into a small container, disappeared back into the panel again. The lawn mower gurgled, purred on again, following its swath.
Gramp grumbled at it with suspicion.  p. 117

When Gramp’s friend Ole drives by in his car, he stops to talk. During this conversation we find that internal combustion cars are obsolescent, the roads unused, and towns and cities are largely abandoned. Gramps reflects further on these subjects when he later goes for a walk around the deserted neighbourhood:

The years had moved too fast. Years that had brought the family plane and helicopter, leaving the auto to rust in some forgotten place, the unused roads to fall into disrepair. Years that had virtually wiped out the tilling of the soil with the rise of hydroponics. Years that had brought cheap land with the disappearance of the farm as an economic unit, had sent city people scurrying out into the country where each man, for less than the price of a city lot, might own broad acres.
Years that had revolutionized the construction of homes to a point where families simply walked away from their old homes to the new ones that could be bought, custom-made, for less than half the price of a prewar structure and could be changed at small cost, to accommodate need of additional space or just a passing whim.
Gramp sniffed. Houses that could be changed each year, just like one would shift around the furniture. What kind of living was that?
He plodded slowly down the dusty path that was all that remained of what a few years before had been a busy residential street. A street of ghosts, Gramp told himself—of furtive, little ghosts that whispered in the night. Ghosts of playing children, ghosts of upset tricycles and canted coaster wagons. Ghosts of gossiping housewives. Ghosts of shouted greetings. Ghosts of flaming fireplaces and chimneys smoking of a winter night.
Little puffs of dust rose around his feet and whitened the cuffs of his trousers.
There was the old Adams place across the way. Adams had been mighty proud of it, he remembered. Gray field stone front and picture windows. Now the stone was green with creeping moss and the broken windows gaped with ghastly leer. Weeds choked the lawn and blotted out the stoop. An elm tree was pushing its branches against the gable.
Gramp could remember the day Adams had planted that elm tree.
For a moment he stood there in the grass-grown street, feet in the dust, both hands clutching the curve of his cane, eyes closed.
Through the fog of years he heard the cry of playing children, the barking of Conrad’s yapping pooch from down the street. And there was Adams, stripped to the waist, plying the shovel, scooping out the hole, with the elm tree, roots wrapped in burlap, lying on the lawn.
May, 1946. Forty-four years ago. Just after he and Adams had come home from the war together.  p. 141

At that point a young man arrives and starts talking to Gramps. He eventually identifies himself as Adam’s grandson, and he is there to visit the old house.
The next part of the story introduces Webster, who arrives at a city council meeting where there is an argument about burning empty houses to move squatters on and prevent crime. Webster quarrels with the other men, and loses his job, but he ends by giving a speech which says they should be glad the cities are dead, and people and industries dispersed, otherwise humanity would have perished in an atomic war.
After this long (largely talking heads) section, Webster goes to the Bureau for Human Adjustment, where Taylor, the man who interviews him, does more talking about recent changes, and finishes by offering Webster a job.
The rest of the tale (spoiler) concerns a stand-off between the police and Gramps and the squatters. This is resolved when Gramps and the grandson turn up at city hall to reveal that the grandson has bought all the houses that have unpaid taxes. He wants the city charter dissolved, and plans to turn the city into a museum to show people how their ancestors lived.
There are some good parts in this story, such as the material about a transition to a post-capitalist society, but there’s also a lot of speechifying and data-dumping, and the standoff at the end feels rather contrived. A middling start to a major series.

The second in the ‘City’ series is Huddling Place, which takes place over a hundred years later (it opens with a Jerome A. Webster at the funeral of Nelson F. Webster in 2117).6 After this, we get an update on societal conditions:

John J., the first John J., had come after the breakup of the cities, after men had forsaken, once and for all, the twentieth century huddling places, had broken free of the tribal instinct to stick together in one cave or in one clearing against a common foe or a common fear. An instinct that had become outmoded, for there were no fears or foes. Man revolting against the herd instinct economic and social conditions had impressed upon him in ages past. A new security and a new sufficiency had made it possible to break away.
The trend had started back in the twentieth century, more than two hundred years before, when men moved to country homes to get fresh air and elbow room and a graciousness in life that communal existence, in its strictest sense, never had given them.
And here was the end result. A quiet living. A peace that could only come with good things. The sort of life that men had yearned for years to have. A manorial existence, based on old family homes and leisurely acres, with atomics supplying power and robots in place of serfs.  p. 177-178

The story continues with Webster in his study, where he has a virtual teleconference with Juwain, a philosopher friend who lives on Mars. They discuss Webster’s reluctance to visit him there, and also Webster’s son’s upcoming visit to the planet. When Webster later goes to see his son depart at the spaceport he has an agoraphobia attack and, as he tries to get Jenkins to arrange transport home, he is told that his father and grandfather suffered the same condition.
The rest of the story pivots around Webster’s condition. He writes an article pointing out that almost no-one wants to leave home nowadays, then (spoiler) an old acquaintance called Claybourne calls from Mars, and tells Webster, a surgeon, that he is needed to perform an life-saving operation on Juwain. Webster says he can’t come, but Claybourne says that Juwain is on the verge of a philosophical breakthrough that is vital to humanity, and that a ship will come to pick him up.
Webster packs for the trip and tries to control his agoraphobia. After he has been waiting for some time, Jenkins tells him that two men arrived earlier to pick him up earlier, but Jenkins told them that Webster couldn’t possibly go. The story ends with this:

Webster stiffened, felt chill fear gripping at his heart. Hands groping for the edge of the desk, he sat down in the chair, sensed the walls of the room closing in about him, a trap that would never let him go.  p. 191

This tale is mentioned along with Desertion as one of the best of the ‘City’ stories but, although I liked it better than City, I didn’t like it as much as the third tale Census (Astounding, September 1944), which is not included in this volume.

The fourth in the ‘City’ stories is Desertion, and it is set in a station on Jupiter. There, they are transforming men into the native “loper” life form and sending them out onto the surface. The story opens with the chief of the station, Fowler, briefing Allen—the fifth candidate for conversion. Fowler does this against the backdrop of the converter operator, Miss Stanley’s, obvious disapproval (two earlier two-man teams have not returned).
The second half of the story sees Allen also fail to return, at which point Fowler decides to transform and go outside himself, along with his dog Towser. When this happens they find themselves in a wonderland where they can both talk to each other telepathically and, as they stand by an ammonia waterfall, they realise that they can both do much more:

“The music,” said Towser.
“Yes, what about it?”
“The music,” said Towser, “is vibrations. Vibrations of water falling.”
“But, Towser, you don’t know about vibrations.”
“Yes, I do,” contended Towser. “It just popped into my head.”
Fowler gulped mentally. “Just popped!”
And suddenly, within his own head, he held a formula—the formula for a process that would make metal to withstand the pressure of Jupiter.
He stared, astounded, at the waterfall and swiftly his mind took the many colors and placed them in their exact sequence in the spectrum. Just like that. Just out of blue sky. Out of nothing, for he knew nothing either of metals or of colors.
“Towser,” he cried. ‘Towser, something’s happening to us!”
“Yeah, I know,” said Towser.
“It’s our brains,” said Fowler. “We’re using them, all of them, down to the last hidden corner. Using them to figure out things we should have known all the time. Maybe the brains of Earth things naturally are slow and foggy. Maybe we are the morons of the universe. Maybe we are fixed so we have to do things the hard way.”
And, in the new sharp clarity of thought that seemed to grip him, he knew that it would not only be the matter of colors in a waterfall or metals that would resist the pressure of Jupiter, he sensed other things, things not yet quite clear.
A vague whispering that hinted of greater things, of mysteries beyond the pale of human thought, beyond even the pale of human imagination. Mysteries, fact, logic built on reasoning. Things that any brain should know if it used all its reasoning power.
“We’re still mostly Earth,” he said. “We’re just beginning to learn a few of the things we are to know—a few of the things that were kept from us as human beings, perhaps because we were human beings. Because our human bodies were poor bodies. Poorly equipped for thinking, poorly equipped in certain senses that one has to have to know. Perhaps even lacking in certain senses that are necessary to true knowledge.”
He stared back at the dome, a tiny black thing dwarfed by the distance.
Back there were men who couldn’t see the beauty that was Jupiter. Men who thought that swirling clouds and lashing rain obscured the face of the planet. Unseeing human eyes. Poor eyes. Eyes that could not see the beauty in the clouds, that could not see through the storms. Bodies that could not feel the thrill of trilling music stemming from the rush of broken water.
Men who walked alone, in terrible loneliness, talking with their tongue like Boy Scouts wigwagging out their messages, unable to reach out and touch one another’s mind as he could reach out and touch Towser’s mind. Shut off forever from that personal, intimate contact with other living things.

After these epiphanies, both Fowler and Towser are reluctant to return to the dome and devolve back to man and dog. This sets up the memorable closing lines of the story:

“I can’t go back,” said Towser.
“Nor I,” said Fowler.
“They would turn me back into a dog,” said Towser.
“And me,” said Fowler, “back into a man.”  p. 220

This truly classic story provided me with a massive sense-of-wonder hit when I was twelve or so, and it still holds up pretty well today (although the idea of a dog with fleas on a planetary station probably needs updating).
I note that this story, and the previous tale Census (not included here), both have an elegiac feel—at this stage in the series we are at a point where humanity and its civilization is dying. Both these pieces are, I would suggest, anti-Galactic Empire stories: rather than mankind spreading out through the universe and subjugating it to its will, it is quietly fading away.7

Apart from City above, the other stories I’ve already reviewed are pasted in below.

Far Centaurus by A. E. van Vogt gets off to a rather good start (even if it does lash about like a broken-backed snake later on) with Bill waking up from deep sleep on a starship. After an extended period of rehabilitation (the automated massage lasts for almost an hour), he notes the time:

I leaned over the control chair, and glanced at the chronometer.
It said: 53 years, 7 months, 2 weeks, 0 days, 0 hours and 27 minutes.
Fifty-three years! A little blindly, almost blankly: Back on Earth, the people we had known, the young men we’d gone to college with, that girl who had kissed me at the party given us the night we left—they were all dead. Or dying of old age.
I remembered the girl very vividly. She was pretty, vivacious, a complete stranger. She had laughed as she offered her red lips, and she had said “A kiss for the ugly one, too.” She’d be a grandmother now, or in her grave.
Tears came to my eyes. I brushed them away, and began to heat the can of concentrated liquid that was to be my first food. Slowly, my mind calmed.  p. 69

Bill then gets up and performs some routine tasks, during which he finds Pelham, one of the other three crewmembers, dead (the drug they take has a death rate of ten per cent). He checks on the other men, then suits up and disposes of Pelham’s body. Bill notes these events in the log, and then goes back to sleep.
The rest of the first third of so of the story details Bill’s waking periods on the long journey to Alpha Centauri: during one such episode he sees a spaceship on fire behind them; in another he reads a written note from Blake—the men take turns waking— about the third man’s, Renfrew’s, mental stability.
Eventually they arrive at Alpha Centauri, and (spoiler) the story becomes something else entirely when they are greeted by a future human civilization. It turns out that, after the four men left, humanity designed faster ships which arrived long before they did and colonised the system. The ambassador responsible for dealing with the men welcomes them, and tells them they have been financially provided for (there is money in the bank). He also notes that, as they smell particularly unpleasant to current day humans, his people would appreciate it if they could keep to themselves.
We later get a science lecture about star travel before Renfrew (now cured of his madness) buys a spaceship, whereupon they all leave. Renfrew later flies them into a star which, because of the future science gimmick, sends them back in time to just after they departed from Earth.
The first part of this is a good account of life on a suspended animation starship, but the rest does not convince or gel.

Deadline by Cleve Cartmill has a Seilla (Allies) spy called Ybor Sebrof (Roby Forbes) dropped into Sixa (Axis)8 territory:

All he had to do was to penetrate into the stronghold of the enemy, find Dr. Sitruc, kill him, and destroy the most devastating weapon of history.  p. 155

After landing Roby kills some enemy soldiers, and then encounters a young woman who has been following him. She turns out to be the director of the underground (what are the chances?), and pulls a gun on him as she thinks he is a Sixa agent.
Up to this point the story, a fast moving pulp, isn’t that bad, but it is shamefully padded from then on (Roby’s imprisoned; the woman and her henchman threaten to torture him when he won’t reveal his mission; they send for someone to identify him; an enemy patrol comes to the house; the messenger returns with news that the person that could identify him is dead, yada, yada, yada).
Eventually, Roby escapes and manages to get a patrol of enemy soldiers to take him to see Dr Sitruc, the inventor of the super-weapon. Cartmill finally gets to the point of the story, which is pasting in the atomic technology description he had received from John Campbell:

Now U-235 can raise the temperature of local matter to where it will, uh, ‘burn’, and give off energy. So let’s say we set off a little pinch of U-235. Surrounding matter also explodes, as it is raised to an almost inconceivable temperature. It cools rapidly; within perhaps one-hundred-millionth of a second, it is down below the point of ignition. Then maybe before it’s down to one million degrees hot, and a minute or so may elapse before it is visible in the normal sense. Now that visible radiation will represent no more than one-hundred-thousandth of the total radiation at one million degrees—but even so, it would be several hundred times more brilliant than the sun. Right?”
Dr. Sitruc nodded. [Roby] thought there was a touch of deference in his nod.
“That’s pretty much the temperature cycle of a U-235 plus surrounding matter explosion, Dr. Sitruc. I’m oversimplifying, I guess, but we don’t need to go into detail. Now that radiation pressure is the stuff that’s potent. The sheer momentum, physical pressure of light from the stuff at one million degrees, would amount to tons and tons and tons of pressure. It would blow down buildings like a titanic wind if it weren’t for the fact that absorption of such appalling energy would volatilize the buildings before they could move out of the way. Right?” Dr. Sitruc nodded again. He almost smiled.
“All right,” [Roby] went on. He now entered the phase of this contest where he was guessing, and he’d get no second guess. “What we need is a damper, something to hold the temperature of surrounding matter down. In that way, we can limit the effect of the explosion to desired areas, and prevent it from destroying cities on the opposite side of Cathor. The method of applying the damper depends on the exact mechanical structure of the bomb itself.  pp. 173-174

He stopped before the bomb, looked down at it. He nodded, ponderously. “I see,” he said, remembering Sworb’s drawings and the careful explanations he had received. “Two cast-iron hemispheres, clamped over the orange segments of cadmium alloy. And the fuse—I see it is in—a tiny can of cadmium alloy containing a speck of radium in a beryllium holder and a small explosive powerful enough to shatter the cadmium walls. Then—correct me if I’m wrong, will you?—the powdered uranium oxide runs together in the central cavity. The radium shoots neutrons into this mass—and the U-235 takes over from there. Right?  p. 174

—That’s not Roby talking to Sitruc there, that’s Campbell pitching to the Los Alamos/Manhattan Project scientists.
Roby eventually manages to overcome Dr Sitruc and kill him (he grabs Sitruc’s gun with his tail—the story is supposedly set on an alien planet, although there is very little detail) and then walks out with the bomb (because, of course, the chief enemy scientist would interrogate an agent in the room that houses the weapon, wouldn’t he?) Roby gets picked up by an allied plane, and during the flight back they dismantle and scatter the bomb.
This is a pretty awful story but, when it was published, the detailed discussion of atomic bomb technology came to the attention of the authorities (security officers at Los Alamos overheard a group of scientists discussing the story in a copy of Astounding), and an agent visited both Campbell and Cartmill. There has been a lot of commentary about this incident over the years, mostly celebratory9 (SF fans of the time craved serious attention—something that is still true today), but the episode seems irresponsible to me, and could have had serious repercussions.
I suspect that, If it wasn’t for the interest of the authorities, the story, and Cartmill, would be long forgotten.

Sanity by Fritz Leiber is a talking-heads story which opens with World Manager Carrsbury speaking to General Secretary Phy in his office. He explains that he has come to a realisation:

Whether my case was due chiefly to heredity, or to certain unusual accidents of environment, or to both, is unimportant. The point is that a person had been born who was in a position to criticize the present state of mankind in the light of the past, to diagnose its condition, and to begin its cure.
For a long time I refused to face the facts, but finally my researches—especially those in the literature of the twentieth century—left me no alternative. The mentality of mankind had become—aberrant.  p. 163

He goes on to explain to Phy that his analysis led him to train a cadre of political leaders “free of neurotic tendencies”, and that he set up a secret police force to protect himself. Phy counters with a vacuous grin, and the statement that the semi-solid material he has been kneading while listening to Carrsbury came from a hole he cut in his sofa.
Phy, though, isn’t as mad as he sounds: he goes on to tell Carrsbury that (spoiler) his attempts to reduce the amount of insanity in the world have been subverted. Phy becomes demonstrative, and one of Carrsbury’s security guards appears. As Carrsbury leaves for an appointment, Phy asks to accompany him, and the three of them end up in an elevator. There, the tables are further turned:

“Do you know how many floors there are in this building?”
Carrsbury was not immediately conscious of the new note in Phy’s voice, but he reacted to it.
“One hundred,” he replied promptly.
“Then,” asked Phy, “just where are we?”
Carr opened his eyes to the darkness. One hundred twenty-seven, blinked the floor numeral. One hundred twenty-eight. One hundred twenty-nine. Something cold dragged at Carrsbury’s stomach, pulled at his brain. He felt as if his mind were being slowly and irresistibly twisted. He thought of hidden dimensions, of unsuspected holes in space. Something remembered from elementary physics danced through his thoughts: If it were possible for an elevator to keep moving upward with uniform acceleration, no one inside an elevator could determine whether the effects they were experiencing were due to acceleration or to gravity—whether the elevator were standing motionless on some planet or shooting up at ever-increasing velocity through free space.
One hundred forty-one. One hundred forty-two.
“Or as if you were rising through consciousness into an unsuspected realm of mentality lying above,” suggested Phy in his new voice, with its hint of gentle laughter.  p. 170

They eventually arrive at a transparent section of the building that Carrsbury did not know existed. They wait for an aircraft to come and pick Carrsbury up. Phy explains that the only reason that Carrsbury was allowed to do what he wanted was so he could express himself, like everyone in the world, but that now that must stop.
After Carrsbury leaves, Phy turns to the guard and delivers the story’s neat closing line:

“I’m glad to see the last of that fellow,” [Phy] muttered, more to himself than to [the guard], as they plummeted toward the roof, “He was beginning to have a very disturbing influence on me. In fact, I was beginning to fear for my”—his expression became suddenly vacuous—“sanity.”  p. 173

I’m not sure this makes much sense as a story to be honest, but its paranoid feel, the switch-around, and the biter-bit ending work well enough.

Invariant by John R. Pierce is an okay piece about Homer Green, whose experimental immortality treatment has (spoiler) left him with memories that are as “invariant” as the other cells in his body. This becomes apparent during an interview conducted by a man from 2170, who tells Green (spoiler) that it isn’t 1943 anymore—even though he will shortly forget that information.

Arena by Fredric Brown opens with Carson, a scout ship pilot, engaging an alien Outsider warship beyond the orbit of Pluto—he then wakes up naked, lying on blue sand under a blue dome, and notices a red spherical object in the distance.
Carson hears a disembodied voice which says that the speaker, an alien super-being, chanced upon the human and the Outsider fleets about to destroy each other. Rather than allowing this mutual destruction to occur (neither the human race or Outsiders would win outright, and both races would be left crippled), the super-being decrees that Carson and an Outsider (the red sphere) will engage in single combat: the loser’s race will be annihilated, leaving the victor unscathed.
The rest of the story tells of the fight between the Carson and the Outsider, which starts when the “Roller” moves towards him but is stopped by a force field. The pair throw rocks at each other for a while, and then the Outsider lobs a decapitated blue lizard which it caught and killed.
The events of the rest of the story unfold against Carson’s increasing thirst and weakness, and involve his unsuccessful attempt at negotiating peace (Carson can sense the Outsider’s malevolent emotions in response), and experiments to see what will pass through the force field. Eventually, Carson passes out, but comes round when one of the lizards in the dome approaches him:

“Hello,” said the voice.
It was a small, thin voice. It sounded like—
He opened his eyes and turned his head. It was a lizard.
“Go away,” Carson wanted to say. “Go away; you’re not really there, or you’re there but not really talking. I’m imagining things again.”
But he couldn’t talk; his throat and tongue were past all speech with the dryness. He closed his eyes again.
“Hurt,” said the voice. “Kill. Hurt—kill. Come.”
He opened his eyes again. The blue ten-legged lizard was still there.
It ran a little way along the barrier, came back, started off again, and came back.
“Hurt,” it said. “Kill. Come.”
Again it started off, and came back. Obviously it wanted Carson to follow it along the barrier.
He closed his eyes again. The voice kept on. The same three meaningless words. Each time he opened his eyes, it ran off and came back.
“Hurt. Kill. Come.”
Carson groaned. There would be no peace unless he followed the blasted thing. Like it wanted him to.
He followed it, crawling. Another sound, a high-pitched squealing, came to his ears and grew louder.
There was something lying in the sand, writhing, squealing. Something small, blue, that looked like a lizard and yet didn’t—
Then he saw what it was—the lizard whose legs the Roller had pulled off, so long ago. But it wasn’t dead; it had come back to life and was wriggling and screaming in agony.
“Hurt,” said the other lizard. “Hurt. Kill. Kill.”
Carson understood. He took the flint knife from his belt and killed the tortured creature. The live lizard scurried off quickly.  p. 89-90

Carson (spoiler) then has an epiphany about the nature of the force-field, which leads directly to the climactic events of the story where he renders himself temporarily unconscious to get through the force field.
This is an inventive and entertaining story, and is much better than the later Star Trek episode (which made Brown’s story more famous today than it might otherwise have been).10

The Introduction, by Martin H. Greenberg, is mostly a list of war news, but also covers other sporting, cultural, etc., events. He has this to say about the SF field:

In the real world it was another good year, despite the preoccupations of the war and the death of Captain Future [magazine] in the Spring.
Wondrous things were happening: Olaf Stapledon published Sirius. Renaissance by Raymond F. Jones and The Riddle of the Tower by J. D. Beresford and Esme Wynne-Tyson appeared as did World’s Beginning by Robert Ardrey, who would later achieve fame in another field. The Lady and the Monster, one of several film versions of Curt Siodmak’s Donovan’s Brain, was released. And an Australian sailor named A. Bertram Chandler made his maiden voyage into reality in May with “This Means War.”
And distant wings were beating as P. J. Plauger, James Sallis, Bruce Pennington, Stanley Schmidt, George Lucas, Katherine Kurtz, Vemor Vinge, Jack Chalker, David Gerrold, Peter Weston, and Vance Aandahl were born. Let us travel back to that honored year of 1944 and enjoy the best stories that the real world bequeathed to us.  p. 11

There are also the usual Story introductions by both Martin H. Greenberg and Isaac Asimov. There are a number of interesting comments, and it’s worth reading all of the story introductions (click on the images above for higher resolution ones that are easier to read).
In particular, there is this about Asimov and Greenberg’s selection process:

The way these books are put together is that Marty and I begin by discussing possible stories. Marty then gets about twice as many as we can include and sends me the Xeroxes. I read them all and mark them OK, ?, or X. The first group are in, the third group are out, and the middle group are worth further discussion.  p. 110

In conclusion, this is an anthology that is worth getting for the Brackett, Brown, Simak, Kuttner & Moore, Sturgeon, and Moore stories. I note in passing that the Brackett, Sturgeon and Moore stories show distinct signs of a more literary form of SF (one that will have more imagery, emotion, characterisation, style, etc.), something that I’ve not seen much of in earlier stories. Simak’s series offers a different philosophical path for SF.
Some of the other pieces are good enough if not outstanding, but I don’t know what the van Vogt, Cartmill, Pierce or the first of the Simak’s are doing here. I also don’t understand how Moore & Kuttner’s The Children’s Hour is missing. In my opinion, it’s the best of their three Astounding stories, and I would have included all three of them in this volume.11  ●

_____________________

1. Tom Easton’s review of this volume is a general one (although he does note that it is the year of his birth). He finishes with:

It was a good year for stories, too. Asimov and Martin Greenberg were able to pick several installments of Simak’s City, plus stories by van Vogt, Brackett, Leiber, Sturgeon (“Killdozer”), del Rey, and more. Perhaps most notable of all, though not for literary quality, was the story that gave Astounding’s reputation for prophecy its greatest boost—Cleve Gartmill’s “Deadline”; that one brought U.S. intelligence agents into Campbell’s office, asking, “Who leaked? Who told you how an A-bomb works?” You’ve heard the tale, I’m sure; it’s really better than the story itself.

If you go to the 1945 Retro Hugo Awards page above you can also find links to individual reviews of 1944 stories in the “SF” and “RR” columns of the table provided.

2. Brackett says in her Tangent Online interview that she stopped submitting stories to Campbell after a “vicious” rejection. She adds later on:

One big trouble I had trying to sell to Campbell was of course the fact that I did not have any great scientific or engineering background. And this is one thing he insisted on in his stories, and I admit uh, Ed had a great background in physics and electrical engineering that I didn’t have, and I tried to make up for it by writing a new type of story. But it was just not Campbell’s type of story.

I’m not sure the comment about Campbell insisting on “scientific or engineering background” is quite true. I’m not sure that The Children’s Hour has one, and I could probably list several other examples.

3. Paul Williams provides extensive story notes for Killdozer! at the back of Killdozer!, Volume III: The Complete Stories of Theodore Sturgeon (North Atlantic Books, 1996). Here are some brief extracts:

In terms of money and acclaim, it was arguably the most successful story of the first decade of his career. And in Sturgeon’s own telling of his life story, it punctuates his longest bout of “writer’s block,” usually described by him (in interviews, and in the foreword to his 1971 collection Sturgeon Is Alive and Well . . .) as lasting for six years, 1940 to 1946, with “Killdozer!” a solitary interruption in the middle, 1943.
Close examination of documentary evidence, primarily copies of letters to and from Sturgeon during and after this period, allows a more accurate dating. He did continue to write as long as he was still in New York, which he left (in order to manage his uncle’s hotel at Treasure Beach on the island of Jamaica) on June 28, 1941. Although he and his wife expected that the hotel job and change of scene would make it easier for him to go on writing fiction, he did not do any writing until April of 1944, on St. Croix in the Virgin Islands, when he wrote a (probably mainstream, i.e. not aimed at the science fiction or fantasy market) short story propagandizing in favor of the much misunderstood Nisei, or American-born Japs. (Italicized phrases are quotes from Sturgeon, in this case from a letter writen to his mother on May 8, 1944.) This story immediately went to a new agent, Nannine Joseph, who was unable to sell it; the manuscript does not survive among Sturgeon’s papers.
The first week of May, 1944, while still completing “the Nisei story,” [a mainstream story written in St. Croix in the Virgin Islands] TS began “Killdozer!”, which he wrote in nine days and immediately sent to [John Campbell]. From a letter to his mother, Christine Hamilton Sturgeon, July 8, 1944: “When we were right at the end of the rope, in comes a check and a letter from Jack Campbell. The check was a godsend, but the letter is something that I’ll treasure for the rest of my life. I must have sold him thirty-five or forty stories and never have I had such a missive from him. ‘I don’t know how I can place it or when I’ll be able to use it, but there, my friend, you have a hunk of story. I’m giving you our highest rate, which brings the check to $542.50. I’m glad you’re back in the field, and if you have any more with anything like this level of tenseness, send ’em along. I want ’em.’ ”
[ . . . ]
How Ted became a ’dozer driver (abbreviated from a conversation between TS and Paul Williams, December 6, 1975): “So while we were in Jamaica, along came December the 7th, and Pearl Harbor, and here we were at the hotel, ninety miles away from Kingston, with gasoline supplies cut off and no chance of getting any guests out there at all. The Americans started building a very large base at Fort Simonds, and we went down there and applied for jobs. I ended up on the Jamaican payroll, handling mess halls and barracks, and a food warehouse. And finally a man came along, clearing up ground around the housing area, and driving a bulldozer. And I fell in love with that machine. So he let me get up on it, and I learned an awful lot. Then I was transferred from quarters and barracks to a gasoline station. We serviced all kinds of equipment, and I got to know some of the American operators, and finally I got hired as a bulldozer operator. I was making more money than I’d ever seen in my life. Then when the base began to fold up, a guy came around recruiting for another job, in Puerto Rico at a place called Ensenada Honda, where they were building an enormous shipfitting plant, and a dry dock, and a landing field. And ultimately we moved over to St. Croix and I settled down to write.” Sturgeon worked in Puerto Rico as a bulldozer operator from August ’42 to December ’43, after which he worked for the Navy for a few months as a supply clerk and cost analyst. In April he and Dorothe and their two daughters moved to St. Croix.
[. . .]
In a letter to his father, Edward Waldo, Feb. 27, 1946, he further reported: “[. . .]the editor thought so well of it that he cancelled his production schedule and had it in print within weeks, as the lead novel in his magazine, with a cover illustration. (The original oil painting for that cover now hangs in my living room.) The magazine hit the stands just as I arrived back in the States, and apparently caused quite a stir in the science-fiction crowd.
[. . .]
Crown Publishing Co. released a new anthology of science-fiction last week. [The Best of Science Fiction.] A month ago, an advance copy was read by a science editor out in California who, on seeing KILLDOZER leading its section in the book, wrote me and asked me if I would take on this series of juveniles.” [. . .] And Crown has just sent me a check for $155 for the reprint rights! In other words, what seemed like a mere temporary alleviation of my circumstances down in St. Croix and nothing more, has proved to be the focal point of a whole series of fine breaks.”

The notes also include information about the 1974 TV movie made from the story, and details about a revised version of the story* used in a later Sturgeon collection Aliens 4:

Sept. 23, 1958, Sturgeon wrote his agent: I would like to correct galleys on the collection called KILLDOZER. One reason . . . has to do with the title story, which has been talked about for films ever since it was written. It is a World War II story and needn’t be; a very little invisible mending will take care of that. It also needs a touch here and there in characterization and dialogue—for example, Street & Smith’s editing “damn” into “care” every time they saw it, so that your bulldozer operators keep saying “I don’t give a care . . .” and one or two other small repairs.
So Sturgeon did rewrite the last eight paragraphs.

* The updated version of Killdozer! is unhelpfully listed as a separate story by ISFDB: Killdozer! (revised).

4. I found it difficult to rate Moore’s story: going in knowing it was a ‘classic’ left me a little underwhelmed; if I’d stumbled across it myself I’d probably have raved about it.

5. The ‘City’ series at ISFDB. Only the eighth and last story The Simple Way (Fantastic Adventures, January 1951) didn’t appear in Astounding.

6. ‘Gramp’ Stevens died in 1999, so City must take place before that; Huddling Place opens with Nelson Wester’s funeral, and the plate on his crypt reads “2034-2117”.

7. As well as Desertion being an anti-Galactic Empire story, it is another one which does not fit into the supposed human primacy/exceptionalism rule said to exist in Campbell’s Astounding.

8. If I hadn’t seen elsewhere mention of the reverse anagrams in Cartmill’s Deadline, I don’t think I’d have noticed.

9. A typical example of positive coverage of Cartmill’s story is Alva Rogers’ account in A Requiem for Astounding:

Perhaps the most sensational story of the year was “Deadline,” a novelette in the March issue by Cleve Cartmill. This story was not sensational literarily, but literally.
[. . .]
[It excited] certain persons in government circles into action with ludicrous results. Campbell has published his version of the affaire Deadline, and I think it might be interesting to hear Cartmill’s. In a personal latter, he had this to say:
.
“Deadline,” that stinker, came about when John Campbell or I suggested to one or the other that I do a yarn about an atomic bomb. I’m not sure we called it that in our correspondence—we were thinking in terms of U-235 and critical mass. Our correspondence took place in early August, 1943. My file shows that I mailed it to Astounding Sept. 8, received the check Sept. 20. John wasn’t too happy with the story, but he knew I was hungry.
He published it early in March, 1944 and a week or two later a Brooks-Brothered young man from Military Intelligence came to see me at my home in Manhattan Beach. We spent about five or six hours together, mostly in my answering questions. I had the file of Cartmill-Campbell correspondence about the story, and he borrowed this for copying. Upshot: I was in the clear, but violated personal security which every American should etc., etc., etc. Just how I violated any kind of security wasn’t clear then; all the facts contained in the story were matters of public record.
What they were afraid of was that I—or John—had had access one way or another to information supposedly confined to the Manhattan Project: The similarity of names: Manhattan—Manhattan Beach were purely coincidental and half a continent apart.
They also put John through the question mill. He told me at our first meeting—Westercon, LA—some fifteen years after that they had tried to extract a promise that he would publish nothing more concerning nuclear fission and he told them to go fly their atoms.
Well, the various stories released in later years had everything from the FBI to foreign spies in the act. But I saw of Mata Hari(s) neither hide nor hari, damnit. (November 19, 1961)
.
Campbell was immensely pleased by the furor the story created in Washington. It was proof positive that science fiction, particularly the Astounding brand, was important enough to warrant serious scrutiny by learned heads in the government, and by inference from this fact, by others in the scientific community. No longer did science fiction deal with childish and improbable Buck Rogers adventures, but dealt instead, in many instances, with serious scientific problems. And most fans felt pretty much the same pride in their favorite form of literature when the facts concerning “Deadline” and Astounding’s involvement with atomic bomb security became known. For a while it was a devastating weapon used in refuting any sneering aspersions cast at science fiction by its critics.  p. 132-133

There is an extensive (and much less flattering) account of the incident in Alec Nevala-Lee’s Astounding (Harper-Collins, 2018). Here are a couple of extracts to give you an idea:

[Campbell] had long suspected that the government was working on an atomic bomb. His earliest stories in college had revolved around the discovery of nuclear power, but when the moment finally came, it found him on the outside looking in. If he had graduated from MIT a few years later, he might conceivably have been part of the effort, but instead, he was just an “organized fan.”
It led him to break his one rule. He had said that Astounding would refrain from publishing anything that might reveal secrets of national defense, and now he was deliberately printing a story with blatant parallels to the most important military project of all time. Campbell made no effort to clear it with the censors, as he had for similar works. It was an act of recklessness that exceeded anything that Hubbard ever did—but it was also the only bomb that he could detonate.
And its impact was felt at once. The Manhattan Project counted many science fiction fans among its workers, and word of the story rapidly spread, until employees were talking about it openly in the cafeteria of the atomic weapons lab in New Mexico. Cartmill’s device bore minimal resemblance to the designs under development, but it didn’t matter. Edward Teller, who would later be known as the father of the hydrogen bomb, recalled that the reaction at Los Alamos was “astonishment.”
But it made its most significant impression on a man who wasn’t a scientist at all. He was a security officer. As the others discussed the story over lunch, he listened quietly—and he took notes. If Campbell had wanted attention, he was about to succeed beyond his wildest expectations.

On March 8, 1944, a month after “Deadline” appeared, Agent Arthur E. Riley went to interview Campbell at the Chanin Building at 122 East Forty-Second Street, where the magazine had recently relocated. It was exactly the sort of reaction that the editor had hoped to provoke. The story wouldn’t have received nearly the same degree of interest if he had simply submitted it to the censorship office, and he seemed flattered by the inquiry, answering the agent’s questions as cheerfully as if he were auditioning for a role on the Manhattan Project itself.
Campbell took full responsibility, saying that he had written to Cartmill—who had “no technical knowledge whatever”—with the idea. Riley wrote in his report, “The subject of atomic disintegration was not novel to [Campbell], since he had pursued a course in atomic physics at Massachusetts Institute of Technology in 1933.” As an editor with a scientifically literate audience, Campbell added, he often drew on published sources and the work of his “technically minded intimates and associates.” He showed Riley a copy of a journal that talked about nuclear fission, and he even described the story line of “Solution Unsatisfactory.”
If he was hoping to make a favorable impression, he wasn’t entirely successful. Riley reported that Campbell was “somewhat of an egotist,” a judgment confirmed when the editor stated grandly, but not inaccurately, “I am Astounding Science Fiction.” Campbell also provided Cartmill’s address and offered to suppress the magazine’s Swedish edition, which seemed the one most likely to fall into German hands—and in fact, Wernher von Braun, the head of the Nazi rocket program, was allegedly obtaining it using a false name and a mail drop in Sweden, although there was no way that either man could have known this at the time.

These extracts come from the last part of Chapter Eight and the beginning of Chapter Nine

10. The Arena episode of Star Trek was written before the discovery of Brown’s story—probably why it is so naff. The Wikipedia page for that episode is here.

11. If you want a better idea of how this book measures up against what I might pick for a 1944 ‘Year’s Best’, look at the table below.
The first to fourth column give the story titles, authors, lengths (L) and place of publication (P), see below the table for the abbreviation legend.
The ‘G’ column lists Asimov and Greenberg’s choices with an ‘x’.
The ‘H’ column shows the story’s 1944 Retro Hugo award placing (not yet awarded).
The ‘C’ column shows how many of the anthologies and/or polls used in the Classics of Science Fiction list included the story in their collections (note that this list is SF only and skews against fantasy)—minus the anthology or award citations which have their own column (e.g., Greenberg/Asimov in this case).
The ‘O’ column shows inclusions in other major anthologies which are not on the Classic of SF list. These are worked out by me (usually to include Fantasy Retrospectives that CoSF don’t include) and I have not yet looked into this for some/all of the stories.
The ‘S’ column shows my likely choices for a ‘Best of the Year’ with an ‘x’. A dash means read but not included. Blank means unread.
The ‘T’ column shows the total points that each story gets (they get a point for being in each column and for each of the CoSF and other anthology inclusions).
The table is initially sorted so the stories with the highest total are at the top. A good way to efficiently read the year’s short fiction may be to start at the top and work down until you get to the end of the 2-point stories, but bear in mind this is all statistically invalid. Enjoy (and if you want to find copies of the stories online, and/or read more of the fiction of 1944, use the table on the 1945 Retro Hugo page).

Best Science Fiction and Fantasy Stories 1944

Title Author L P G H C O S T
 Far Centaurus A. E. van Vogt ss AST, Jan x - 1
Deadline Cleve Cartmill nv AST, Mar x 2 - 2
The Veil of Astellar Leigh Brackett nv TWS, Spr x x 2
Sanity Fritz Leiber ss AST, Apr x 2 - 3
Invariant John R. Pierce ss AST, Apr x - 1
City Clifford D. Simak nv AST, May x 1 - 2
Arena Fredric Brown nv AST, Jun x 10 x 12
Huddling Place Clifford D. Simak ss AST, Jul x 3 - 4
Kindness Lester del Rey ss AST, Oct x 1 - 2
Desertion Clifford D. Simak ss AST, Nov x 9 x 11
When the Bough Breaks Henry Kuttner & C. L. Moore nv AST, Nov x x 2
When the Bough Breaks C. L. Moore & Henry Kuttner nv AST, Nov x x 2
Killdozer! Theodore Sturgeon na AST, Dec x 3 x 5
No Woman Born C. L. Moore na AST, Dec x 6 x 8
As Never Was P. Schuyler Miller ss AST, Jan 2 - 2
The Children's Hour Henry Kuttner & C. L. Moore nv AST, Mar 2 x 3
The Children's Hour Henry Kuttner & C. L. Moore nv AST, Mar 2 x 3
Environment Chester S. Geier ss AST, May 2 - 2
And the Gods Laughed Fredric Brown ss PLA, Spr 1 1
Culture Jerry Shelton ss AST, Sep 1 1
Juggernaut A. E. van Vogt ss AST, Aug 1 1
Lobby Clifford D. Simak ss AST, Aug 1 1
Plague Murray Leinster nv AST, Feb 1 - 1
Tricky Tonnage Malcolm Jameson ss AST, Dec 1 1
Ogre Clifford D. Simak nv AST, Jan x 1
Census Clifford D. Simak nv AST, Sep x 1
Title Author L P G H C O S T

na=novella, nv=novelet, ss=short story

AST=Astounding; PLA=Planet Stories, TWS=Thrilling Wonder Stories.  ●

rssrss

Astounding Science-Fiction v33n01, March 1944

Summary:
The highlight of this issue is “Lawrence O’Donnell’s” (C. L. Moore & Henry Kuttner’s) The Children’s Hour, an excellent piece about a soldier’s relationship with a woman called Clarissa, and why his memories of her are hidden behind a hypnotic lock. This is one of the best stories of theirs I’ve read.
The other contributions are a much weaker bunch, and include Deadline by Cleve Cartmill, a poor piece but one which famously precipitated a counter-intelligence agent’s visit to Street & Smith’s offices due to the story’s discussion of atomic bomb technology. There is also an ‘Artur Blord’ story from E. Mayne Hull, and work from A. E. van Vogt, Eric Frank Russell, and a pseudonymous George O. Smith.
The interior abstract artwork by A. Williams for the O’Donnell story is noteworthy.
[ISFDB] [Archive.org]

Other reviews:1
Alva Rogers, A Requiem for Astounding  p. 129-134

_____________________

Editor, John W. Campbell Jr.; Assistant Editor, Catherine Tarrant

Fiction:
The Contract • novelette by E. Mayne Hull ∗∗
The Rulers • short story by A. E. van Vogt 
Circle of Confusion • novelette by George O. Smith [as by Wesley Long] 
Controller • novelette by Eric Frank Russell 
The Children’s Hour • novelette by C. L. Moore and Henry Kuttner [as by Lawrence O’Donnell] +
Deadline • novelette by Cleve Cartmill 

Non-fiction:
Cover • by William Timmins
Interior artwork • by Paul Orban (x8), A. Williams (x11)
Meters • editorial by John W. Campbell, Jr.
In Times to Come
Counting Five Million a Second
 • science essay
The Vanishing Yankee • science essay by George O. Smith
The Analytical Laboratory: January 1944
“C” Frozen at 186272 • science essay by R. S. Richardson
Stellar Echo Ranging • science essay by Fred Nash
Brass Tacks • letters

_____________________

When I review an issue I usually report on the stories in the page order listed above, but this time around I’m going to lead off with a particularly notable story: no, I’m not describing the obvious choice, Cleve Cartmill’s Deadline (a story commissioned by editor John Campbell so he could grandstand to the Manhattan Project scientists—more on this below) but The Children’s Hour by “Lawrence O’Donnell”. This is one of the pseudonyms used by Henry Kuttner and C. L. Moore, and usually indicates that the story was predominantly written by Moore. As we shall see, that is certainly the case here.

The story begins with Lessing, a soldier, midway through a series of hypnosis sessions conducted by a Lieutenant Dyke (these encounters are used as the framing device throughout the story). During previous sessions, Dyke has discovered a three month period of Lessing’s memories that have been hidden behind a hypnotic block:

Tonight might be the night that would end it. Lessing thought perhaps it would be. Something was stirring behind the intangible locks of his mind, and tonight that door might open which had resisted the skilled manipulations of hypnosis for so long. The door might swing wide tonight at last, and let the secret out which not even Lessing knew.  pp. 86-87

Dyke subsequently establishes that there is a woman involved:

“Tell me,” said Lieutenant Dyke.
“There was a girl,” Lessing began futilely. “I met her in a park—”
Clarissa on a glittering June morning, tall and dark and slim, with the waters of the Hudson pouring past beyond her in a smooth, blue, glassy current.
Stabbed by a white wench’s black eyes. Yes, very black eyes, bright and starry with blackness, and set wide apart in a grave face that had the remoteness and thoughtfulness of a child’s. And from the moment he met that grave, bright glance they knew one another. He had been stabbed indeed—stabbed awake after a lifetime of drowsiness. (Stabbed—like Romeo, who lost both his loves. . . .)
“Hello,” said Clarissa.  p. 100

They had met, Clarissa and he, in so many places in New York, and each place acquired a brilliance of its own once her presence made it clarissima for him. There was no sensible explanation for that glory about her, so that street noises clarified to music and dust turned golden while they were together. It was as if he saw the world through her eyes when they were together, and as if she saw it with vision clearer—or perhaps less clear—than human.  p. 100

Lessing is also led to recall an aunt, a shadowy figure who he cannot visualise, although he remembers a presence in an apartment full of mirrors. He also recalls a car accident which is averted when Clarissa vanishes into a tunnel of shining rings; on another occasion the couple run towards a summerhouse to shelter from the rain, but it disappears (Lessing senses this happens because Clarissa was meant to catch a fever). When Lessing decides to go to Clarissa’s apartment and confront the aunt, he finds himself in another world in front of a tall woman and an armoured man; he later wakes outside the front door of the apartment.

What is surprising about this story is how long it continues in this elusive, enigmatic, and, at times, slightly baffling manner (and is further complicated by literary allusions that contemporary readers of the time would not be able to easily look up on the internet):

The shadow grew, looming, leaning over him. A tinkling rhythm beat out. Words fitted themselves to it.
.
Between the dark and the daylight
When the night is beginning to lower
Comes a pause in the day’s occupation
That is known as the children’s hour—
.
It meant nothing. He groped through blindness, searching for reason.2  p. 86

About her the air shimmered. Lessing blinked. The air turned golden and began to shower down around her in sparkling rain. This was the dream, then, he thought wildly. He had seen it all before. Clarissa standing quietly beneath the golden shower, her face lifted, letting that shining waterfall pour over her slowly. But if it were the dream again, nothing further was to happen. He waited for the floor to spin underfoot—
No, it was real. He was watching another miracle take place, silently and gloriously, in the quiet apartment.
He had seen it in a dream; now it happened before his eyes. Clarissa in a shower of . . . of stars?
Standing like Danae in a shower of gold—
Like Danae in her brazen tower, shut away from the world. Her likeness to Danae struck him with sudden violence. And that impossible rain of gold, and her look of rapt delight. What was it that poured down the shining torrent upon her? What was responsible for setting Clarissa so definitely apart from the rest of humanity, sheltering her at the cost of outraging natural laws, keeping the smooth machinery that protected her humming along its inaudible, omnipotent course? Omnipotent—yes, omnipotent as Zeus once was, who descended upon his chosen in that fabulous rain of gold.3  p. 121

There are references throughout the story to other literary works, e.g., The Country of the Blind, Wordsworth, Cabell, etc.

Later in the story Lessing concludes that someone—or something—is grooming Clarissa for a purpose he can’t fathom (in one of his visions, he sees a figure in a crimson cloak hold Clarissa, and a golden light fall from its hood onto her face)—so he takes Clarissa dancing and drinking, planning afterwards to drive her far away in an effort to break the pattern:

Lessing was tinkling the ice in his third collins and enjoying the pleasant haze that just enough alcohol lent to the particular, shining haze that always surrounded Clarissa. He would not, he told himself, have any more. He was far from drunk, certainly, but there was intoxication in the air tonight, even in this little, noisy, secondrate nightclub. The soaring music had a hint of marijuana delirium in it; the dancers on the hot, crowded floor exhaled excitement.
And Clarissa was responding. Her great black eyes shone with unbearable brightness, and her laughter was bright and spontaneous too. They danced in the jostling mob, not feeling jostled at all because of the way the music caught them up on its rhythms. Clarissa was talking much more than usual this evening, very gayly, her body resilient in his arms.
As for himself—yes, he was drunk after all, whether on the three drinks or on some subtler, more powerful intoxication he did not know. But all his values were shifting deliciously toward the irresponsible, and his ears rang with inaudible music. Now nothing could overpower him. He was not afraid of anything or anyone at all. He would take Clarissa away—clear away from New York and her jailor aunt, and that shining Someone who drew nearer with every breath.  p. 125

This passage is notable not only for the unexpected mention of “marijuana delirium” in the pages of a straight-laced Astounding, but because it hints at what reading the story is like—although I imagine “opium dream” may be a better description. It’s certainly beyond my ability to give an adequate account of the piece, regardless of how many plot points or quotations I scribble onto the page: what I can say is that it feels about twenty years ahead of its time and, for much of its length, I wondered what it was doing in an early-1940’s issue of Astounding.

Notwithstanding these previous comments, the story is finally rationalised into a standard SF tale (or more of one, at least) at the end (I suspect Kuttner took over the writing duties in this section). Here we find that (spoiler) Clarissa is a super human/super being placed among humanity to mature. There is a drift to a Mimsy Were the Borogroves-like transcendence,4 but one that is complicated by the revelation that Clarissa is only one facet of an infinity of Clarissas throughout the Universe—and all that is mixed in with discussion of Lessing’s ability to perceive realities that are beyond his comprehension.

This is a very ambitious and complex work if, perhaps, a not entirely successful one: a couple of things aren’t clear, and the story is perhaps over-rationalised at the end. But it’s certainly near-excellent, and it is my favourite Kuttner and Moore story so far bar Private Eye (and I wouldn’t be surprised if that assessment changed on rereading this). As of now this is my choice for 1944 Retro Hugo Best Novelette (or possibly Novella: I have two different OCR word counts at the moment, one above 17,500 words, one below).

The Contract by E. Mayne Hull is the fourth of the six ‘Artur Blord’ stories, and is pretty much the same as the others, i.e., Blord, the interplanetary business man, is so competent and well-informed that he is always half-a-dozen steps ahead of everyone else.
The plot of this one has a policeman called Nadlin dispatched to offer Blord a contract for a thousand space drives so the police force can repay a debt that they want to discharge. Blord takes Nadlin onto his spacecraft as he goes to visit one of his businesses on another planet and, during the trip, accepts the contract. Just before he signs, Blord finds that the friendly boss of the subcontractor that will build the ships is missing, and that the deputy is refusing the order. Blord signs the contract anyway, to the policeman’s surprise.

The rest of the story plays out on the planet where Blord is mining ore to supply the spaceship contractor—this involves a group of strange looking humans who live there, and who are led by a woman called Evee Calder:

Her eyes were black, sunken pools of agony. Her face was the color of snow, drawn and somehow horrible. Her mouth was a thin, twisted, colorless line. Yet she did not look old. There were few lines even in her forehead, and, when she spoke, her voice though weak and a little harsh was that of a young woman. Here was that tragedy of tragedies: a pretty woman in the final stages of a virulent wasting disease.  p. 14

Calder and her group turn out to be escaped ‘zilth’, humans under strict quarantine on another planet because of a disease they have. They fled to this planet, and are building ships to spread out through the galaxy. You can probably guess how the story ends given Blord’s near-omnipotence.
The plot is quite contrived, but it’s a pleasant enough read nevertheless.

The Rulers by A. E. van Vogt starts with a doctor at a party telling a story about how he accidentally stumbled on a meeting of the thirteen men who rule the world (the doctor is a psycho-medician who can “read” people, so it was immediately obvious to him upon seeing them). He then flees and there is an extended chase (part of which is an aerobatic aircar). The thirteen eventually catch up with him by using his “h” drug controlled wife. The story ends when (spoiler) the doctor manages to get control of the thirteen’s “third personalities” (there’s a short bit of psychobabble which sets this up).
Van Vogt’s combination of dream narrative and super-science sometimes pays off spectacularly well; other times it falls flat. This is one of the latter.

Circle of Confusion by George O. Smith gets off to an engaging and picturesque start with a description of a terraformed Pluto which is warmed by an electromagnetic lens in orbit:

So uranium was mined near the region known on the Plutonian maps as The Styx Valley, but which, with characteristic lack of foresight, was across the Devil’s Mountains from the River Styx. Across the Devil’s Range went the uranium to Mephisto, where it was smelted down into pigs. It was then put on barges and floated down the River Styx to Hell, which lies across the River Styx from Sharon; both cities quartering on the Sulphur Sea.
It was loaded onto the ships of space at Hell, and then raced across the void, sunward to the Inner System where it was used.
[. . .]
The sun should have been a piddling little disk of ineffective yellow. Its warmth should have been negligible, just as it had been for a million years before the coming of man. Pluto had been ordained to be cold and forbidding, but it was not.
The sun was a huge, irregular disk of flaming yellow that had peculiar, symmetrical streamers flowing off; twelve of the main ones and a constantly opening and closing twenty-four minor streamers that flowed outward from the duodecagonal pattern of Sol. These streamers rotated, and looked for all the world like the pattern made by rotating two gratings above one another.  pp. 45-46

The story then switches to John McBride, the controller of the lens stations, who learns of a headstrong young woman intent on flying a spaceship through the centre of the lens: she thinks this will be safe (she has had expert advice), but McBride knows that the type of ship she is using will disrupt the lens. The rest of the story details what happens—major damage to the station’s electrical systems and crew, not to mention Pluto losing its central heating—and the engineering effort made to restore the lens’ operation.

Initially this maintains the high quality of the start (the disruption of the lens and initial effects are well described), but unfortunately it bogs down into pages and pages of McBride asking the other nine stations who and what is broken:

McBride called Station 9 again. “Fuller? Look, Bob, how’s 9?”
“Not good,” said Fuller glumly.
“Only one thing outbalances the rest. The alphatron went up with the rest of the stuff or Carlson would have been burned to a crisp by now. That means we’ll have to run over to 1 and get a new alphatron.”
“Can you repair it?”
“Nope. The field coils are melted right down into a copper ring and the insulation, which was vaporized, is now deposited all over the walls of the station in about two hundred atomic thicknesses. The latter is the worst, I think. That means that every single relay contact in the place has got to be gone over with trichlorethylene and a five-hundred-point file.”
“O.K., Bob. Send Tiny Hanson over with Carlson and we’ll send him back with the alphatron. Need anything else?”
‘‘Might send something that’ll either precipitate or absorb the smell of insulation. The whole joint stinks.”
“Cheer up,” said McBride. “Think of how it would stink if we were using rubber like the old boys did. That, Bob, would really make your eyes water! No, I haven’t anything here that you haven’t there. It’ll go away as the atmosphere clarifier takes up the impurities. Better keep a close watch on the filter screens, though, or you’ll get the system fouled and the atmosphere will not be cleared.”

There are pages of this, and it is only leavened with cringe-inducing scenes where McBride meets the headstrong female pilot:

McBride gritted his teeth. “Look, beautiful and senseless. This is Station 10. It is electronegative. One is electropositive. You haven’t got a charge-reversal generator in that crate of yours, because I know darned well that the only place where they have ’em is right here in the lens itself. It’s the only place they’re needed. Now, Miss Drake, the lens is twenty-two million miles in diameter. It is that size because a disk of that diameter subtends the same arc as the sun does when viewed from Terra. Since the lens is situated halfway between Sol and Pluto, the magnification amounts to the projection of the sun on Pluto equal to the sun on Terra. Or don’t you understand the simpler mathematics of optical systems?
“Now, out across six and a half million miles of space, from here, are Stations 9 and 1, both electropositive. It so happens, Miss Sandra Drake, that if the density of matter in space were as high as the atmosphere of Terra at twenty thousand feet, the difference in charge between Station 9 and this one, 10, would be high enough to cause an ionisation discharge! Now put that in that jade cigarette holder and choke on it! Can you possibly—is that microscopic mind of yours large enough—conceive of the effect upon contact? Sister, you’d not only be electrocuted, but you’d light up the sky with the electronic explosion to a degree that would make some Sirian astronomer think that there was a supernova right in his back yard. Now quit acting like the spoiled brat you are, and come along.”  p. 58

When the pair get back to Station 1, McBride hands Drake over to his wife Enid, who puts another flea in her ear (this time about gender roles and relations).
This is so bad it is almost worth reading. The one star is for the good beginning.

Controller by Eric Frank Russell starts with a Japanese army unit landing on a Pacific island that is home to an American inventor. The Japanese are (spoiler) subsequently defeated by the latter, who uses a secret invention which produces “mirror-men”, duplicates of the invaders. These have no ego or soul, and are somehow entirely loyal to him.
It is a formulaic anti-Japanese war story.

Last, and most decidedly least, is Deadline by Cleve Cartmill, which has a Seilla (Allies) spy called Ybor Sebrof (Roby Forbes) dropped into Sixa (Axis)5 territory:

All he had to do was to penetrate into the stronghold of the enemy, find Dr. Sitruc, kill him, and destroy the most devastating weapon of history.  p. 155

After landing Roby kills some enemy soldiers, and then encounters a young woman who has been following him. She turns out to be the director of the underground (what are the chances?), and pulls a gun on him as she thinks he is a Sixa agent.
Up to this point the story, a fast moving pulp, isn’t that bad, but it is shamefully padded from then on (Roby’s imprisoned; the woman and her henchman threaten to torture him when he won’t reveal his mission; they send for someone to identify him; an enemy patrol comes to the house; the messenger returns with news that the person that could identify him is dead, yada, yada, yada).
Eventually, Roby escapes and manages to get a patrol of enemy soldiers to take him to see Dr Sitruc, the inventor of the super-weapon. Cartmill finally gets to the point of the story, which is pasting in the atomic technology description he had received from John Campbell:

Now U-235 can raise the temperature of local matter to where it will, uh, ‘burn’, and give off energy. So let’s say we set off a little pinch of U-235. Surrounding matter also explodes, as it is raised to an almost inconceivable temperature. It cools rapidly; within perhaps one-hundred-millionth of a second, it is down below the point of ignition. Then maybe before it’s down to one million degrees hot, and a minute or so may elapse before it is visible in the normal sense. Now that visible radiation will represent no more than one-hundred-thousandth of the total radiation at one million degrees—but even so, it would be several hundred times more brilliant than the sun. Right?”
Dr. Sitruc nodded. [Roby] thought there was a touch of deference in his nod.
“That’s pretty much the temperature cycle of a U-235 plus surrounding matter explosion, Dr. Sitruc. I’m oversimplifying, I guess, but we don’t need to go into detail. Now that radiation pressure is the stuff that’s potent. The sheer momentum, physical pressure of light from the stuff at one million degrees, would amount to tons and tons and tons of pressure. It would blow down buildings like a titanic wind if it weren’t for the fact that absorption of such appalling energy would volatilize the buildings before they could move out of the way. Right?” Dr. Sitruc nodded again. He almost smiled.
“All right,” [Roby] went on. He now entered the phase of this contest where he was guessing, and he’d get no second guess. “What we need is a damper, something to hold the temperature of surrounding matter down. In that way, we can limit the effect of the explosion to desired areas, and prevent it from destroying cities on the opposite side of Cathor. The method of applying the damper depends on the exact mechanical structure of the bomb itself.  pp. 173-174

He stopped before the bomb, looked down at it. He nodded, ponderously. “I see,” he said, remembering Sworb’s drawings and the careful explanations he had received. “Two cast-iron hemispheres, clamped over the orange segments of cadmium alloy. And the fuse—I see it is in—a tiny can of cadmium alloy containing a speck of radium in a beryllium holder and a small explosive powerful enough to shatter the cadmium walls. Then—correct me if I’m wrong, will you?—the powdered uranium oxide runs together in the central cavity. The radium shoots neutrons into this mass—and the U-235 takes over from there. Right?  p. 174

—That’s not Roby talking to Sitruc there, that’s Campbell pitching to the Los Alamos/Manhattan Project scientists.
Roby eventually manages to overcome Dr Sitruc and kill him (he grabs Sitruc’s gun with his tail—the story is supposedly set on an alien planet, although there is very little detail) and then walks out with the bomb (because, of course, the chief enemy scientist would interrogate an agent in the room that houses the weapon, wouldn’t he?) Roby gets picked up by an allied plane, and during the flight back they dismantle and scatter the bomb.

This is a pretty awful story but, when it was published, the detailed discussion of atomic bomb technology came to the attention of the authorities (security officers at Los Alamos overheard a group of scientists discussing the story in a copy of Astounding), and an agent visited both Campbell and Cartmill. There has been a lot of commentary about this incident over the years, mostly celebratory6 (SF fans of the time craved serious attention—something that is still true today), but the episode seems attention-seeking and irresponsible to me, and could have had serious repercussions.
If it wasn’t for the interest of the authorities, the story, and Cartmill, would be long forgotten.

The Cover this issue is by William Timmins, another dark affair which shows an oddly shaped man—a “zilth”—from the Hull story.
Paul Orban and A. Williams share the credits for the Interior artwork this issue, although most of it is by the latter. William’s work includes abstract illustrations which complement the Moore & Kuttner story.
Meters by John W. Campbell, Jr. is more electronics essay than editorial. It begins by discussing radios and “metering” and it’s only later in the article, when Campbell starts talking about central heating systems, that it becomes apparent he is talking about control systems and/or primitive robotics. I am rapidly coming to the conclusion that Campbell is a dreadful science writer.
In Times to Come trails two series stories in next month’s issue: the first is van Vogt’s The Changeling, the third and last of the ‘Pendrake’ stories (although it doesn’t mention this); the second is The Bureaucrat, a ‘Bullard’ story (a space navy series) by Malcolm Jameson.

Counting Five Million a Second is a short science/photo essay about a Bureau of Standards radio station which produces a highly calibrated signal. Although the writer goes into great detail about the workings of the transmitter, it’s not entirely clear what the purpose of the signal is—I think it’s for radio manufacturers to calibrate their equipment, but I’m not entirely sure.7

The Vanishing Yankee by George O. Smith is (a) partly a near-incomprehensible account about basement or garret inventors and the problems of building a radio that is as good as a commercially available one, and (b) partly an examination of how science has moved on from sole inventors and hobbyists:

Perhaps, some day, some tinkerer will uncover some phenomena that lacks explanation, and studying it, he will lay the basis for personal-phone. He will bring forth the Garret Geniuses again; calling them from their gadgeteering to discover the many unknown, simple factors of the unknown science.
Then for a few years, Garret Genius and his brother will leave their minor discoveries of how to put a kink in a hairpin, and why it is better to put the scratchem on the back of a pack of matches. He is a survivor type, this Garret Genius, and never will become completely extinct. But right now, Garret and his brothers are all working for laboratories, and making their strides in seven league boots since they have the right equipment to work with.
He went into partial oblivion because he was too good. Big Business said: “If Garret Genius can discover and invent in his own attic with junk and haywire, what more could he do for me in a well-equipped laboratory, with a steady income, and with plenty of tools and supplies?’’
The answer is easy. And so I predict that when mankind is ready for the next Great Art, it will emerge from the laboratory and not from the garret. p. 116

Some of Smith’s observations about lone scientists echo those made by Alec Nevala-Lee & Edward M. Wysocki, Jr. in a recent (January-February 2020) Analog essay, Making Waves: The Inventions of John W. Campbell (which, in part, looks at the sole scientist trope in Astounding—see the Cartmill story above—versus the reality of teamwork).8
Smith’s article is hard going in places—it reads like it is written for ham enthusiasts—but it is worth persevering with.

 

The Analytical Laboratory: January 1944 was discussed in that issue.9
“C” Frozen at 186272 is a short science essay by R. S. Richardson that compares the different values of ‘c’, the speed of light, measured over the years. The value given, 186,282 mph, is 10 mph slower than modern values.
Stellar Echo Ranging is a half-page science squib by Fred Nash about measurements taken of Nova Persei. I have no idea what point he was trying to make.

Brass Tacks leads off with a long letter by John L. Gergen, of Mineapolis, Minnesota which contains a review of 1943 and a good general critique of the magazine (the faulty glue used for a previous issue, the smaller size, the contents page illustration, etc.). It is worth a read (click on the image above for a higher resolution version).
R. E. Bowman of Blacksburg, Virginia, contributes another long letter about the poor state of science teaching in schools:

Four years ago the English science teachers published the Spens Report, giving their ideas [about technical schools], and is summarized in Vol. 143 of Nature. There has been a conspiracy of silence concerning this report in the United States. But get it out and read it. How many schools in this country will measure up to the ideas set forth there? Unfortunately, Britain may be too poor after the war to build many such. Read the article and write the Editor. I only wish I could have attended such a school when I was eleven plus.  p. 150

This is followed by a couple of more eccentric letters from E. L. Cameron of Front Royal, Virginia, and Frederick G. Hehr of Los Angeles, California. The first discusses Galactic Government, and how it will need to get rid of those pesky democratic systems and institute an oligarchy, and the second is about “high mutants” hiding in society. (I probably exaggerate a little.)

This is generally a poor issue, but is worth obtaining for The Children’s Hour.  ●

_____________________

1. Alva Rogers mentions only the Cartmill story in A Requiem for Astounding (see footnote 6 below), but not the O’Donnell one. Given this omission, and the lack of comment about  Jameson’s The Anarch in the last issue, I’m beginning to wonder to what extent the book is a useful guide.

2. The title of Moore & Kuttner’s story (and the quote therein) comes from Henry Wadsworth Longfellow’s The Children’s Hour:

Between the dark and the daylight,
When the night is beginning to lower,
Comes a pause in the day’s occupations,
That is known as the Children’s Hour.
.
I hear in the chamber above me
The patter of little feet,
The sound of a door that is opened,
And voices soft and sweet.
.
From my study I see in the lamplight,
Descending the broad hall stair,
Grave Alice, and laughing Allegra,
And Edith with golden hair.
.
A whisper, and then a silence:
Yet I know by their merry eyes
They are plotting and planning together
To take me by surprise.
.
A sudden rush from the stairway,
A sudden raid from the hall!
By three doors left unguarded
They enter my castle wall!
.
They climb up into my turret
O’er the arms and back of my chair;
If I try to escape, they surround me;
They seem to be everywhere.
.
They almost devour me with kisses,
Their arms about me entwine,
Till I think of the Bishop of Bingen
In his Mouse-Tower on the Rhine!
.
Do you think, O blue-eyed banditti,
Because you have scaled the wall,
Such an old mustache as I am
Is not a match for you all!
.
I have you fast in my fortress,
And will not let you depart,
But put you down into the dungeon
In the round-tower of my heart.
.
And there will I keep you forever,
Yes, forever and a day,
Till the walls shall crumble to ruin,
And moulder in dust away!

3. Danae is a figure from Greek mythology. (There is a Wikipedia page here: I’m not sure how this fits in with the story, other than the image of golden rain.)

4. I don’t think it would be an exaggeration to view Mimsy Were the Borogroves as a warm-up act for The Children’s Hour, although the latter has been comparatively overlooked by anthologists. It has seldom been reprinted (its ISFDB page is here) and, in particular, was not included in The Great Science Fiction Stories Volume 6, 1944 by Isaac Asimov & Martin H. Greenberg (ISFDB page here).
It’s been suggested to me that the story was overshadowed by Moore’s story from later that year, No Woman Born.

5. If I hadn’t seen mention of the reverse anagrams in Cartmill’s story elsewhere, I don’t think I’d have noticed.

6. A typical example of positive coverage of Cartmill’s story is Alva Rogers’ account in A Requiem for Astounding:

Perhaps the most sensational story of the year was “Deadline,” a novelette in the March issue by Cleve Cartmill. This story was not sensational literarily, but literally.
[. . .]
[It excited] certain persons in government circles into action with ludicrous results. Campbell has published his version of the affaire Deadline, and I think it might be interesting to hear Cartmill’s. In a personal latter, he had this to say:
.
“Deadline,” that stinker, came about when John Campbell or I suggested to one or the other that I do a yarn about an atomic bomb. I’m not sure we called it that in our correspondence—we were thinking in terms of U-235 and critical mass. Our correspondence took place in early August, 1943. My file shows that I mailed it to Astounding Sept. 8, received the check Sept. 20. John wasn’t too happy with the story, but he knew I was hungry.
He published it early in March, 1944 and a week or two later a Brooks-Brothered young man from Military Intelligence came to see me at my home in Manhattan Beach. We spent about five or six hours together, mostly in my answering questions. I had the file of Cartmill-Campbell correspondence about the story, and he borrowed this for copying. Upshot: I was in the clear, but violated personal security which every American should etc., etc., etc. Just how I violated any kind of security wasn’t clear then; all the facts contained in the story were matters of public record.
What they were afraid of was that I—or John—had had access one way or another to information supposedly confined to the Manhattan Project: The similarity of names: Manhattan—Manhattan Beach were purely coincidental and half a continent apart.
They also put John through the question mill. He told me at our first meeting—Westercon, LA—some fifteen years after that they had tried to extract a promise that he would publish nothing more concerning nuclear fission and he told them to go fly their atoms.
Well, the various stories released in later years had everything from the FBI to foreign spies in the act. But I saw of Mata Hari(s) neither hide nor hari, damnit. (November 19, 1961)
.
Campbell was immensely pleased by the furor the story created in Washington. It was proof positive that science fiction, particularly the Astounding brand, was important enough to warrant serious scrutiny by learned heads in the government, and by inference from this fact, by others in the scientific community. No longer did science fiction deal with childish and improbable Buck Rogers adventures, but dealt instead, in many instances, with serious scientific problems. And most fans felt pretty much the same pride in their favorite form of literature when the facts concerning “Deadline” and Astounding’s involvement with atomic bomb security became known. For a while it was a devastating weapon used in refuting any sneering aspersions cast at science fiction by its critics.  p. 132-133

There is an extensive (and much less flattering) account of the incident in Alec Nevala-Lee’s Astounding (Harper-Collins, 2018). Here are a couple of extracts to give you an idea:

[Campbell] had long suspected that the government was working on an atomic bomb. His earliest stories in college had revolved around the discovery of nuclear power, but when the moment finally came, it found him on the outside looking in. If he had graduated from MIT a few years later, he might conceivably have been part of the effort, but instead, he was just an “organized fan.”
It led him to break his one rule. He had said that Astounding would refrain from publishing anything that might reveal secrets of national defense, and now he was deliberately printing a story with blatant parallels to the most important military project of all time. Campbell made no effort to clear it with the censors, as he had for similar works. It was an act of recklessness that exceeded anything that Hubbard ever did—but it was also the only bomb that he could detonate.
And its impact was felt at once. The Manhattan Project counted many science fiction fans among its workers, and word of the story rapidly spread, until employees were talking about it openly in the cafeteria of the atomic weapons lab in New Mexico. Cartmill’s device bore minimal resemblance to the designs under development, but it didn’t matter. Edward Teller, who would later be known as the father of the hydrogen bomb, recalled that the reaction at Los Alamos was “astonishment.”
But it made its most significant impression on a man who wasn’t a scientist at all. He was a security officer. As the others discussed the story over lunch, he listened quietly—and he took notes. If Campbell had wanted attention, he was about to succeed beyond his wildest expectations.

On March 8, 1944, a month after “Deadline” appeared, Agent Arthur E. Riley went to interview Campbell at the Chanin Building at 122 East Forty-Second Street, where the magazine had recently relocated. It was exactly the sort of reaction that the editor had hoped to provoke. The story wouldn’t have received nearly the same degree of interest if he had simply submitted it to the censorship office, and he seemed flattered by the inquiry, answering the agent’s questions as cheerfully as if he were auditioning for a role on the Manhattan Project itself.
Campbell took full responsibility, saying that he had written to Cartmill—who had “no technical knowledge whatever”—with the idea. Riley wrote in his report, “The subject of atomic disintegration was not novel to [Campbell], since he had pursued a course in atomic physics at Massachusetts Institute of Technology in 1933.” As an editor with a scientifically literate audience, Campbell added, he often drew on published sources and the work of his “technically minded intimates and associates.” He showed Riley a copy of a journal that talked about nuclear fission, and he even described the story line of “Solution Unsatisfactory.”
If he was hoping to make a favorable impression, he wasn’t entirely successful. Riley reported that Campbell was “somewhat of an egotist,” a judgment confirmed when the editor stated grandly, but not inaccurately, “I am Astounding Science Fiction.” Campbell also provided Cartmill’s address and offered to suppress the magazine’s Swedish edition, which seemed the one most likely to fall into German hands—and in fact, Wernher von Braun, the head of the Nazi rocket program, was allegedly obtaining it using a false name and a mail drop in Sweden, although there was no way that either man could have known this at the time.

These extracts come from the last part of Chapter Eight and the beginning of Chapter Nine

7. There is more information about the WWV reference signal on Wikipedia.

8. My review of Alec Nevala-Lee & Edward M. Wysocki, Jr’s Analog article is here.

9. The Analytical Laboratory results for this issue appeared in the June issue:

I’m pleasantly surprised that not only did the Moore & Kuttner story end up in first place (although it did have the benefit of being the longest story), but that the voters realised that the Smith, Russell, and Cartmill stories were turkeys (presumably the latter was in sixth place—or was it redacted?)  ●

Reposted 20th March 2020 as the original blog post had vanished. (Memo to self: do more backups).

rssrss

Astounding Science-Fiction v33n04, June 1944

Summary:
A lacklustre issue whose only story of note is Frederic Brown’s Arena. E. Mayne Hull and A. E. van Vogt’s The Winged Man concludes (it isn’t as good as the first half), and there are stories by Hal Clement, Murray Leinster, and Randall Garrett (the latter is a pseudonymous entry in the unfortunately returned Probability Zero department).
William Timmins contributes another good cover.
[ISFDB page] [Archive.org copy]

Other reviews:1
Alva Rogers, A Requiem for Astounding  p. 129-134

_____________________

Editor, John W. Campbell Jr.; Assistant Editor, Catherine Tarrant

Fiction:
Trog • novella by Murray Leinster –
Trojan Fall • short story by Hal Clement
Arena • novelette by Fredric Brown +
Boomerang • short story by Harry Walton +
The Winged Man (Part 2 of 2) • serial by E. Mayne Hull and A. E. van Vogt [as by E. Mayne Hull]
Probability Zero:
Contagion
• short story by George Holman
The Absence of Heat • short story by Randall Garrett [as by Gordon Garrett] –
Secret Weapon • short story by Robert Browning (II)

Non-fiction:
Cover • by William Timmins
Interior artwork • by Paul Orban (x16), A. Williams (x8)
The Difference • editorial by John W. Campbell, Jr.
The Analytical Laboratory: February & March 1944
Brass Tacks
• letters
Mathematician • science essay
“They Were Dead—” • science essay by Willy Ley

_____________________

This issue’s fiction opens with a novella by Murray Leinster called Trog which, like the handful of other stories I’ve read by this writer, only reinforces my low opinion of his work. That said, the first couple of pages, where Dick Drummond and Sally cross the river to a post-apocalyptic New York, aren’t too bad:

At only one place along the whole Hudson shore was there a tiny plume of steam. That was where a barge lay alongside a ship sunk at its dock, salvaging cargo from the swamped vessel. The other docks were lifeless.
But not empty. One stretch three city blocks long, to be sure, was a scorched mass of ruin, with the masts of three steamers standing up above the wreckage. But the rest of the water front seemed intact as far as the docks were concerned. Yet there was no sign of life. The monster liner Queen Caroline lay careened, her deckhouses crushing in the roof of the wharf beside her.
The rest of the wharves had sunken ships beside them. Some few had settled upright. More leaned one way or another, and several lay on their sides with no human beings anywhere about. The rest of the city was as strangely quiet. A horse and wagon crawled along the Hudson Drive. There was smoke from the chimney of a brown-brick building at Thirtieth Street. Somewhere up where Riverside Drive began there were a few bright spots which might have been children. But the city seemed to be dead. There were three steamers—one listing badly—at anchor down in the lower harbor, and a sailing schooner came down under the George Washington Bridge. That was all the water traffic. Absolutely all.  p. 6

As they are taken across the river in a rowboat, Sally indicates to Dick that their oarsman is a looter and a “trog”. When they arrive at the far shore Dick mentions this to the soldiers there to meet them, and the man dives into the water to escape, only to be shot.

In the next few pages we learn more about this collapsed society, and what a “trog” is, starting with comments from Hamilton, who is also there to meet Dick:

[Hamilton said bitterly:] “Man, the Master of the Universe! Getting to the point where he was almost his own master—where he’d cease to be an animal responding to his environment and become someone who would change his environment to suit himself! We were almost at that point. But the troglodyte in us—our mass consciousness, they say—couldn’t stand it. So it took charge and pulled everything down.”
[. . .]
[Dick said:] “There is a mass consciousness with which each brain has a more or less tenuous contact. It accounts for telepathy and a few other things we haven’t been able to explain with our brand of screwdriver research. But I haven’t quite accepted the theory that people are sick of civilization, and every so often one of them will draw from that mass consciousness the impulse and the information he needs to smash up a power plant by reversing the polarity of a key relay—much less that there’s a mass consciousness for the whole human race which can’t stand civilization and has cracked up and set out to destroy it.”  p. 10

Dick is right to be sceptical of this idea as—after more padding about the world situation, and a plane crash involving Sally’s father, a scientist, returning from a European conference to discuss the crisis—he manages (spoiler) to lure a trog into his lab and empty a tommy-gun magazine into him.  When Dick subsequently examines the trog’s body he finds an electronic box, and later determines that it induced the catatonic brain patterns he and Sally and Blaisdell recorded when the trog arrived at the lab. (This ambush takes a lot of organisation as Dick has to set up ECG monitors, cameras, and alarms, etc.).
Dick then goes to town with written accounts of how the trogs operate, and tells the leaders there to send messengers to the rest of the country.
Later on in the story, after the authorities capture more trogs, they realise that they are German agents involved in a plot to take over the world (third time lucky). The American military then spots an enemy armada sailing towards the USA, and Dick and his associate Blaisdell manage to modify the trog device so that it can be used to incapacitate the would-be invaders.
This is a fairly dreadful story: apart from the fact that the mind-control plot just doesn’t convince, the piece is heavily padded (this includes a lot of the dialogue with inserted ellipsis that don’t seem . . . to have any purpose . . . but to increase the page count . . . and presumably pay rate).
There are also parts of the story which look like Leinster pitched the story to Campbell and that the latter contributed his ideas: the “mass consciousness” sections (the idea that a large groups of people can be manipulated like a herd); the radio ham babble used in the description of the counter device; a speech which asserts that German ideology will never triumph over American industry and technology, etc., etc.

Trojan Fall by Hal Clement is ostensibly about a thief going on the run in a spaceship but is, for the most part, a barely disguised (and dull) lecture about celestial navigation:

From where he was, the runaway could not lay a direct course for his chosen hideout. His knowledge of solid geometry and trigonometry was so small that all he could do was to continue on his present course until the proper heliocentric distance was attained, then stop, put Sol exactly on his beam, hold it there while he turned in the proper direction, and again run in second-order flight for a certain length of time—dead reckoning pure and very simple. By thus reducing his goal position to a known plane—or near plane; actually the surface of a sphere centered on Sol—he could get the course of his second leg by simply measuring, on a plane chart, the angle whose vertex was the point in the sky toward which he had been driving, and whose sides were determined, respectively, by some beacon star such as Rigel or Deneb, and the star of his destination. He dragged out a heliocentric chart and protractor, and set to work.  p. 61

The thief eventually arrives at a pair of dwarf red suns and parks himself at what he thinks will be a stable Trojan point (where he will theoretically remain in position and not drift). Then he shuts down his ship and waits for the Feds to turn up, hoping they will search the area, fail to find him, and move on. When they arrive he holds on as long as he can before (spoiler) the temperature inside the ship becomes too hot to be bearable. When he turns his systems back on he realises he has drifted towards the sun and is doomed.

In the final scene there is a point of view change to the pursuers, who explain his mistake: this involves a geeky mini-lecture about Trojan points only working when one of the two planets/suns has a mass at least twenty-five times greater than the other (such as our sun and Jupiter).

Arena by Fredric Brown opens with Carson, a scout ship pilot, engaging an alien Outsider warship beyond the orbit of Pluto—he then wakes up naked, lying on blue sand under a blue dome, and notices a red spherical object in the distance.
Carson hears a disembodied voice which says that the speaker, an alien super-being, chanced upon the human and the Outsider fleets about to destroy each other. Rather than allowing this mutual destruction to occur (neither the human race or Outsiders would win outright, and both races would be left crippled), the super-being decrees that Carson and an Outsider (the red sphere) will engage in single combat: the loser’s race will be annihilated, leaving the victor unscathed.
The rest of the story tells of the fight between the Carson and the Outsider, which starts when the “Roller” moves towards him but is stopped by a force field. The pair throw rocks at each other for a while, and then the Outsider lobs a decapitated blue lizard which it caught and killed.

The events of the rest of the story unfold against Carson’s increasing thirst and weakness, and involve his unsuccessful attempt at negotiating peace (Carson can sense the Outsider’s malevolent emotions in response), and experiments to see what will pass through the force field. Eventually, Carson passes out, but comes round when one of the lizards in the dome approaches him:

“Hello,” said the voice.
It was a small, thin voice. It sounded like—
He opened his eyes and turned his head. It was a lizard.
“Go away,” Carson wanted to say. “Go away; you’re not really there, or you’re there but not really talking. I’m imagining things again.”
But he couldn’t talk; his throat and tongue were past all speech with the dryness. He closed his eyes again.
“Hurt,” said the voice. “Kill. Hurt—kill. Come.”
He opened his eyes again. The blue ten-legged lizard was still there.
It ran a little way along the barrier, came back, started off again, and came back.
“Hurt,” it said. “Kill. Come.”
Again it started off, and came back. Obviously it wanted Carson to follow it along the barrier.
He closed his eyes again. The voice kept on. The same three meaningless words. Each time he opened his eyes, it ran off and came back.
“Hurt. Kill. Come.”
Carson groaned. There would be no peace unless he followed the blasted thing. Like it wanted him to.
He followed it, crawling. Another sound, a high-pitched squealing, came to his ears and grew louder.
There was something lying in the sand, writhing, squealing. Something small, blue, that looked like a lizard and yet didn’t—
Then he saw what it was—the lizard whose legs the Roller had pulled off, so long ago. But it wasn’t dead; it had come back to life and was wriggling and screaming in agony.
“Hurt,” said the other lizard. “Hurt. Kill. Kill.”
Carson understood. He took the flint knife from his belt and killed the tortured creature. The live lizard scurried off quickly.  p. 89-90

Carson (spoiler) then has an epiphany about the nature of the force-field, which leads directly to the climactic events of the story where he renders himself temporarily unconscious to get through the force field.

This is an inventive and entertaining story, and is much better than the later Star Trek episode (which made Brown’s story more famous today than it might otherwise have been).2

Boomerang by Harry Walton has a narrator called Ed who lost his financial interest in a substance called Sodorite to a man called Carner who, in turn, lost a controlling 51% interest to a third man called Sporn. The story opens with all three meeting in a speakeasy with its own teleport booth. There, Carner makes a proposition to Sporn: if Carner can manage to kill Sporn in the next five days he gets all the shares in the company; if he doesn’t manage to kill him, Sporn gets them (there is a duelling code in this world, so this would all be legal). Carner suggests that Ed holds all the shares until the end of the five day period, at which point they pass to the winner.
This doesn’t really convince, nor does (spoiler) the teleportation gimmick that lets Carner win. That said, the story’s world-building is intriguing and noir-ish, with its duelling and psychodynamic conditioning giving it a similar feel to Kuttner’s Private Eye, or Alfred Bester’s later 1950’s novels. It’s worth a look.

The second part of The Winged Man by E. Mayne Hull and A. E. van Vogt picks up after the fishmen’s kidnap of Jones-Gordon, the submarine’s commander. Kenlon, the first officer, tries to get the location of the fishmen’s city from Nemmo so he can pursue the kidnappers, but has no success.
When Kenlon later goes above to check the other ships in the area he notices that an air boat is approaching. As the craft gets nearer Kenlon sees it is full of Amazonian women and, when it arrives, their six foot tall leader talks to him in a strange form of English.

He learns that the woman is Dorilee, “the Tenant of Joannas guarding the Sessa Clen on her way to her marriage bed”. Kenlon learns that the women—the “joannas”—are from 10,000 AD.
When Dorilee asks to see around the submarine Kenlon takes her below. There, after more conversation, Dorilee sprinkles white crystals on the floor which immobilise the crew but leave her unaffected:

She was speaking again: “Ordinarily, we would never have taken such action as this. But the Sessa Clen must be prepared to occupy the marriage bed within two weeks. Or else her place will be taken by her sister.
“You may say, why not, when the winged men finally return us to our time, ask them to see that we re-emerge within seconds of where we entered. They have told me that the mechanical laws of time-travel make it necessary to allow for all the time that passes here.”
She went on: “What was finally decisive was the statement of the winged men that they would permit no one to return to their particular age until the city of the fishmen was destroyed. So you see”—she shrugged—“we have no alternative. We must use your ship to carry out their purpose.”  p. 147

Two of the four men on the coning tower come down and are overcome by the crystals, which alerts the others: there is a standoff between Dorilee and the men left above. Kenlon is then released from the neural effect so he can order them to surrender. The other joannas come aboard, as well as a birdman who was circling above the boat. As the latter, Laren, talks to Dorilee, Kenlon realises that there are tensions between them. Laren then tells Kenlon that the council wants to talk to him, and they leave together, with Laren carrying Kenlon to the eyrie.
The rest of the story is typically van Vogtian: Kenlon arrives at the eyrie, where he is fascinated by its construction and its angel-like occupants—but then suddenly finds himself in the mind of a bird man far above the eyrie:

He was flying. There was no mistaking the movement, the free, the strong, the immensely strong movement. Flying through a thick mist of cloud that hid even the tips of his wings.
His vision included eye awareness of his legs drawn up against his body; and it included blurred visualization of his wings—blurred because the two great pinions were hammering away at the air like the pistons of a swiftly running engine. His body glowed with power; his whole being exulted with the glory of winged flight. The exhilaration was a tingling joy inside him.
For a long minute that was all there was. Then slowly his brain began to emerge from the state of rigidity into which it seemed to have frozen. The era of pure impression ended. And a personal thought was born, the first of many.
A thought so powerful, so devastating, that his wings ceased their pumping, his body twisted with amazement; he felt bewildered, stunned. And still that thought would not be eased, but rather grew like a storm, becoming more violent with each passing moment: What—what—WHAT had happened?  p. 157

Kenlon sees (through the eyes of the birdman whose mind he is in) a group of two hundred have gathered above the clouds in the sun, and he watches as they sing about their history and a hoped-for return of land.
Then—just as suddenly—Kenlon finds himself inside the mind of a fishman who is part of a group hunting a shark. After they kill it, the fishman takes the body down into the undersea city. When he arrives, Kenlon sees around the undersea city and learns more about that society as the fishman goes about his business. When the fishman eventually reaches one of the far airlocks, Kenlon sees Jones-Gordon (the submarine’s kidnapped commander) arrive, and realises he is going to be revived and taken to the fishmen’s council.

Kenlon then departs this host and finds himself in mental communication with the Council. They discuss the war with him, and ask him to choose whether the birdmen or fishmen will survive. They say that, while he deliberates, he should regain control of his boat. Kenlon notes that, even though the fishmen are the aggressors, he admires their primitive energy.
The rest of the story (spoiler) details how Kenlon regains control of the submarine; his mutiny against Jones-Gordon (who returns from the fishmen’s city wanting to destroy the birdmen); and Kenlon’s destruction of the fishmen’s intelligence centre (which gave them the technology to wage their war). Kenlon leaves the rest of their underwater city intact as he knows that, without the intelligence centre, they are no longer a threat to the birdmen.
The story closes with Jones-Gordon forgiving the mutiny, and the submarine going home.
This part of this novella isn’t nearly as good as last month’s, and there are a number of reasons for this: first, the climax is incredibly rushed, to the story’s detriment; second, the interesting interplay between Kenlon and Jones-Gordon is absent in this half due to the latter’s kidnap; third, as the situation in the future is described and explained, the less convincing the story becomes; fourth, this part just isn’t as smoothly written, and it feels like the work of an entirely different writer.3
A game of two halves, but I might pick up the book-length version to see if it is any better.4
This issue unfortunately heralds the return of Probability Zero (I don’t think I’ve read one I like). There are three entries, led off by Contagion by George Holman, which is a briskly told piece about a man arriving on Venus, and undergoing a medical and inoculation process:

I felt the prick of the needle and the swelling of a vein as the serum entered. “Twenty years ago [kleptomania] was regarded as mental unbalance,” the doctor said, as he laid the needle aside and opened my mouth. “Today this peculiar human activity is known to be caused by the germ kleptococcus pilferatorius. It is invariably accompanied by the germ prevaricatus falsificatum, without which it cannot survive. Before being exposed to these germs by contact with human immigrants, these native Venusians would not lie or steal. After they became infected, they began to lie like Trojans and to steal everything they could get their hands on. But after Hansel isolated kleptococcus pilferatorius an antitoxin was developed, and the Venusians were cured of stealing.”  p. 130

The ending (spoiler), where a hunger epidemic and an outbreak of lying coincide at an alien village, didn’t make any sense to me, but it sets up a punchline.
The Absence of Heat by Randall Garrett is about the threat of crystalline aliens spreading throughout the universe. The daft ending depends on the idea that (spoiler) matter ceases to exist at absolute zero (it doesn’t).
Secret Weapon by Robert Browning II is about (spoiler) sinking German U-boats by electroplating them (they become so heavy they sink).

The Cover by William Timmins is another good effort and, like his last, shows only part of a larger vessel. In this case it is the stern of one of the scuttled boats that feature in the opening to Trog. The ruins in the background are New York.
Two thirds of this issue’s Interior artwork is by Paul Orban, who work ranges from the forgettable spot illustrations of Leinster’s Trog, to some not bad work for Hull & van Vogt’s The Winged Man.
A. Williams provides good, action-packed illustrations for Fredric Brown’s Arena, but dull productions for Walton’s Boomerang (although that is a tough one to illustrate).
The Difference by John W. Campbell, Jr. is another short, turgid science essay masquerading as an editorial. It starts by talking about steam turbines and heat engines, then discusses their inefficiencies, and finally ends up with a discussion of the gas turbine. If you aren’t familiar with the mechanical operation of these devices (compressors, etc.), then I’m not sure this will make much sense.
I wish Campbell would use this editorial space to talk about matters that affect the magazine or the field.
The Analytical Laboratory: February & March 1944 were discussed in those issues.5
Brass Tacks opens with “Caleb Northrup” (Campbell) supposedly replying to Murray Leinster’s “one-man war against ‘brass hats’, ‘bureaucrats’, and ‘politicians’”, but it’s just an opportunity for him to hold forth on one of his pet subjects: the habits of politicians and officers.
The second letter is from the soon-to-be editor of New Worlds magazine6 (launched in 1946), John “Ted” Carnell, who writes that he is back from “world-cruising” (military service in WWII), and has found a pile of Astoundings waiting to be read. He recounts his previous situation:

You might be interested in knowing that I’ve found copies of your magazines in the most unexpected places—there were numerous back issues available in Cape Town and Cairo—at fancy prices, too—and for a short spell I was in Damascus, Syria, and was stopped on the main street by a dirty old Arab who was selling clean American magazines, amongst which were two copies of 1942 ASF’s. Again, during a storm in the Mediterranean we came across a derelict hulk, and upon boarding her I found two copies of this year’s issues.  p. 97-98

The last letter from R. Silbiger (no address) is a complaint about the shrinkage of Astounding and the cessation of Unknown, while paper continues to go to less worthy magazines.

Mathematician looks like it’s a short photo essay about a wall-sized early computer, but is actually about a supply-and-demand simulator for a regional electricity company.

I was dreading the prospect of reading “They Were Dead—” by Willy Ley as it has some ghastly photographs of dogs that were killed and brought back to life (there is one particularly unpleasant photograph of a dog’s severed head exhibiting basic sensory and motor response—needless to say this was not a dog that was brought back to life).
That said, it covers these experiments fairly quickly before moving on to describe cell death and the different periods that the body and brain remain viable, and in what conditions (temperature, etc.). Ley concludes with a discussion on the revivification of humans, and the ethical problems this poses—do you revive people who will be brain-damaged?:

It would need a new set of rules of professional ethics.
And it might require a law—but the legislators will have a hard nut to crack when confronted with the question whether a person’s intellect is, on principle, to be valued higher than his body. It is possible, in legal practice, to restrict a person because of insanity. But I don’t think that any country has a law which provides that a hopelessly insane person can or must be killed. (The German SS does it, but the practices of the German SS are far outside of recognized ethics, legal or otherwise.)  p. 118

A lacklustre issue apart from Frederic Brown’s Arena, and some of the artwork.  ●

_____________________

1. Alva Rogers says of Fredric Brown’s Arena:

The idea of an inter-galactic war being settled by single combat in the old chivalric tradition is an interesting one and Brown handled it quite well, notably in the combat scenes, and his handling of the alien champion was exceptionally well done.  p. 131

2. The Arena episode of Star Trek was written before the discovery of Brown’s story—probably why it is so naff. The Wikipedia page for that episode is here.

3. I note that the Sevagram link I provided in last month’s review (about the idea that “E. Mayne Hull” was a pseudonym for A. E. van Vogt) isn’t as categorical as I thought. There is another link at the top of the article which provides a counter argument that suggests Hull was the author or partial author of these works.

4. The Winged Man grew from a 32,000 word novella to a 46,000 word novel which was published in 1966. I can’t remember the Sphere SF paperback from 1977 (most of the van Vogt I bought was published by Panther), but it’s got a pretty good cover:

5. The Analytical Laboratory results for this issue appeared in September:

Trog a joint winner? Words fail me. I will never understand the Astounding voters.

6. I’ve reviewed the first issue of New Worlds magazine here.  ●

rssrss

Astounding Science-Fiction v33n03, May 1944

Summary:
This is a lacklustre issue whose only highlight is the first part of E. Mayne Hull & A. E. van Vogt’s serial, The Winged Man, an entertaining adventure that features a US military submarine and crew transported one million years into the future!
Noteworthy is the first of Clifford Simak’s ‘City’ series, City and the debut of A. Bertram Chandler. There is also a second ‘Plutonian Ring’ story by George O. Smith, Latent Image, and stories by Frederic Brown and P. Schuyler Miller among others.
The science article by Campbell is about a discovery that wasn’t: Ehrenhaft’s magnetic monopoles. There is no Analytical Laboratory in this issue due to lack of room and of letters (Campbell states he will change the publication schedule of this department to allow time for more letters to arrive).
[ISFDB page] [Archive.org copy]

Other reviews:1
Alva Rogers, A Requiem for Astounding  p. 129-134

_____________________

Editor, John W. Campbell Jr.; Assistant Editor, Catherine Tarrant

Fiction:
“Latent Image” • novelette by George O. Smith [as by Wesley Long]
“This Means War!” • short story by A. Bertram Chandler
The Winged Man (Part 1 of 2) • novella serial by E. Mayne Hull and A. E. van Vogt [as by E. Mayne Hull] +
The Yehudi Principle • short story by Fredric Brown
Cuckoo • novelette by P. Schuyler Miller
House of Tomorrow • short story by Roby Wentz +
City • novelette by Clifford D. Simak
Environment • short story by Chester S. Geier

Non-fiction:
Cover • by William Timmins
Interior artwork • by Paul Orban (x12), A. Williams (x13), Alfred (x2)
Sandwich for Nazis • editorial by John W. Campbell, Jr.
In Times to Come
Power
• science essay
Beachhead for Science • essay by John W. Campbell, Jr.
Brass Tacks • letters

_____________________

“Latent Image” by George O. Smith is a sequel to March’s Circle of Confusion, and starts with McBride on Mars getting the news that his pregnant wife Enid (who is back home on the Plutonian Lens) has had a fall. Unfortunately for McBride the regular ship has just left and the next one isn’t due in for five days. After making enquiries he finds there is an experimental ship, Haywire Queen, that will take him to the Lens if he helps them finish their repairs. This leads to vast quantities of explainium:

But look, Hammond, have you tried the magnetogravitic spectrum yet?”
“No. That was our next program.”
“I’d have tried that first,” mused McBride. “Knowing that the drive depends upon the action of a cupraluin bar under high magnetic density plus an electrogravitic warp, I should think that the close relationship between the magnetic and electronic phenomena would lead you to try the mag-grav first.”
“I didn’t want to start at the top,” said Hammond dryly. “In spite of the fact that Dr. Ellson claimed to have discovered a region in the mag-grav spectrum that produced a faint success.”
“Well, what I’m thinking is that we can rip up the E-grav generator and use the field coil for the alphatron. It’ll carry electrons as well as it carries alphons, you know.”
“Better,” said Hammond. “But what do we use for an E-grav?”
“First we’ll hunt up through the spectrum of the magnetogravitic spectrum. If that doesn’t work, we can add the warp produced by your mech-grav, run from the lifeship’s little alphatron. Right?”
“It’s an idea. Seems to me that I’ve heard somewhere that the combined warps of magneto- and mechanogravitic produces some vectors in the electrogravitic spectrum.”  p. 11

It never fails to amaze me how Campbell lets Smith gets away with pages and pages of this unreadable drivel in his stories.
Anyway, the rest of the tale sees McBride meet the crew, and they figure out a plan to repair the ship. Then McBride learns that Hammond, the captain, has hired a pilot called Sandra Drake—the reckless, headstrong, and gobby young woman who crashed through the lens in the first story. When she arrives there is much shouty arguing with the equally gobby McBride before she eventually agrees to fly the ship to get her licence back.

The trip itself is beset with unexplained acceleration changes caused by the repaired drive—this increases up to seven gee before returning to normal and repeating the cycle again. After more explanium they fix the problem and, after a modification suggested by Drake, find themselves travelling at trans-light speeds.
Drake arrives at the Lens station to save the day (the mere sight of him is enough to pull his wife through her pregnancy crisis), and the story ends with him arguing with Drake about who should pilot the ship to Earth (“I’m not going to let any idiot male handle the Haywire Queen, and don’t you forget it!”)
Not so much a story as a collection of bad habits.

“This Means War!” by A. Bertram Chandler is the debut of a long term contributor to the SF magazines, and tells of an amphibious alien submariner’s visit to the oceans of Earth with his fleet. This largely consists of his account of the hostilities unleashed on them by WWII surface fleets, submarines, and aircraft. The story ends with the alien council which is receiving his report (spoiler) declaring war on Earth.
This is a readable enough, if rather too straightforward story, and shows some promise for the future.

The best thing in this decidedly middling issue is the first part of The Winged Man by E. Mayne Hull and A. E. van Vogt. This opens on the a US submarine on its way to the battle with Japan, with the first officer, Kenlon, on duty in the coning tower. He sees a large bird in the night sky, and phones the third officer, Tedder, to quiz him about it. After the call Kenlon sees this:

A shadow darkened the face of the moon. Kenlon, on the verge of turning away, glanced up again. Then he gasped. And caught the railing and glared like a madman.
Plainly silhouetted against the moon was the figure of a tall man with wings. The wings were only partly spread; and they were not moving. He seemed to be poised there like a creature out of a nightmare, black as only a shadowed outline could be. Intently he stared down towards Kenlon.
For a long instant, that was the picture, like a “still” taken at night. And then, the legs drew up, the body lost its manlike resemblance. A great bird swooped out of the path of the moon into the covering darkness.  p. 39

Events develop quickly in the next part of the story: Tedder comes up to see Kenlon and, as they are speaking, the Quartermaster arrives and points to a winged man on the deck. The creature attaches what looks like a metal plate to the hull, and the men rush down in an effort to capture him but, after a brief struggle, he escapes into the sky.
At this point the sub’s commander, Jones-Gordon, gets involved, and he and Kenlon discuss the “bomb” attached to the deck and how to get rid of it. On closer examination the metal disc appears to be an electronic device but, no matter what the crew try, it remains attached to the boat. Then the winged man lands again, and attaches a device at the opposite end; this time they capture him (or, as we later find out, he allows himself to be captured).
During the interrogation of the winged man Kenlon discovers that he speaks no known language, but draws a picture of the submarine with its hatches battened down. After some more back and forth Kenlon realises that the sub may be in danger, and rushes up to the deck crew, ordering the hatches shut behind him. There is a bright light, and he finds himself underwater for a time, before surfacing in a roiling sea alongside three of the four other men. The submarine appears shortly afterwards and takes them on board.

The second part of this instalment involves further interrogation of the prisoner, who communicates to them that the submarine is now a million years in the future. There are also drawings of a city floating in the air above the sea, whose winged occupants are fighting something underneath. At this point the lookout sights land, and a boat is sent to investigate. This reveals, when the team lose a man, that the mud near the shore is like quicksand, and that the ground is the same.
A month later, by which time they have taught the birdman—who is called Nemmo—to speak English, they learn this quicksand effect is due to a strange rain that came from space. This robbed solid material of its ability to stick together (and also raised the sea-level, which is why the submarine and deck crew arrived here underwater).
The rest of the Q&A session has Nemmo explain that the groundmen (who are now dead) made the birdmen and the fishmen to ensure the survival of humanity, but that these two races are now at war. Nemmo states that if the submarine destroys the fishmen’s metal underwater city for the birdmen, they can return to their own time.

The installment finishes with the submarine arriving at the birdmen’s eyrie. As they arrive the fishmen come out of the sea and take Jones-Gordon overboard.
If this all seems like a typical fast-paced van Vogtian adventure, it is, but it is much more than that too. For one thing the plotting is more considered and less wild than in some of van Vogt’s stories, and it is also more smoothly written (van Vogt’s prose is sometimes notably crude and ungainly). There is also an atypical amount of character observation: throughout the piece Kenlon frequently assesses his commander Jones-Gordon to see how he is coping with the strange events they are experiencing and, in the early part of the story, worries that he does not appreciate the implications of the winged man’s existence. However, Jones-Gordon frequently transcends Kenlon’s expectations, perhaps most notably in this later passage:

Jones-Gordon stood staring out to sea, his heavy face almost expressionless. Kenlon recognized the fatalistic look that finally came into the lieutenant commander’s eyes. The officer said in a curiously quiet voice:
“If our situation is as this creature described, then we are, so far as the United States Navy is concerned, an expended unit. By that statement you will see that I take no stock in their promise to return us to 1944 when we have accomplished this ridiculous purpose of theirs. I think we are justified in assuming that we are lost men, and are, therefore, free of all constraint and all the petty alarms of men who still retain hope.”
He stopped; and Kenlon sighed inwardly. Like all human beings, Jones-Gordon could not be docketted into one pigeonhole. Practical he might be, but in this mood his character changed almost literally. Somehow, long ago, the lieutenant commander had resigned himself to death. It had made him utterly fearless, cool and unexcitable in battle, the perfect commander. It was theoretically possible that all the men who went down to the sea in submarines should similarly surrender themselves to a destiny with death. But they hadn’t. Kenlon hadn’t. In battle, his nerves tensed to violin-string tautness; his mind was as cold as the metal plates of the sub in which he served; his calmness the artificial calm of the trained man who has a job to do, and does it.
But he feared death. Sometimes at night he would wake up sweating from a dream in which they had been sunk, and the water was pouring in with a hellishly final violence.  p. 65

There is convincing evidence to suggest that “E. Mayne Hull” was little more than a pseudonym for A. E. van Vogt2 but, reading the passage above, I wonder. The far-future plot and elements certainly seem to be typical of van Vogt, but the writing above? Did E. Mayne Hull (van Vogt’s wife) perhaps write the story based on her husband’s outline?

The Yehudi Principle by Fredric Brown starts with Charlie Swann demonstrating a newly invented device to the narrator:

“Does what?” I wanted to know.
The dingbat, I might interrupt myself to explain, was a headband.
It fitted neatly around Charlie’s noggin and there was a round black box not much bigger than a pillbox over his forehead. Also there was a round flat copper disk on each side of the band that fitted over each of Charlie’s temples, and a strand of wire that ran down behind his ear into the breast pocket of his coat, where there was a little drycell battery.
It didn’t look like it would do anything, except maybe either cure a headache or make it worse. But from the excited look on Charlie’s face, I didn’t think it was anything so commonplace as that.
“Does what?” I wanted to know.
“Whatever you want,” said Charlie. “Within reason, of course. Not like moving a building or bringing you a locomotive. But any little thing you want done, he does it.”
“Who does?”
“Yehudi.”  p. 69

After “Yehudi” does various simple tasks for the pair—drinks arrive, and are mixed—Charlie explains that there really isn’t a Yehudi completing these tasks but that the device is an “automatonic autosuggestive sub-vibratory superaccelerator”, a device which allows the wearer to do the task incredibly quickly but not remember doing it (and this is why the wearer “blurs” for a second or too when using the device).
The narrator then uses the device write a story in less than a second.
This goes on for a while until a final scene where (spoiler) one of the two says “shoot yourself”. This is followed by a bang, and the device ceasing to function. There is then the realisation that Yehudi may have been doing the tasks, and that they have just killed him. The pair then notice the recently written story describes all these events, including the ones that happened after it was created . . . .
This is metaphysically entertaining stuff, but you cannot escape the fact that the author continually moves the goalposts (Yehudi to “accelerator” to Yehudi), and then tacks an ending that has little to do with the rest of the piece.3

Cuckoo by P. Schuyler Miller is initially told from the viewpoint of Commander Jeff Norcross of the Triplanetary Space Patrol, the unwilling officer in charge of the Morgan Wildlife Preserve on Venus. The story gets going (as much as it ever does) when he and his assistant Hall host two professors at a dinner party:

Professor W. Ouderkirk Simms led the procession. He would have come to Hall’s shoulder if he had cared to stand on tiptoe to try it.
The top of his head had been planted with a stiff white herbage of about the length and distribution of the green variety which one occasionally saw growing from the skulls of plaster Hibernians in florists’ windows back on Earth. His face was pink, pear-shaped, and full of little wrinkles, and his eyes were bright and beady. He had a nose as long and as sharp as Norcross’ own hawkish beak, and a series of punctured chins draped one behind the other in descending sequence above a neat bow tie. He was wearing the formal professorial garb of the previous century—stiff shirt front, high collar, and flapping tails. He had a row of medals pinned unevenly over the breast pocket of his rather rusty coat.
Behind the little professor loomed a female whom Norcross took to be C. Virginia Banning—and his eyes glittered with wicked satisfaction as he sized her up. She had long red hair, cut raggedly to shoulder length, apparently with a kitchen knife on a bread board. It streamed out in all directions as though each separate filament were highly charged and repelling every other one. Her face was her own, and she was balancing pince-nez precariously on a nose which did nothing whatever to supply them with an adequate foundation. She was broad of shoulder, long of leg, and massive of contour, and she had dressed to display her squareness and massiveness to the greatest if not the best advantage.  p. 81

This passage illustrates the story’s semi-farcical tone and general bagginess. The rest of the story, largely told from second-in-command Hall’s point of view, involves: a “whippersnapper” nest with a “cuckoo’s” egg in it; Hall shooting down a drone above the reservation and discovering an embedded Geiger counter; the cuckoo hatching from its shell, and the latter found to be made of pure U235; and (spoiler) both professors’ involvement in the discovery of a uranium lode in a new part of the reserve.
Or something like that—I rather lost interest in this unlikely and padded tale half-way through. It is hard to believe that this one came from the author of the fast-paced and lean The Cave (Astounding, January 1943).

House of Tomorrow by Roby Wentz is set in WWII Munich, where a schoolboy tells his master of the strange device that he has found in the vaults below. Eventually, the schoolmaster narrator goes down to see it:

At first I saw nothing where he pointed in the gloom. Then, moving in the direction, I caught my first sight of it. I made out the lines of the hull first, then forgot them for the moment as the candlegleams touched the surfaces and flamed back in mirrored beauty from the brilliant surfaces of the most exquisitely fashioned sculpture or artifact of an inanimate object I have ever seen.
It was a ship, or rather boat, yet modeled with the antique lines of an ancient galley, about the length and size of a modern canoe. What it was made from, I cannot tell: a lifetime as a teacher of physical science gives me no clue to the metal—if it was metal—of the object, it was silvery-smooth, more polished than the aluminum of an airplane wing, yet with an indescribable quality of depth—as though one were gazing into water of incredible clarity.  p. 121

There are more visits. During one of these the boy climbs in, grabs the controls, and promptly vanishes. Later, as the master searches for him, the ship reappears, piloted by a man who turns out to be a time-traveller from centuries earlier. He reveals himself as a member of a strange guild (the forerunners of Bacon and Galileo) that invented the time boat and other advanced devices. The man later says he is searching for three men from his guild who stole the boat to get to this time period: their descriptions match those of Hitler, Goering, and Goebbels. The narrator then agrees to lure them to the vault (by sending a letter with details of the machine, etc., to Berlin) in exchange for the safe return of the child.

The first part of this is a well written and atmospheric piece (I suspected a mainstream writer slumming4) but the second half is a more routine and melodramatic potboiler. Entertaining piece, though, although it would be better without the framing device of a future archaeologist finding and reading the narrator’s account.

One of the highlights of Astounding in 1944 and 1945 was Clifford Simak’s ‘City’ series, which begins with the novelette City in this issue. The beginning of this story will, to those of us who have robot vacuum cleaners and the like, feel very contemporary:

Gramp Stevens sat in a lawn chair, watching the mower at work, feeling the warm, soft sunshine seep into his bones. The mower reached the edge of the lawn, clucked to itself like a contented hen, made a neat turn and trundled down another swath. The bag holding the clippings bulged.
Suddenly the mower stopped and clicked excitedly. A panel in its side snapped open and a cranelike arm reached out. Grasping steel fingers fished around in the grass, came up triumphantly with a stone clutched tightly, dropped the stone into a small container, disappeared back into the panel again. The lawn mower gurgled, purred on again, following its swath.
Gramp grumbled at it with suspicion.  p. 117

When Gramp’s friend Ole drives by in his car, he stops to talk. During this conversation we find that internal combustion cars are obsolescent, the roads unused, and towns and cities are largely abandoned. Gramps reflects further on these subjects when he later goes for a walk around the deserted neighbourhood:

The years had moved too fast. Years that had brought the family plane and helicopter, leaving the auto to rust in some forgotten place, the unused roads to fall into disrepair. Years that had virtually wiped out the tilling of the soil with the rise of hydroponics. Years that had brought cheap land with the disappearance of the farm as an economic unit, had sent city people scurrying out into the country where each man, for less than the price of a city lot, might own broad acres.
Years that had revolutionized the construction of homes to a point where families simply walked away from their old homes to the new ones that could be bought, custom-made, for less than half the price of a prewar structure and could be changed at small cost, to accommodate need of additional space or just a passing whim.
Gramp sniffed. Houses that could be changed each year, just like one would shift around the furniture. What kind of living was that?
He plodded slowly down the dusty path that was all that remained of what a few years before had been a busy residential street. A street of ghosts, Gramp told himself—of furtive, little ghosts that whispered in the night. Ghosts of playing children, ghosts of upset tricycles and canted coaster wagons. Ghosts of gossiping housewives. Ghosts of shouted greetings. Ghosts of flaming fireplaces and chimneys smoking of a winter night.
Little puffs of dust rose around his feet and whitened the cuffs of his trousers.
There was the old Adams place across the way. Adams had been mighty proud of it, he remembered. Gray field stone front and picture windows. Now the stone was green with creeping moss and the broken windows gaped with ghastly leer. Weeds choked the lawn and blotted out the stoop. An elm tree was pushing its branches against the gable.
Gramp could remember the day Adams had planted that elm tree.
For a moment he stood there in the grass-grown street, feet in the dust, both hands clutching the curve of his cane, eyes closed.
Through the fog of years he heard the cry of playing children, the barking of Conrad’s yapping pooch from down the street. And there was Adams, stripped to the waist, plying the shovel, scooping out the hole, with the elm tree, roots wrapped in burlap, lying on the lawn.
May, 1946. Forty-four years ago. Just after he and Adams had come home from the war together.  p. 141

At that point a young man arrives and starts talking to Gramps. He eventually identifies himself as Adam’s grandson, and he is there to visit the old house.

The next part of the story introduces Webster, who arrives at a city council meeting where there is an argument about burning empty houses to move squatters on and prevent crime. Webster quarrels with the other men, and loses his job, but he ends by giving a speech which says they should be glad the cities are dead, and people and industries dispersed, otherwise humanity would have perished in an atomic war.
After this long (largely talking heads) section, Webster goes to the Bureau for Human Adjustment, where Taylor, the man who interviews him, does more talking about recent changes, and finishes by offering Webster a job.
The rest of the tale (spoiler) concerns a stand-off between the police and Gramps and the squatters. This is resolved when Gramps and the grandson turn up at city hall to reveal that the grandson has bought all the houses that have unpaid taxes. He wants the city charter dissolved, and plans to turn the city into a museum to show people how their ancestors lived.
There are some good parts in this story, such as the material about a transition to a post-capitalist society, but there’s also a lot of speechifying and data-dumping, and the standoff at the end feels rather contrived. A middling start to a major series.

Environment by Chester S. Geier5 has a spaceship arrive at a deserted alien city looking for previous settlers who have subsequently gone missing. As the two crew, Gaynor and Harlan, fly around in their anti-grav packs, they see what look like crystalline birds:

As they flew, a small cloud of the aerial creatures flashed past. The things seemed to be intelligent, for, as though catching sight of the two men, they suddenly changed course, circling with a clearly evident display of excited curiosity. The crystalline chimings and tinklings which they emitted held an elfin note of astonishment.
If astonishment it actually was, Gaynor and Harlan were equally amazed at close view of the creatures. For they were great, faceted crystals whose interiors flamed with glorious color—exquisite rainbow shades that pulsed and changed with the throb of life. Like a carillon of crystal bells, their chimings and tinklings rang out—so infinitely sweet and clear and plaintive that it was both a pain and a pleasure to hear.  p. 164

The pair land, and see a fountain decorated with a bas-relief showing humanoid creatures. They later find crystals inside the city’s many apartments and, when they hold these, they have visions of ghostly furniture and machines, and get an inkling of something they can sense but cannot understand.

The rest of the story (spoiler) has them go through all the apartments in the city. During this process they turn into the aerial creatures they saw after landing:

“The Third Stage. The tasks will be very difficult, Wade—but interesting. We’ll be putting our knowledge into practice—actually creating. This means we’ll have to deal directly with the powers of the various soldani and varoo. As these are extradimensional, control will be solely by cholthening at the sixth level, through means of the taadron. We’ll have to be careful, though—any slightest relaxation of the sorran will have a garreling effect—”  p. 176

This piece is essentially a Mimsy Were The Borogoves redux, with an added last line that suggests the city is some sort of trap:

A perfect environment, the city. Ideal for the inquisitive humanoid.  p. 178

Well-enough, if predictably, done.

The Cover by William Timmins is a good effort I think—the bulbous red spaceship, the abstract sun image, and the Van Gogh swirl in the background work for me.
The Interior artwork is the usual mixed bag, but I liked the Paul Orban illustrations for the Hull (although the second one has what looks like a normal bloke with wings drawn on6) and the Wentz, and A. Williams quirky spot drawings for the Miller,7 as well as his work for the Simak. Alfred’s two contributions are uninspired and boring (but it’s a hard story to illustrate).
Sandwich for Nazis by John W. Campbell, Jr. is short essay about compound materials which ends by describing those used in the RAF’s “Nazi-killing Mosquito”:

In essence, the sandwich materials represent the compound material reduced to its simplest elements.
A layer of material A, a layer of B and a layer of A—or C. Common plywood is the # 1 representative of the class. The next most familiar example is shatterproof glass. In plywood, the “layer of A” is wood, and B becomes the binding adhesive. In shatterproof glass, it’s glass and a synthetic resin. But the sandwich really begins to come into its own with the type of sandwich represented in the famous Mosquito fighter-bomber. The sandwich is wood, with a glue binding the layers together; the trick is that the wooden sandwich is made up of a layer of very thin, fragile hardwood veneer, a comparatively thick slab of balsa—on the order of a quarter of an inch in thickness—and another thin, fragile peeling of hardwood veneer.
[. . .]
The sandwich is tough, strong, rigid, and extremely light—as perfect for the job as the Nazi-killing Mosquito is in its job.  p. 6

In Times to Come starts off bemoaning the lack of space and of letters for the Analytical Laboratory.8 It seems that Campbell has finally realised that he should allow a longer period between the publication of an issue and the published results. The rest of the column is a warmongery plug for Murray Leinster’s Trog:

Some while back I remarked editorially that attacking the United States with mechanised war was inherently an unhealthy idea. Like a man attacking a lion on a tooth-and-nail basis—the lion’s got more teeth and lots more nail. The mechanized weight of American power is really beginning to swing into action now, proving the argument. But—how could you attack America? Past experience indicates that the Nazis’ successors in control of Germany will probably try. German citizens seem to like monomaniac rulers—with a mania for world conquest.
Murray Leinster has a long novelette next month—“Trog”—that has an astute suggestion on that problem. He’s right, too—it’s one form of attack we might fall for—and before!  p. 28

Power is a short photo article about various kinds of motors and gearing.

Beachhead for Science by John W. Campbell, Jr. fleshes out last month’s editorial announcement about the purported discovery of magnetic monopoles by Dr Ehrenhaft. Campbell is an awful science writer and his explanations are as clear as mud:

Curiously, electrical engineers and physicists have, for years, calculated the properties of free magnetic poles—north pole charges, without south pole accompaniment—and of magnetic currents, flowing magnetism, as well as the properties of magnetic fields. It was long recognized as a mathematicophysical simplification to consider that free north poles did exist, and calculate the behavior of such poles under the conditions laid down in the problem. Electrical engineering data were so calculated—always with the accompanying denial of the reality of the free north pole.
Other engineering and physical problems were solved—meaning, naturally, that they got the answers that agreed with the facts!—by assuming the existence of a magnetic current, purely as a means of simplifying the mathematical processes of attacking the problem. And, of course, denying the reality of that current.  p. 104

Why give a clear example when you can waffle? Although I skimmed most of the rest of this, I got the impression that Campbell also has other bad habits for someone who wants to be a science writer: one is odd analogies (there is one about aliens trying to measure the heating effects of electrical current in remote vacuum, where most metallic materials are superconductors), and another is a tendency to leap into blue-sky speculation about what we may not know and what might be possible.

Perhaps another part of the article gives a clue as why (other than temperament) Campbell had this latter habit:

Resurveyal of atomic theory is nothing new; it has been done with great regularity about once every five years since 1890. Recently, they’ve discovered neutrons and positrons in the atom. Because their figures would not balance properly, they have been forced to postulate a neutrino, a changeless particle of electron mass.  p. 117

With basic science changing at such a rapid rate perhaps this kind of over-excited piece is inevitable. I’ll be interested to see to what extent this tendency is exacerbated by the events of August 1945.

Brass Tacks has a couple of letters about technical matters (space travel, and the machining processes in one of George O. Smith’s stories) and a long, interesting one from John Gergen of Minneapolis, Minnesota, that discusses Simak’s writing and the magazine’s artwork among other matters. It’s worth reading in its entirety (click on the image above).

The serial is the only highlight of what is a lacklustre issue.  ●

_____________________

1. Alva Rogers says that The Winged Man was “a moderately interesting story” but later adds:

Miss Hull always gave the impression of being a second-rate writer, and this short novel didn’t materially change that impression.  p. 130

Pah.
He has this to say of Simak’s ‘City’ series:

Clifford D. Simak, one of the best craftsmen in the science fiction field and one of the handful of old pros who had smoothly managed the transition from the thud and blunder of the thirties to Campbellian science fiction of the middle forties, began in May a series that would eventually bring him “The International Fantasy Award” when all the stories in the series were combined into a book. The story, of course, was “City,” which told, from the viewpoint of the Webster family, of the breakup of the urban complex and the return to a more pastoral existence brought about by automation, inexpensive and fast transportation, etc. This novelette was quickly followed by “Huddling Place,” a short in the July issue and “Census,” the cover story for September. “Huddling Place” examined the phenomenon of man, served by robots, surrounded by labor-saving devices and in instant face-to-face communication with any point in the world, being psychologically unable to face the prospect of leaving his home. “Census” was concerned with the need to determine the probable number of non-human mutants who could take over and keep the dreams of man alive when man eventually vanished from the Earth. The dogs, of course, were the ones who would fill the bill. A fine series that deserved every bit of acclaim it received.  p. 132

2. There is a post on the subject of “E. Mayne Hull” at Sevagram.

3. I would have put serious money on this story of Brown’s turning out to be a refugee from Unknown Worlds (Astounding’s companion magazine folded in late 1943, and several stories were transferred from its left-over inventory). However, it isn’t listed in Stefan Dziemianowicz’s The Annotated Guide to Unknown & Unknown Worlds (1991).

4. This was actually the fourth of four stories that Roby Wentz contributed to Astounding and Unknown. His ISFDB page.

5. Geier’s story is a potential addition to the list of stories in Astounding where the aliens win (the big myth is that Campbell always insisted on human supremacy). See the comments section in this Classics of Science Fiction blog post for a longer list of stories where this did not apply.
I note that this is the only story Geier sold to Campbell for Astounding, although he did sell him a couple for Unknown. Geier sold many other stories to his main markets, Amazing Stories and Fantastic Adventures: his page at ISFDB.

6. Orban’s “normal bloke with wings drawn on”:

 

7. Some of Williams’ other illustrations for Miller’s story:

8. The Analytical Laboratory results for this issue appeared in September:

I’m surprised that (a) the Hull/van Vogt serial didn’t come top, and (b) the Smith did as well as it did.  ●

rssrss

Short Things, edited by John Gregory Betancourt, 2019

Summary:
This ‘Thing’ anthology (the theme is from John W. Campbell’s original story Who Goes There?) is something of a mixed bag, but there are three better than good stories by Pamela Sargent (His Two Wars has two survivors from the Antarctic expedition meeting in 1941 Hawaii where they cope with the aftermath), Mark McLaughlin (The Horror on the Superyacht has The Thing meet Zoolander), and G. D. Falksen (Apollyon, the best of them all, has a Roman alchemist’s assistant fight to save the world).
There is also good supporting work by Kevin J. Anderson and Nina Kiriki Hoffman, and even the stories that don’t entirely work come from writers who tell a story or present a distinct narrative arc, and which are largely uncluttered by politics or other (e.g. literary) baggage—what we would once have called “good reads”.
[ISFDB] [Amazon UK/USA]

Other reviews:
Various, Goodreads

_____________________

Editor, John Gregory Betancourt

Fiction:
Leftovers • short story by Alan Dean Foster ∗∗
The Mission, at T-Prime • short story by Kristine Kathryn Rusch
His Two Wars • novelette by Pamela Sargent +
The • novelette by Chelsea Quinn Yarbro
The Interrogator • short story by Darrell Schweitzer
“According to a Reliable Source. . .” • short story by Allen Steele
Cold Storage • short story by Kevin J. Anderson
Good as Dead • short story by Nina Kiriki Hoffman
The Horror on the Superyacht • short story by Mark McLaughlin +
Apollyon • novelette by G. D. Falksen
The Monster at World’s End • novelette by Allan Cole –
Thingmaker • short story by Paul Di Filippo
The Nature of the Beast • short story by John Gregory Betancourt

Non-fiction:
Cover • by Dan Brereton
Interior artwork • by Marc Hempel, Allen Koszowski, Raiky Virnicid, Mark Wheatley
Introduction • by John Gregory Betancourt

_____________________

At the end of 2019, John Gregory Betancourt launched a Kickstarter to publish Frozen Hell,1 an extended and hitherto lost version of John W. Campbell’s famous novella Who Goes There? The fundraising was so successful ($155k) that it also spawned this anthology of stories set in the same world, which was subsequently given as a bonus to those that had bought any of the packages (and it would probably help to read Who Goes There?2 or Frozen Hell, or at least watch The Thing, before starting this volume).
The collection has an interesting contributor list, and features short fiction from names that I haven’t seen at this length for some time (although this is perhaps a reflection of my reading patterns): Alan Dean Foster, Pamela Sargent, Chelsea Quinn Yarbo, etc.

The fiction leads off with the first of those names, Alan Dean Foster, and his (unfortunately aptly named) story, Leftovers. This continues on from the end of Campbell’s original story with McReady, Barclay, and Norris examining the atomic pile and anti-gravity device that “Blair” constructed. When one of them puts the anti-gravity device on, and suggests testing it outside the building, the others become suspicious and paranoid. This is competently enough done, but it feels like an story twist too far.

The Mission, at T-Prime by Kristine Kathryn Rusch takes place on a future armada of spaceships going to the Things’ home planet to destroy them. Most of this story concerns an “emotionally muted” captain’s thoughts as the fleet prepares to destroy the planet. A lot of the plot is clunkily laid out, and other parts feel phoned-in:

Some of the weapons were live. They would hit the planet’s surface, and send several different kinds of death into the ecosystem. From gas that destroyed the environment that the Things thrived in to flame that would burn off the gas (and everything in its path) to actual bombs that would drill their way into the planet’s core and, if all went as the models said it would, would blow the entire planet into tiny pieces.
By then, the ships would already be at the edge of the solar system. That was why the planet-destroying bombs were last, so that the ships had time to escape the destructive force of an exploding planet.  p. 18

There is also too much emotional resistance to orders, and apparently they have had to destroy their communications devices so they can’t contact Earth, etc.—none of which convinces; I also didn’t buy the final twist (spoiler), which reveals that the commanders of the mission were infected, and that the destruction of the planet was the plan of a Thing faction.

One of the best stories in the anthology is His Two Wars by Pamela Sargent. This sees McReady visiting Norris at this home in Hawaii in 1941, en route to a job with General MacArthur in the Philippines, and sometime after the pair have returned from the Antarctic. Norris is suffering from PTSD and, apart from nightmares, thinks he can sense the presence of Things around him:

Lying next to Abby as she slept, Norris would suddenly recoil, imagining that a drop of blood from the Thing had somehow infected him and that something alien now gestated inside his wife’s body.
In her sixth month, Abby had fallen on their icy front steps and had lost the baby afterwards. He remembered sitting with her in the hospital as she wept and grieved over their loss and confessed to him that the doctor had told her there was probably no chance for another child. All he could feel was relief at knowing nothing alien could ever grow inside her again.  p. 25

The story adds another facet to what is eventually a multilayered piece when a young Japanese-American boy (who Norris tutors) turns up at his house:

“I forgot to bring this back before,” the boy said, holding out the magazine, which bore a cover depicting a frightened man and a swath of starry sky above what looked like a telescope. “What a great story.”
“Which one?” Norris asked. He hadn’t read much pulp fiction during the last couple of years, although he picked up the occasional magazine mostly out of habit. Once the stories had been an escape for him; now they seemed pallid next to what he had experienced.
“‘Nightfall,’” Jonathan said as he handed the magazine to him. Norris glanced at the title, printed in red capital letters on the cover, but didn’t recognize the author’s name. “It’s about a planet where there’s no night, only daytime, so nobody ever sees the stars, they don’t even know there are any stars except for their own sun, but. . .” The boy fell silent. “Read it yet?”
Norris shook his head.
“Then I better not give away the ending.”
“Come on outside and meet an old friend of mine.” Norris dropped the magazine on the coffee table and led Jonathan toward the lanai. “He just got here from the States this afternoon.” McReady looked up as they stepped outside. “Mac, meet Jonny Nishimoto. He’s the boy I was telling you about, the one who’ll be a darned good scientist one of these days.” Jonathan lowered his head, as if embarrassed. “Jonny, this is Mac McReady.”
McReady tensed, stared at the boy for a few long seconds, and then managed a half-smile. “Hello,” he muttered.  p. 26

McReady’s dislike of the Japanese (who he thinks of as a different type of alien) surfaces again at the climax of the story, when (spoiler) the Japanese attack Pearl Harbour and also bomb Jonny Mishimoto’s family house.
Before this climactic event, we spend more time in the company of Norris and his wife Abby, a reporter at the local newspaper, and see more of Norris’s fears and nightmares. We also see Norris and Abby on a double date with McReady and a nurse.
The story’s mixture of aliens, both extra-terrestrial and immigrant, Norris’s PTSD, and the attack on Pearl Harbour is an unlikely combination but one that works well. It also reads like the beginning of an intriguing longer work which could further explore these themes (with Norris and McReady compelled to return to the Antarctic on a search for war-winning alien superweapons, and where Jonny Mishimoto and his family are interned).
If I have one minor criticism of the story, it is of a telegraphic line very near the end:

They both had another enemy to fight now. Maybe, like the Thing and whatever hellish evolution had produced that alien species, human beings also had their own unconscious need for an enemy to fight.  p. 39

Normally—as I’m a bit useless at working out what stories are about—I’m a fan of unambiguous endings (unless the point is ambiguity)—but I think this overdoes it. The actual final line is pretty good:

Norris looked up as an albatross circled overhead. The large white bird dipped its wings and then flew west toward the bright red sun.  p. 39

The by Chelsea Quinn Yarbro baffled me as it’s the only story in the volume that isn’t remotely connected to The Thing franchise, and I’m not entirely sure why it is here (filling space I suspect). Worse, the story ends (spoiler) in mid-air (or mid-space) with the spaceship Star-Trader having wandered off course and its alien navigator mad. Even if it didn’t have this critical flaw, the story doesn’t really convince (the human contingent of the mixed species crew has to give an orchestral concert as part of their duties, and the protagonist’s wind instruments are what causes the spherical alien navigator to go insane).
This story reads like the beginning of a novel submitted in lieu of a story.

The Interrogator by Darrell Schweitzer has an expedition survivor interrogated about the murder of his colleagues during their boat journey home, and further deaths when they arrived back in America. During these conversations, there is a discussion of the Things’ biological infection mechanism, and references to H. P. Lovecraft’s The Mountains of Madness. The final revelation (spoiler) is that the interrogator is a Thing.

“According to a Reliable Source. . .” by Allen Steele starts with a journalist called Scott and his cameraman meeting the ship carrying the Antarctic survivors when it arrives at the dockside in New York. Scott manages to get past the waiting FBI agents to speak briefly with McReady, but he and his cameraman are quickly bundled away. During this encounter Scott realises that McReady given him a slip of paper with the name of the hotel they will be staying at.
The rest of the story has Scott sneak into the hotel to interview McReady, where he learns what really happened in the Antarctic. Scott is caught on the way out, and the FBI agent forces him to supress the story. During this conversation there is mention of three remaining alien bodies in the Antarctic—which points to a longer story, and therefore makes this one feel inconclusive.

Cold Storage by Kevin J. Anderson has as its protagonist Malcolm Hobbs, who works at an ultra-secret X-Files-ish government warehouse in Nevada:

In previous years, the Unusual Object Intake Office had employed many more workers. During World War II, even before the testing of the atomic bomb down in Alamogordo, New Mexico, the giant desert warehouse had been used to store dangerous and important items, including weapons stolen from the Nazis—the Spear of Destiny, some Biblical ark, spell books, magical artifacts, and numerous technological prototypes. One entire wing of the warehouse held super-secret materials from the Manhattan Project, as well as the far more destructive and even more super-secret Brooklyn Project. During the War, Malcolm often received as many as five mysterious artifacts in a single week. The work was dizzying and exhausting, not at all what he’d expected when he’d taken his civil service exam.
After the end of the war, they had begun to catch up, until the Roswell Incident in 1947 threw everything into turmoil again, forcing the intake offices to bring in an army of extra staff , with desks crammed together, diligent clerks filling drawers with classified records, and entire file cabinets rolled out and locked away forever. Now, three years after Roswell, the world had settled into a relative calm and the Unusual Object Intake Office had only himself and Glenn Romano to work on the backlog.
He hated Glenn.  pp. 90-91

Blair’s journal of the ill-fated Antarctic expedition arrives on Hobb’s desk, and he starts to read through it so he can catalog and file the item. As he progresses he learns what happened at the camp, and starts to worry that the journal has infected him, a feeling exacerbated when he starts to feel unwell and have odd thoughts. Meanwhile, his colleague Glenn continues to irritate him (apart from flicking through the journal when Hobbs isn’t there—an irritating breach of security protocol—Glenn also hides a Hobb’s lunchtime sandwich in a filing cabinet).
The story’s climax features both men, the missing sandwich, and a red button with a sign saying “Never Call For Help.”
An amusing tale.

Good as Dead by Nina Kiriki Hoffman starts with Arthur, one of the Antarctic survivors, returning home to his wife Lilian along with his dirty and, we find later, contaminated washing. Although this story subsequently goes through a similar sort of arc to the original (the Things try to assimilate everyone), this has a less kinetic and more domestic execution. And (spoiler) the Things don’t get wiped out in this one.
The Things also behave slightly differently in this story: the dog, the first to get infected, telepathically communicates with Lilian while she sleeps:

In her dream, the dog spoke to her.
“I don’t mean you any harm,” said Asta in a warm voice that reminded Lilian of her mother’s. “We worked too swiftly before. We had no strategy. Sometimes that’s effective, but now it’s time to put our second plan in place. We need. . . a friend. Will you be my friend, Lily?”
“We’ve always been friends, ever since you were a puppy,” Lilian said. “But I never heard you talk before.”
“I’m not talking now,” said Asta, cocking her head to one side and then the other, the way she always did when she was considering something.
“Aren’t you?” Lilian asked.
“Not out loud.”
“Oh.”
Asta licked her hand with a warm, wet tongue. “Be my friend, Lily.” It was true: the voice didn’t come out of Asta’s mouth, but was somehow in Lilian’s head. “All right,” said Lilian  p. 108

Subsequently, when a gossipy neighbour threatens to reveal Lilian’s extra-marital affair to her husband, the dog intervenes by changing the neighbour into a Thing. Later, the dog similarly makes Arthur’s violent nightmares “go away”.
A quietly effective chiller with a neat last line.

The Horror on the Superyacht by Mark McLaughlin has a group of models (Dilektibl, Anemone, Tymebomb, and Capheen) helicopter into the abandoned Antarctic station for a photoshoot. This is Zoolander meets The Thing:

“As you all should already know. . .”—Piedmont turned to Capheen for a moment as he said those words—“we’re here for the big ‘Save Antarctica’ photo shoot. People need to see that this whole continent is starting to thaw out! So, we’re going to shoot pics here at this old research base. Later, I’ll call the pilot with a special transceiver and he’ll take us back to our nice big yacht.” He turned to the photographer. “Quentin, could you start setting up over there, in front of the biggest building? Everybody else, please help him with the equipment.”
Capheen kicked at the slush with a hot-pink boot. “I always thought Antarctica was frozen solid. I guess I don’t get how this whole ‘global warming’ deal works.”
“Why did you agree to be part of this campaign?” Piedmont said.
“For the publicity—and the money, of course.”
“Well, you were right earlier: Antarctica is supposed to be a lot colder. It used to have seasonal thaws, but never like this. Right now, this part of the continent is as warm as a late-winter day in the Midwest, with spring just around the corner. Ice is melting faster than ever around the coastline, and as a result, beaches worldwide are being covered by rising water.”
Capheen nodded. “Okay, I get what you’re saying . . . but how is a photo shoot going to fix anything?”
“We’re building public awareness. Sceptir Fashions is involved with a lot of high-profile causes. It makes us look like we care for the Earth. And I suppose we do! It’s the only planet we’ve got.” He smiled warmly at Capheen.  p. 116

Shortly after this, Yippy the Chihuahua escapes from one of the model’s handbags, and is later found chewing the flesh from the corpse of a burnt, partially thawed-out, and—unknown to them—infected husky from the original expedition. The dog’s owner gives the animal a mint for its breath, but this doesn’t stop matters proceeding pretty much as you would expect when the models get back to the yacht (although there is the novelty of the Things developing a taste for Bloody Marys at breakfast, and tequila shots while they party).
This one is a lot of fun.

My favourite story in the volume is Apollyon by G. D. Falksen, which is set in a Roman garrison on a Black Sea island. This is told from the viewpoint of Markos, an alchemist’s assistant, and tells of his and his master’s attempts to make naptha out of crude oil for use as a weapon of war. During their research, the fishermen employed to dig for oil come upon a large shiny vessel. After the soldiers force their way into it, they find a sleeping three-eyed devil. . . .
The next part of the story isn’t hugely different from the original, and starts with the local priest spending the night alone inside the spaceship to exorcise the devil. Thereafter, among the usual developments (which, by the by, are more coherent, fast paced, and exciting than the original tale), we have the novelty of seeing how a primitive civilization copes with the alien threat (initially I thought they were going to chop off their fingers to identify the Things, but the solution is the same as in the original).
What we also get in this gripping story, and which adds another level to it entirely, are a couple of scenes where humans and Things communicate verbally, such as when Markos confronts (spoiler) a group of Things—three soldiers and his lover Helena—in the church vaults:

Helena sighed. “If only it were so easy. Had I the means of building a spacecraft, I would depart this wretched place at once, but you don’t even have the basic materials for me to use.”
“What?”
“You Romans believe that you are the greatest civilization on your entire planet, and you cannot even fly!” Helena laughed. “You have no computers, no rocketry, no electricity. You have nothing for me to use.”
Markos felt his head spin. Helena spoke in plain Greek, but phrases she used felt out of place, like she had to jumble together concepts to explain things beyond Markos’s knowledge. Thinking machines? Flying towers? Captured lightning? Each explanation made less sense than ignorance.
“You want an explanation?” Helena asked. “It is this. I will replace your Emperor, your Patriarch, your priesthood and your nobles with myself. Through them, I will transform your entire society into a vehicle of technological progress. I will drag your species into modernity, so that within my lifetime you can build me a vessel that will free me from this place!”  p. 155

There is more of this in an excellent climactic scene where Markos follows Helena (the last Thing) into the spaceship to kill her/it. Markos confronts Helena, and experiences more future-shock as he listens to an account of events from the Thing’s perspective—as well as her description of what it is like to be separated from the rest of your race, lost in space and time, and adrift in a cold, unfeeling universe.
One for the ‘Best of the Year’ anthologies.

Thingmaker by Paul Di Filippo takes place in an alternate world where Audie Murphy3 is a driver/aide for Harry Truman, and begins with the pair arriving in an anti-gravity car at a secret warehouse installation. Inside there is a biologically secure environment where scientists have a huge glass vat of Thing cells that have been rendered harmless but which can still be differentiated into various living tissues—chicken meat, a human heart etc.
The story ends (spoiler) with an unrelated mob attack on the warehouse. Murphy is critically injured in the attack but is saved by a poultice of thing cells.

The Nature of the Beast by John Gregory Betancourt opens with a Thing imprisoned in a glass cage undergoing electric shock interrogation administered by two men. Despite this harsh treatment the Thing remains silent. On day 79, however, it adopts the form of a human and starts to communicate.
When a shift change happens shortly afterwards (spoiler) the doctor and the new crew are revealed as Things, and the narrator and his companion are absorbed.
This story has a good start but a completely arbitrary ending.

Up until this point in the anthology, the various stories had been a pleasure to read, even if they were a mixed bag. In comparison with a lot of other contemporary fiction, nearly all the writers here—whether they succeed or not—appeared to be trying to tell a relatively straightforward and structured story, or were producing something that had a distinct narrative arc. They certainly weren’t cluttering up relatively simple tales with a lot of literary padding, or bludgeoning the reader about the head with identity, tribal, or party politics (and where this sort of thing does feature, e.g. the Sargent and McLaughlin stories, it’s organic, and done with a light touch.) This was not the case with the last story I read.

The Monster at World’s End by Allan Cole initially gets off to quite a good start with what appears to be a human narrator in the Antarctic who is tortured by two “Things” in the presence of the body of a dark-skinned one which has had its throat cut. During this ordeal, the “Things”attempt to stab the narrator in the eye, at which point the latter’s talons lash out, revealing he is actually the Thing. Another, hitherto unnoticed, dark-skinned human woman stops any further attacks on the narrator, and the three of them leave. The woman, who we later find is a biologist attached to a mining expedition, returns later to clean the Thing and give it something to eat and drink.
This is where the story starts to go off the rails: the Thing does not attack and assimilate her, or behave as we would expect, but increasingly reveals itself to be more like a 21st century environmental campaigner than alien invader. But I’m getting ahead of myself.
After the Thing recovers from its ordeal it manages to escape from captivity and, during an extended chase sequence (with all sorts of helicopters and autonomous vehicles with laser guns chasing it, etc.) we find out that the Thing is one of a dozen scouts surveying Earth as a potential refuge for its race. We also learn that it was held captive by the staff of an Evil Mining Expedition when it later watches its captors blow up a huge ridge, which slides down to the shore destroying an entire penguin colony. Oil subsequently pours from the blast site into the waters below. Later on the miners supposedly find uranium among the oily rubble (I’m not a geology major but I don’t think combined crude oil and uranium deposits occur in reality, and am pretty sure you wouldn’t search for them like this).4 During this devastation, the Thing also sees the dark-skinned biologist compassionately euthanize a seal caught in the oil spill by firing two darts into it (and by the time I got to the end of the story, I wished she had put them in me).
During a later visit to the base (spoiler), the Thing stumbles upon its two torturers attempting to rape the biologist. It kills the men and saves her, and we learn that the pair raped the other biologist whose body the Thing saw during its interrogation, later cutting her throat to silence her (yes, this is another one of those stories where the only two black/woman characters are there to be actual or potential victims).
The Thing and the woman then set part of the camp on fire and escape to its refuge. The story ends with an extended data dump that (a) talks about what the Thing observed but did not entirely understand (the mining, etc.), and (b) preaches a long sermon about humanity and the environmental damage it causes. This wokefest ends with the Thing’s decision to get rid of humanity:

I looked out at the pristine waters of Deception Bay. As my eyes took in the shimmering emerald green iceberg, I saw a little penguin in a comic waddle to the edge. Once there it dived into the bay and literally flew through the water.
“So graceful,” Eva murmured. “And beautiful. How could something that looks so funny be so beautiful?”
As I watched there was a whooshing sound, and a geyser of water shot into the sky. Painting glorious rainbows.
Then I saw the waters gently part.
An enormous gray shape surfaced.
A whale.
Magnificent and in its own way as graceful as the little flightless bird.
“Beauty comes in all sizes, does it not?” Eva said in a low voice.
As the whale glided through the water, I imagined it was observing me from through one great eye.
“She looks so wise,” Eva murmured.
“Infinitely so,” I replied.
“It’s as if she held the secrets of everything—past, present and future,” Eva said.
I felt a tingling sensation, as if the whale was trying to speak to me.
I strained all my faculties trying to catch what she was saying. Then she spouted water and went under, her tail slapping the surface of the bay, as if in farewell.
Eva said, “Could you feel it?” She tapped her head. “Up here, did you feel it?”
“Yes,” I said.
“I think she was trying to talk to you,” Eva said.
“You mean to us,” I said.
Eva shook her head. “No, to you. She was speaking to you.”
“What did she say?” I asked.
“You know,” Eva insisted. “You know.”
I sighed. “She said, ‘Welcome, brother.’”
And at that moment I knew what the future would hold.  pp. 200-201

Pass the sick bag. A story that is bad in so many ways (believe me, I’ve barely scratched the surface).

The Cover by Dan Brereton is a striking piece, and has the retro feel of an Adventure cover.5 However, there is too much type on the cover, and the font is too big.
The Interior artwork (which is largely uncredited/unsigned) is of a variable standard. Some of it looks like the kind of stuff you’d find in semi-pro fanzines of yore, but the illustrations for the Sargent, Yarbo, Anderson, and McLaughlin stories are okay or better.
There is a very short Introduction by John Gregory Betancourt which describes the genesis of the volume, and also contains this baffling statement:

These stories—with one exception, my own “Nature of the Beast”—are not officially part of the Thing canon.  p. 7

And what is the difference exactly?
Apart from the Cole story, the volume is also let down by its appalling proofreading (the Yarbo piece reads as if it hasn’t been proofread at all). Hoffman’s name is misspelt on the contents page, several of the stories have underlined rather than italicised words, and there are many, many typos.6

In conclusion, this anthology is well worth a look, even it is a bit of a mixed bag . It also made me wonder whether there is a gap in the market for a magazine that contains relatively straightforward short fiction without excess literary or political baggage. If Betancourt started one, or a regular anthology series, I think I’d be a regular reader.  ●

_____________________

1. This project raised $155k—so much for the many recent attempts to traduce Campbell’s character and cancel him, and another reminder (if any was needed) that social media bubbles do not reflect the larger world.

2. John Campbell’s original story is here; the extended version can be bought at Amazon UK/USA.

3. Audie Murphy at Wikipedia.

4. While we looking at possible scientific howlers, Cole’s story also has this:

“Even though it is painfully obvious what is happening to our world. Air so polluted it is unhealthy to breathe. Water so poisoned that our own children are getting sick and dying. Devastating storms and Fires. . .”
Her voice trailed off. She drew a deep breath. Then she pointed at the startling blue sky. With winter near, the sun was low on the horizon. And I could plainly see an enormous pale yellow halo directly overhead. It seemed to vibrate and I could see darkness just beyond. As if I were looking at outer space.
“That is a hole in the sky,” she said. “A hole created by us. And we’re leaking atmosphere like crazy. Not long ago it was starting to heal, then we resumed doing the greedy practices we had all agreed had to stop.”  p. 199

Is this supposed to be about the ozone layer? Because that’s not how it works, and isn’t what’s happening. The ozone layer at Wikipedia.

5. An old style Adventure cover from 1919:

6. These are the typos, etc., a lazy reader found:

Title page: “Dan Brereton” is in a different font from the rest of the page.
Contents page: “Hoffmana” instead of Hoffman
p. 9 tropic instead of tropical?
p. 10 “You” underlined rather than in italics (many, many other examples not listed here)
p. 15 “giving off” rather than radiating?
p. 45 change of font and font size in paras 2 and 4.
p. 46 “sever al” rather than several
p. 47 oens rather than ones
p. 53 sign’s rather than signs.
p. 59 ‘The rather than “The.
p. 62 sizs rather than size.
p. 63 ro rather than to.
p. 63 “remove from” rather than leave.
p. 119 Tymebob rather than Tymebomb.
p. 122 Piedmon rather than Piedmont.
p. 133 viscus rather than viscous?
p. 200 Evan rather than Eva.

I bet there are many more.  ●

rssrss

Astounding Science-Fiction v33n02, April 1944

Summary:
This is, at best, an average issue with only two good but minor stories (Malcolm Jameson contributes a ‘Bullard’ piece called The Bureaucrat, and Fritz Leiber provides the short, paranoid, Sanity). There is also a ‘Venus Equilateral’ story from George O. Smith, and work from Clifford D. Simak, among others.
[ISFDB link] [Archive.org copy]

Other reviews:1
Alva Rogers, A Requiem for Astounding  p. 129-134

_____________________

Editor, John W. Campbell Jr.; Assistant Editor, Catherine Tarrant

Fiction:
The Changeling • novella by A. E. van Vogt
The Long Way • novelette by George O. Smith
Invariant • short story by John R. Pierce
The Bureaucrat • novelette by Malcolm Jameson
Lobby • short story by Clifford D. Simak
Sanity • short story by Fritz Leiber

Non-fiction:
Cover • by William Timmins
Interior artwork • by Paul Orban (x10), Frank Kramer (x6), A. Williams
Super-Conservative • editorial by John W. Campbell, Jr.
Not Quite Rockets • science essay
Rocket Artillery • science essay by Willy Ley
In Times to Come
The Analytical Laboratory: April 1944

Brass Tacks • letters

_____________________

The Changeling, A. E. van Vogt’s novella in this issue, is supposedly a ‘Pendrake’ story, although I fail to see the connection between this one and the others I’ve read.2
The story opens with the narrator, Lesley Craig, being told by an assistant that he has been with their company for four years. Craig knows this is incorrect and, when he looks in the mirror later on, he sees a face that is thirty-four rather than fifty years old. When Craig subsequently speaks to his wife he gets the impression that she knows what is happening to him.

Craig is later kidnapped by a group of young women who have taken the “Equalizer” drug (the story atypically has a war-of-the-sexes sub-theme that runs throughout the story), and they bring him to President Dayles. The President talks about the technological stagnation of society, a radio signal from Mars, experts that are unable to collaborate, and his “Amazons”:

“A very curious manifestation, these women. And, I think, a typically American manifestation at that. Once taken, the drug cannot be counteracted; and I regard it as an evidence of the basic will-to-adventure of American girls that some thousands took the treatment.
“Unfortunately, it brought them to a dead end, left them futureless. Unequalized women dislike them, and men think they’re ‘funny’ to use a colloquialism. Their existence did serve the purpose of galvanizing the women’s clubs into undertaking a presidential campaign. But as individuals the amazons discovered that no employer would hire them, and no man would marry them.
“In desperation, their leaders approached me; and just before the situation reached the tragic stage, I arranged a skillful preliminary publicity, and hired them en masse for what is generally believed to be perfectly legitimate purposes.
“Actually, these women know their benefactor, and regard themselves as peculiarly my personal agents.”
Jefferson Dayles paused blandly. “I hope, Mr. Craig, that this will explain to some extent the odd method by which you were brought before me. Miss Kay Whitewood”—he motioned to the young woman at the desk—“is their intellectual leader.”
Craig did not let his gaze follow the gesturing hand. He stood like a stone, and was almost as blank mentally. He had listened to the brief history of the group of amazons with a fascinated sense of unreality.
For the story explained nothing. Literally nothing. p. 13

I had that feeling most of the way through this piece, but the story eventually reveals itself as a one about a latent superman (he is in a “toti-potent” state) and the two sides trying to force him to his final evolution. During this process Craig unearths information about himself (his birth and military service certificates); he (spoiler) tries to escape from his home but injures himself and loses an arm (this later regrows); and he organises an attack on a Women’s march, and is subsequently imprisoned but escapes. Later, an organised group of toti-potents are revealed; super weapons are developed; and, finally, Craig’s mind control powers become apparent.

For most of its length this story is fast-paced and reasonably entertaining nonsense, but it goes on far too long, and makes increasingly less sense as it does so—I suspect what we have here is an unsuccessful product of van Vogt’s dream-plotting technique.3

The Long Way by George O. Smith is another of his ‘Venus Equilateral’ stories, and has more of the flaws and less of the strengths of that series. It opens with this:

Don Channing stood back and admired his latest acquisition with all of the fervency of a high school girl inspecting her first party dress. It was so apparent, this affection between man and gadget, that the workmen who were now carrying off the remnants of the packing case did so front the far side of the bench so that they would not come between the director of communications and the object of his affection. So intent was Channing in his adoration of the object that he did not hear the door open, nor the click of high heels against the plastic flooring. He was completely unaware of his surroundings until Arden said:
“Don, what off earth is that?”
“Ain’t she a beaut?” breathed Channing.
“Jilted for a jimcrank,” groaned Arden. “Tell me, my quondam husband, what is it?”  pp. 67-68

The device turns out to be a transmission tube built by Terran Electric that Channing wants to modify to enable two-way communications between Venus Equilateral and in-flight spaceships. The problem is that the device comes with an engineer and a lawyer: the former is affable enough, but the lawyer insists on such restrictive conditions that Channing and crew eventually resort to building a solar power generation array to give them leverage over Terran Electric. Channing figures that if he threatens to put them out of business he’ll gain unfettered access to the transmission tube.

The explanations of how the the transmission tube and the solar generator work are unintelligible, and I wonder how many Astounding readers understood them:

“I know that, but the driver cathode disintegrates at a rate of loss that is terrific compared to the loss of emitting surface in the transmission tube.”
“The driver cathode is worth about two hundred G-hours. But remember, there is no input to the driver such as you have in the transmission tube. The power from the driver comes from the disintegration of the cathode surface—there isn’t a ten thousandth of an inch of plating on the inside of the tube to show where it went. But the transmission tube has an input and the tube itself merely transduces this power to some level of radiation for transmission. It is re-transduced again for use. But the thing is this: Your tube is the only thing we know of that will accept subelectronic energy and use it. If the driver and the transmission tubes are similar in operational spectrum, we may be able to detect driver radiation by some modification.”  p. 73

The story is a typical engineers-outsmart-the-others piece (the “others” are usually politicians, lawyers or bureaucrats).

Invariant by John R. Pierce is an okay piece about Homer Green, whose experimental immortality treatment has (spoiler) left him with memories that are as “invariant” as the other cells in his body. This becomes apparent during an interview conducted by a man from 2170, who tells Green (spoiler) that it isn’t 1943 anymore—even though he will shortly forget that information.

The Bureaucrat by Malcolm Jameson is one of his ‘Bullard’ series (the eighth of nine) and, by this point in his career, he is the Admiral in charge of the Bureau of Spatial Strategy (essentially the C-in-C of Space Command). Bullard only appears at the beginning and end of this story, however, and the protagonist is a young lieutenant called Benton, who manages to get an appointment with him (Benton’s father served with Bullard):

But as the machine slid swiftly along gleaming passages, Benton saw that the private suite of the grand admiral was no small place. Through door after door he glimpsed tremendous activities. Occasionally they whizzed through open bays of desks where scraps of conversation could be overheard, while all about were annunciators flashing weird symbols incessantly.
“Sector 4,” droned a voice, “Pegasus and Altair joining action. . . . Pegasus hit. . . . Pegasus blows up. . . . Cruiser Flotilla 36 moving in from lower port quarter. . . . Altair hit—”
As that faded, the orderly cut across the back of a balcony overlooking a great hall. Far down in the pit Benton could see a huge swirling ball of vapor, glittering with pin points of varicolored lights cast upon it by unseen projectors. That would be the ultra-secret Battle Integrator—the marvelous moving solidograph that resolved six dimensions into four. Stern-faced officers watched it intently, snapping orders into phones, and uniformed girl messengers dashed everywhere. Then Benton was out of that place and passing other wonders.  pp. 119-120

When he finally meets Bullard, Benton tells him that his mother’s wealth has bought him a sinecure on the Vindictive, a ship which is stationed over the Manhattan financial district, far from the war, and which has no guns or rocket engines. Bullard displays his files on the screen behind Benton and sees that the ship is full of the influential, the malingering, and the cowardly—and all of whom have the protection of the Secretary of Defence.
Bullard then tells Benton he is a bureaucrat, and can do nothing. After the young man leaves, however, Bullard summons his aide and issues a general order. . . .
Matters proceed pretty much as you would expect (spoiler): all spaceships of Vindictive’s specification (although it is the only one still on active service) get orders to go on gunnery exercises. Although the captain and his executive officer, a legal type, try to get an exemption, they fail (there is some back and forth as various agencies get involved, but matters develop an inertia of their own). Benton tours the ship, and starts to get it ready.

When the Vindictive finally goes on a firing exercise (after they have re-engined the ship and repaired the guns) they manage to hit the target. However, when they fire their guns something strange happens which causes the ship considerable interior damage, and leaves them far away from their initial position. For some unexplained reason the drives have given them a terrific burst of acceleration. Meanwhile, the captain and a number of the officers have abandoned ship, leaving Benton in charge.
The story ends with the Vindictive receiving orders from SPAST (Spatial Strategy) to intercept two raiders who have sneaked past Earth’s defences and are headed for Bullard’s headquarters on the Moon—Benton engages the enemy and uses the acceleration effect in the battle.
Bullard appears again at the end of the story to reiterate to Benton how inappropriate it would be for him to intervene in personnel matters and take Benton off Vindictive—before telling him he will have command of the refitted ship.
This is formulaic Space Navy material, but fairly good for all that.

Lobby by Clifford D. Simak is a story about opposition to atomic power:

“For years they’ve dreamed about atomic power. Reams of speculation have been written about it. Men have planned for it and banked on it, built future worlds on it. And now that it’s within their grasp, what do people do? Now that they can practically reach out and touch power so ridiculously cheap it would be almost free, what do they say and think? They allow a power lobby and a bunch of crooked politicians to scare them silly with bogey stories about the terrible menace of atomics. They listen to yelping preachers on the street corner who tell them it’s sacrilege to destroy God-created matter, that it’s tempting Providence, asking the lightning to strike.”  p. 145

Cobb, who runs the nuclear company, gets a visit from a journalist (which does not go well) and then another from a more shadowy character called Adams. The rest of the story has Cobb take a helicopter to the nuclear plant in Montana to check on its progress but, en route, he sees a blue flash. On arrival he sees the plant has been destroyed (due to sabotage) but that Butler the chief scientist has, with all the research paperwork, survived in a nearby tunnel.
Adams joins the two men at Cobb’s house later on, and (spoiler) reveals he is a member of the World Committee. He has evidence of a corrupt senator, and the power company’s involvement in the explosion at the plant.
This is a mediocre story, and the free nuclear power/world committee worldview is outdated and politically unrealistic.

Sanity by Fritz Leiber is a talking-heads story which opens with World Manager Carrsbury speaking to General Secretary Phy in his office. He explains that he has come to a realisation:

Whether my case was due chiefly to heredity, or to certain unusual accidents of environment, or to both, is unimportant. The point is that a person had been born who was in a position to criticize the present state of mankind in the light of the past, to diagnose its condition, and to begin its cure.
For a long time I refused to face the facts, but finally my researches—especially those in the literature of the twentieth century—left me no alternative. The mentality of mankind had become—aberrant.  p. 163

He goes on to explain to Phy that his analysis led him to train a cadre of political leaders “free of neurotic tendencies”, and that he set up a secret police force to protect himself. Phy counters with a vacuous grin, and the statement that the semi-solid material he has been kneading while listening to Carrsbury came from a hole he cut in his sofa.
Phy, though, isn’t as mad as he sounds: he goes on to tell Carrsbury that (spoiler) his attempts to reduce the amount of insanity in the world have been subverted. Phy becomes demonstrative, and one of Carrsbury’s security guards appears. As Carrsbury leaves for an appointment, Phy asks to accompany him, and the three of them end up in an elevator. There, the tables are further turned:

“Do you know how many floors there are in this building?”
Carrsbury was not immediately conscious of the new note in Phy’s voice, but he reacted to it.
“One hundred,” he replied promptly.
“Then,” asked Phy, “just where are we?”
Carr opened his eyes to the darkness. One hundred twenty-seven, blinked the floor numeral. One hundred twenty-eight. One hundred twenty-nine. Something cold dragged at Carrsbury’s stomach, pulled at his brain. He felt as if his mind were being slowly and irresistibly twisted. He thought of hidden dimensions, of unsuspected holes in space. Something remembered from elementary physics danced through his thoughts: If it were possible for an elevator to keep moving upward with uniform acceleration, no one inside an elevator could determine whether the effects they were experiencing were due to acceleration or to gravity—whether the elevator were standing motionless on some planet or shooting up at ever-increasing velocity through free space.
One hundred forty-one. One hundred forty-two.
“Or as if you were rising through consciousness into an unsuspected realm of mentality lying above,” suggested Phy in his new voice, with its hint of gentle laughter.  p. 170

They eventually arrive at a transparent section of the building that Carrsbury did not know existed. They wait for an aircraft to come and pick Carrsbury up. Phy explains that the only reason that Carrsbury was allowed to do what he wanted was so he could express himself, like everyone in the world, but that now that must stop.
After Carrsbury leaves, Phy turns to the guard and delivers the story’s neat closing line:

“I’m glad to see the last of that fellow,” [Phy] muttered, more to himself than to [the guard], as they plummeted toward the roof, “He was beginning to have a very disturbing influence on me. In fact, I was beginning to fear for my”—his expression became suddenly vacuous—“sanity.”  p. 173

I’m not sure this makes much sense as a story to be honest, but its paranoid feel, the switch-around, and the biter-bit ending work well enough.

The Cover, once again, is by William Timmins. Paul Orban does a lot of this issue’s Interior artwork (about two-thirds), and the rest is from Frank Kramer and A. Williams. I am bored with Kramer’s repeated drawings of what looks like a 1940’s Hank Kuttner in a hat—if I’ve seen this illustration once, I’ve seen it a dozen times:

Super-Conservative, John W. Campbell, Jr.’s editorial, starts with this:

It has long been maintained that science-fiction is written by, edited by, and read by wild-eyed dreamers, with a raving imagination, and that it consists solely of impossible fantasies. Ask any nonreader. Or—maybe you’d better not, just now. The non-readers have been somewhat shocked very recently, and might possibly be a little less certain of the one hundred percent standing of science-fiction as pure fantasy. The jet-propelled plane comes dangerously close to making a rocket-propelled ship sound almost as though it might, a thousand years hence, be remotely possible—
Personally, I’ve long maintained that science-fiction is conservative.  p. 5

There is more of this before Campbell tells us that the rotogravure section of the magazine is made up first, which meant that he couldn’t include a breaking-news article about Dr Felix Ehrenhaft’s supposed discovery of magnetic monopoles and magnetic current. Campbell goes into full messiah mode about this subject, eventually concluding with:

Lack of space now prevents an adequate discussion of this discovery. Next month’s issue will contain photographs, and more detailed reports. For the moment: Dr. Ehrenhaft, having made the most important discovery of this century—I do not except the uranium fission—will most certainly receive that final honorary degree, the degree no college confers, but which is conferred only by the people who find his name forever in their conversation. He will be not Dr. Ehrenhaft to the future, but Ehrenhaft. Probably, as a matter of fact, he will be perpetuated as an ehrenhaft.  p. 6

He wasn’t, but more on this next issue.

Not Quite Rockets is a short article about early jet aeroplanes (principally the Italian Caproni-Campini and the German Blohm & Voss models):

The article also explains how a jet engine works.

Rocket Artillery by Willy Ley compares the ranges, payloads, and convenience of artillery shells versus rockets. The article also goes into the maths of the latter in some detail, but he primarily talks about powder rockets (the first liquid-fuelled German V2 rockets were fired at England six months later in September 1944).

In Times to Come plugs a sequel to last issue’s Circle of Confusion by “Wes Long” (George O. Smith): Latent Image. The other story mentioned is E. Mayne Hull’s The Winged Men, which sounds like a far-future pulp adventure (an American submarine ends up in 1,000,000 A. D., and has to pick sides in a war).
The Analytical Laboratory: April 1944
was discussed in the review of that issue.4

Brass Tacks includes a long letter of comment from Chan Davis, a short one from L. Sprague de Camp, and a request for pocketbook reprints from Henry G. Higgins (no address, oddly)—to which Campbell replies that they feel lucky to get the paper they need for the magazine.
There is also a ringing endorsement of fantasy fiction in Astounding from Walt Liebscher, of the Battle Creek “Slan Shack” in Michigan:

By all means, let’s have fantasy in Astounding. I haven’t the slightest doubt that “We Print the Truth” was destined to be the lead novel in an issue of Unknown. So, when Unknown was obliterated by the paper shortage, you published it in Astounding, which resulted in its being voted the second best yarn in the issue.
Unknown was undoubtedly the greatest fantasy magazine of the last decade. I’ve had my issues professionally bound, for I’m positive that, included between the covers of the thirty-nine issues of Unknown, are some of the greatest fantasy stories of our age.
Some of your “regulars” write finer fantasy than science-fiction, and it would be a crying shame to hold them down to a type of story not strictly their forte. Surely the most inveterate science-fiction addicts will not begrudge we, who lean towards the fantasy side of imaginative fiction, at least one story per issue.  p. 178

Campbell’s comment, “Fantasy—but not the werewolf—vampire type, perhaps?” indicates he is still sounding out the readership.
Given the quality of some of the fiction in recent issues of Astounding, I think Campbell made a big mistake in cancelling Unknown and not continuing both magazines on a bimonthly schedule—he would have had a much wider pool of writers to choose from, and could have produced two better quality magazines.
The last letter, from George A. Foster of Stoughton, Massachusetts, is an amusing account of a visiting aunt, who, having read a couple of stories in Astounding, wonders why her nephew hasn’t built a betatron from the twenty pounds of spare wire in the cellar to zap the mice!
I note in passing the teaser advert inadvertently added to this issue (it plugs the van Vogt story):

In conclusion, a poor issue with only two good, if minor, stories.  ●

_____________________

1. Alva Rogers has this to say about van Vogt’s story:

There was A. E. van Vogt’s “The Changeling” which appeared in April and which was probably one of his first important stories revolving around a character with remarkable, unexplained powers gradually realized, who is impelled into action for unknown reasons and by forces of which he has no knowledge. It was a taut story told with van Vogt’s blend of action and bewildering complexity, but certainly not one of his classics.  p. 130

2. The Changeling underwent “substantial revision” for van Vogt’s fix-up novel The Beast (UK: Moonbeast). The ISFDB page for the series is here.

3. Van Vogt would apparently set his alarm to wake himself up every 45 minutes (or whatever) throughout the night so he could jot down the contents of his dreams on a notepad.

4. The Analytical Laboratory results for this issue appeared in the July 1944 edition:

All these results show is, again, that the longest story usually places first, and that Astounding readers have an extraordinary tolerance for nonsense plots (the van Vogt) and bad writing (the Smith).  ●

rssrss

Graven Images, edited by Edward L. Ferman & Barry N. Malzberg, 1977

Summary:
An interesting and worthwhile anthology about the arts. It contains one of Barry Malzberg’s better (and longer) stories, Choral, which mixes time travel, Beethoven, metaphysics and black comedy; Richard Frede’s strangely titled Oh, Lovelee Appearance of the Lass from the North Countree, a very readable story about a painter preparing for a flight in a military jet (although the fantasy ending is much stranger and doesn’t really work); finally, there is the Nebula Award winning A Glow of Candles, a Unicorn’s Eye, which is a story about the death of theatre in the future. It has a neat title and is competently done I guess, but is the least interesting piece in the collection.
[ISFDB link] [Archive.org copy] [Barry Malzberg’s Chorale (novel version)]

Other reviews: 1
Anonymous, Kirkus Review
Various, Goodreads (none as of Jan 2020)
Brian Stableford, Foundation #88, September 1978 (partial)

_____________________

Editors, Edward L. Ferman & Barry N. Malzberg

Fiction:
Oh, Lovelee Appearance of the Lass from the North Countree • novelette by Richard Frede +
A Glow of Candles, a Unicorn’s Eye • novelette by Charles L. Grant
Choral • novella by Barry N. Malzberg +

Non-fiction:
Science Fiction and the Arts • introduction by Barry N. Malzberg

_____________________

When I first started reading SF magazines in the mid-seventies I also tried to keep up with the new  original anthologies, seeing them as essentially the same thing (albeit an ersatz version of the former). While this was relatively easy for British anthologies (they were few and far between, and usually had paperback editions—New Writings in SF, New Worlds, Andromeda, etc.), it was harder to do for American ones: they were more expensive and, apart from the currency hit, I had to get them mail order (more cost) from Ken Slater at Fantast Medway. A further problem was that some of these American anthologies only appeared in hardback, which meant that, even if Ken could get hold of them, the cost was prohibitive for a cash-strapped student.2 So, even though I was aware of the likes of, say, the Orbit series of anthologies from Damon Knight, I never saw a copy of the later hardbacks until a couple of years ago, when I stumbled upon some scanned editions.
As for the volume under review, not only do I not recall seeing any mention of Graven Images, but I also never came across it subsequently; I only found out about it when there was a mention of the Richard Frede story on one of my listservs a couple of weeks ago (if I recall correctly he was thought to be an unusual choice of contributor for a volume that also contains Grant’s Nebula Award winning story and Malzberg’s piece).3 Frede was a name I recognised from F&SF (I remembered his May 1977 story Mr Murdoch’s Ghost, or at least the title), and who I thought was a frequent contributor. When I checked ISFDB, however, I found that he only contributed three stories over a fifteen-month period. I then picked up Graven Images, thinking I’d have a quick look at the beginning of Frede’s story . . . and ended up finishing it at half past one in the morning (a rare event for me as at that time of night drooping eyelids always trump reading).

The reason that Oh, Lovelee Appearance of the Lass from the North Countree kept my attention is twofold: first, Frede is a very good storyteller (an early bestselling novel, Interns, sold over 1,000,000 copies according to the cover blurb) and, second, the story’s narrative arc—a painter attending a number of aeromedical courses in preparation for a flight in a USAF fighter—is similar to something I’ve experienced myself.
The story itself opens with a Colonel Jack “Jock” McTeague flying upside down in an F-106 looking at the colours in the sky at the edge of a distant storm. When he gets home he tells his wife what he has seen, and she tells him she will commission a painting for his Christmas present:

His wife then wrote to the American Artists’ Association, “He says it was generally flaming color, but he could see, as well, sepia, burnt sienna with raw sienna at the edges, and both umbers (burnt and raw), the earth colors, he believes you call them, and oranges . . .”
.
“. . . and some pinks along in there with the oranges, too,” Mr. Tribble of the American Artists’ Association read. “He believes he saw, too, ranges of rose and vermilion, especially against leadlike gray and blacks. He says especially, too, note the yellow-oranges and burnt oranges, streaks of yellow, ochers, the yellow-orange family.”
“Turner,” Mr. Tribble said aloud. Over his desk intercom he said, “Nancy, who is that fellow who does Turner for us?”
“I don’t remember,” Nancy said. “It’s been so long since anyone wanted a Turner. Shall I look him up?”  p. 14

They contact a painter called Clarence Beattie, who discusses the commission with them before he—driven in part by domestic restlessness—phones Colonel McTeague. McTeague thinks it would be a good idea if Beattie came for a flight and saw what a storm front looks like from the cockpit. He tells Beattie to get a medical certificate, and then attend a military aeromedical course where he’ll be taught about the dangers of hypoxia, how to safely eject from the aircraft, and so on. And that’s what the first thirty pages or so are mostly about: his medicals, the training, and the endless travelling to and from, and waiting at, various Air Force bases (McTeague is continually postponing their meeting as he is a busy man). There is also one night in a bar where his sexual fidelity to his wife is tested.
This is recounted in a breezy and very readable style (you can see why Frede was a bestselling writer), and the story is also leavened with military quirkiness and black humour, such as the advice given by his ejection seat instructor:

“You’ll need [the fur hat] on the flight line before the colonel lowers the canopy. Afterward slip it into your flight suit. In case you have to eject, you’ll need it on the ground. Remember, before you eject, get your head back, chin back, arms in tight across your chest; tuck your hands into your armpits and get your knees and feet tight back against the seat. When you go out, you’re going to get exploded out and you don’t want to lose anything going, like your legs or head. That could ruin your whole day.
[. . .]
“You don’t know how many people, even the pilots, don’t remember to pull in their legs when they’re ejecting, and they’re a mess afterward, believe me, those who survive. But probably you won’t have to.”  p. 33

Beattie, at long last, meets McTeague, and they have several drinks in the bar the night before they go flying. The next day Beattie is in the back seat of the jet:

The colonel climbed in and settled himself. He was about eight feet forward, but there was a radar screen directly in front of Clarence and a lot of other equipment in between, so all Clarence could see of the colonel was a bit of white of the back of the colonel’s helmet. Clarence was tightly fitted in. It was difficult for him to move. The colonel seemed a great distance away. Clarence, usually most at ease in confinement, such as his studio, now found himself subject to an attack of claustrophobia.
I’m going to be flying at thirty thousand and be claustrophobic there? Clarence asked himself. I am?
Something buzzed and garbled in his helmet. Then again. Then. “zzzzz . . . zzzzz . . . ’s that?” said the colonel.
“What?” said Clarence.
“—ll turn it up. . . . There. How do you read me?”
“Fine.”
“Fine,” said the colonel. “Just give me a few minutes to get everything checked. There’re so many dials and gadgets and things, they confuse me.”
Clarence did not laugh.  p. 40

Before much longer they are off the ground and in an afterburner climb to thirty thousand feet. When they get through the cloud, McTeague tells Beattie to look to his left, where he finally sees the coloured sky ahead of the storm front.
It’s at this point (spoiler) where the story takes a major left turn. Having been repeatedly briefed and drilled, Beattie ejects when a red light unexpectedly comes on in front of him. As he falls away from the aircraft he realises that the caption didn’t say EJECT but AC GEN. He then remembers his ejection drills and activates his emergency oxygen, and then waits for his parachute to open.
The next part of the story is even weirder: he lands in snow and makes his way to a solitary farmhouse, where he is greeted by a strange woman who thinks he is someone else:

A woman opened the door. She wore a long dress of rough material in an old style, as in eighteenth-century paintings of provincial life. Her hair was piled up. She was pretty, but her skin was coarse, from work or weather.
Her features had beauty and dignity, but there was a sternness to the set of her expression as if she had just eaten something not to her liking. She said, tonelessly, and as if withholding her belief, “Jack-Jock, my John-John.”
“No,” said Clarence, “my name is Clarence.”
“Jack-Jock,” she said quietly. “You’ve come to me, come back to me.”
“May I come in?” said Clarence.
“I thought you’d sunk beneath the wind. You went off in that terrible wind and never came back. No message. But I knew why, did I not, Lord John?”
“I don’t know. My name really is Clarence.”
“Clarence, Jack, John, Jock. You may come in. Ah, you’ve come again.”
“Thank you. But actually I haven’t been here before. Actually I just sort of fell down from the sky.”
She said, “It does not surprise me. You were a harper then, did sing of air.”  pp. 45-46

The next part reads like a fantasy sequence.4 She accuses Beattie of trying to deflower her, something he apparently achieved with her now dead sister, and she takes him down to the cellar to see her frozen body. He is locked in, and eventually goes to sleep.
The next day she lets him out and takes him outside at the end of a shotgun but, before she can shoot him, a rescue helicopter arrives overhead and he runs to them and is winched on board.
When Beattie gets back to base he learns that McTeague is now a general in Hawaii, and that his ejection occurred several years previously. He then finds that he has been declared dead, his wife has moved to California with his daughter, and that she has remarried.
This last section made absolutely no sense to me whatsoever, and seems completely at odds with the rest of the story (it’s almost like the pages of two different stories got muddled up in the editor’s office). That said, I really enjoyed the first two-thirds/three quarters of the story, so I’d classify this one as a fascinating failure.

A Glow of Candles, a Unicorn’s Eye by Charles L. Grant gets off to a maundering, near-incoherent start:

There are no gods but those that are muses. You may quote me on that if you are in need of an argument.
It’s original. One of the few truly original things I have done with my life, in my life, throughout my life, which has been spent in mostly running. Bad grammar that, I suppose. But nevertheless true for the adverb poorly placed.
And how poorly placed have I been.
Not that I am complaining, you understand. I could have, and with cause, some thirty years ago, and for the first thirty-seven I did—though the causes were much more nebulous. But the complaints I have now are of the softer kind, the kind that grows out of loving, and are meant—in loving—not to be heard, not to be taken seriously.
For example, consider my beard. Helena loved it, once she became accustomed to its prickly assaults. But I do not need it anymore. There is no need for the hiding because I have been forgiven my sins—or so it says here on this elegant paper I must carry with me in case the message has been lost—forgiven my trespasses. But I like the stupid beard now. Its lacing of gray lends a certain dignity to a face that is never the same twice in one week. And it helps me to forget what I am beneath the costumes and the makeup and the words that are not mine. Yet it’s not a forgetting that is demanded by remorse, nor is it a forgetting necessitated by a deep and agonizing secret.  pp. 55-56

There is a page and a half of this sort of thing, and it is an awful beginning.
The story then cuts to the narrator, Gordon Anderson, a film actor (or what passes for films in this near future) doing a take with a simulacrum of a tiger. He is accidentally injured, and then gets a lecture from the director.
We then find out what kind of films Anderson is involved in making:

Begun by the British and expanded by the Americans, the tapes were the foundation of a dream-induced system through which young people would hopefully be matured without actually suffering through the birth pangs of adolescence. Hospital wards with soft colors, nurses with kind faces, and for two hours and twenty minutes every other day the young were wired and hooked and taped to a machine, which I and others like me, those actors with no place to go, inhabited. We wrestled with tigers, endured floods, endured women and men and disasters personal. It was, as the narration stressed again and again and again—who knows how often?—all very symbolic, and all very real.
Watch! the voice ordered.
Take care, the voice cautioned.
Watch, and take care, and listen, and apply . . . apply . . . apply . . . listen . . . apply . . .
A debriefing, then, which lasted for something like an hour. More, if you were new to growing without aging. Less, if you’d been in the system for a year or more.  p. 64

We also learn about Anderson’s past, that he appeared in five failed stage plays (there is no appetite for these in this future), and subsequently, in a fit of anger, beat up the playwrights involved. The authorities have not yet discovered his involvement in this crime.
Anderson later gets involved with Helena, the partner of friend. After he sleeps with her, he tells her about the assaults. Eventually (spoiler), the authorities discover he is responsible. The couple go on the run, leaving the city for the sparsely populated countryside and hiding out in abandoned house (it is in this section where Helena finds and gives Anderson the unicorn necklace mentioned in the title).
Woven into this chase story is the couple’s interest in old plays (Shakespeare, Williams, Miller, Chekhov, etc.). Later in the story, after the heat has dies down, they set up a travelling theatre. They visit small towns, and have some success educating the audience about the art form before performing their plays.
One night, Helena’s ex and an official appear at one of their shows, and the couple find out they have been pardoned.
The story ends with a reference to Helena’s death at age eighty, and the unicorn necklace.
In my notes I ended up categorising this as “good”, although, judging from what I’ve written above, I’m a bit puzzled as to why (if I recall correctly the beginning and end are better than the middle). That said, there is no escaping the fact that it is an entirely minor piece, and one hamstrung by its waffle, pretentiousness, and unconvincing future.
The theme of artists losing, and then regaining, their audience obviously played better with SFWA voters than me—they voted it a Nebula Award for best novelette in 1979.5

Choral by Barry N. Malzberg is the longest story in the book, and the best. This was a pleasant surprise for me as I wasn’t a fan of his short fiction in the late 1970’s and the early 1980’s: it seemed as if his stories always featured protagonists having a breakdown, or who were suffering from terminal sexual or existential angst. In small doses these would have been tolerable, but it felt like the stories were everywhere. It didn’t help that they were in advance of my reading age (and maybe still are).
This story opens with a time-traveller called Reuter who is forging documents thought to be written by Beethoven:

Hunched over the papers on the third floor of his stinking, reeking rooms in the Vienna of 1802, Reuter applied himself to the paper. I renounce, he wrote, I renounce. How did that go in German? It didn’t matter, the papers would be picked up and the translation done by his section man, but he would feel a little more secure if he knew German. A hint of authenticity. For that matter, he would feel a little more secure if he knew more music, but then again you had to keep some sense of perspective. What he knew about was history and the psychology of the mind that would have been Beethoven’s. The rest could be faked, right down to the transcripts of the compositions, which he had stowed in various cubicles in the room. Nothing had to be original; all he had to do was to reconstitute. He supposed.  p. 105

Reuter is unhappy in his role, and frequently discusses this with his superiors—but he agrees to continue. According to the theories of Karl Kemperer, the “mad physicist”, the past is in flux and must be eternally reconstructed by surrogates:

Kemper’s core speculation was that his theory could be proved true if the reconstruction of historical figures were evolved. He believed that upon the return of surrogates from the present to the past, it would be found that the surrogates were the actual personages, that there had been, in short, no JFK, Chamberwit, Thomas Alva Guinzaburg other than those who were the surrogates.
This would make clear, Kemper had postulated, that the past was an absolute creation of the present and that indeed it was only the concept of a timeless present, working toward both future and past, that sustained all of human existence.  p. 113

There is quite a lot of this kind of metaphysical comment throughout, and I found some of it confusing (it may be that the later passages are just intended to show Reuter’s unsettled mental state).
What I thought the story does do well are the details about Beethoven’s life (there is a lot of this in the back end of the tale), and the mordant black humour threaded throughout the piece. Sometimes these combine, such as when Reuter/Beethoven faces a near mutiny from his orchestra about the opening of his Fifth Symphony—at this point Reuter begins to suspect that the conductor and orchestra are also time-travellers. The comedy is also evident when he is interviewed by supervisors, who seem to have a decidedly shaky grasp of past events:

“In some ways your work is quite satisfactory. The outburst to the orchestra was quite neatly conceived.”
“I knew it was in character.”
“It is important, however, that there be a sense of total conviction. You cannot lapse. We are dealing, after all, with a central historical figure, the cornerstone, so to speak, of modern music. The five piano concerti, the ten symphonies—”
“Nine symphonies.”
“Come?”
“He wrote nine symphonies, not ten.”
“Oh,” the Supervisor said. “Well, no difference.” He consulted some papers in his hand. “Perfectly true; there were only nine symphonies.”
“He died with some notes for a tenth, but they were lost, or at least appropriated by someone.”
“Quite so,” the Supervisor said. “On balance, your performance is adequate, however. There are elements of real range and passion. If you could open up some more levels of pain—”
“I don’t understand how you could think there were ten symphonies,” Reuter said. “There were nine, that’s a very common fact.”
“No difference. That’s your specialty. Now, when I talk about pain, I mean—”
“It’s not a matter of specialty. It’s just something that you ought to know. I mean, if you’re reconstructing the past, then it should be assumed that you know the details you’re seeking to reconstruct. Wouldn’t that be reasonable?”  pp. 123-124

A worthwhile read, and possibly one for my hypothetical ‘Best of the Year’ collection.

Like most anthologies there isn’t much nonfiction, but there is an introduction to the volume as a whole, as well as individual ones for the stories. In the former, Science Fiction and the Arts, Barry N. Malzberg begins with this:

Science fiction, as Brian Stableford has pointed out in various essays, has always been a technological fiction, a means of helping us understand the confusing machines and of mapping little way stations, such as showing us where the lavatories might be in the rocket ships—and since its emphasis was on the explication of the machinery, it had very little room for somewhat less urgent matters. Busy, busy: the science fiction writer felt himself to be a tour guide around the apocalypse.  p. 9

The emphasis may lie there, but there are so many counter-examples I wonder if this is even a worthwhile generalisation.
Malzberg then gives a brief sketch of the arts in SF before telling us what we can expect from this volume:

Painting, music, performance—this anthology is the first, I think, to be exclusively devoted to the subject of art, and so it may constitute a precedent of sorts.
Precedent is what art is about: the breaking of new ground, the granting of the perception to see as we have never seen before, the spiritual insight that will enable us to understand or be moved in different ways. Precedent is not perhaps the business of science fiction, which for the most part seems more than ever dedicated to the smoothing away of strange and terrible landscapes to outposts of Corporate Headquarters . . . and this may be one explanation for the dearth of stories utilizing both art and science fiction.  p. 10

Malzberg also contributes introductions to the stories. In the one for the Frede story he mentions that the “story grew from an Experience [Frede] had while researching an upcoming novel called The Pilots”, and quotes a letter that shows the story’s genesis:

“I wrote a letter to a friend in the Air Force and one day I found myself at the second and tandem set of controls of an F-106 Delta Dart. At one point in a rather violent maneuver the EJECT light seemed to flash on—it may have been an instant of electrical malfunction or it may have been in my imagination. I elected not to eject and, fortunately, my instructor, through my headset, confirmed my decision. But the warning light kept going off in my mind, and I had a lot of recall of the lonely upstate New York countryside over which we did our training. . . .”  p. 11

The introduction for the Grant is perfunctory, but Malzberg provides an informative one for his own contribution (click on the image above).
This anthology has an interesting mix of stories, and is well worth seeking out.  ●

_____________________

1. According to ISFDB, this anthology doesn’t seem to have been reviewed in any of the publications they index. I only found one complete review on the internet. (Goodreads is usually a reliable source for at least a brief comment, but it is a blank sheet.)

2. When I hear people moan about Amazon I think of the old days, and then gladly buy the easily available (and relatively cheap) Kindle editions.

3. Richard Frede’s ISFDB page is here. And here is the cover for The Interns (which was later made into a film):

Apparently the genesis of Graven Images was that Frede and Ferman were neighbours, and Frede couldn’t sell the story to a mainstream market.

4. Kirkus Review states that the “fantasy” part of the story is actually taking place in a daydream of Colonel McTeague’s—missed that, if this is the case, although she does call him “Jack-Jock”. I’m not sure that knowledge improves matters.

5. Grant’s story was up against Mikal’s Songbird by Orson Scott Card, and Devil You Don’t Know by Dean Ing for the 1979 novelette award (I can’t remember reading Card’s piece).  ●

rssrss

Weird Tales v38n02, November 1944

Summary:
There are two good novelettes in this issue, Allison V. Harding’s Ride the El to Doom, which is set on an elevated railway in Chicago, and The Dweller in Darkness, a ‘Cthulhu Mythos’ story from August Derleth which eventually turns into a smackdown between Nyarlathotep and Cthugha. There is also interesting work from Ray Bradbury and Manly Wade Wellman.
Boris Dolgov provides an excellent illustration for Harding’s novelette.
[ISFDB link] [Archive.org copy]

Other reviews:
Robert Weinberg, The Weird Tales Story1

_____________________

Editor, Dorothy McIlwraith; Associate Editor, Lamont Buchanan

Fiction:
The Dweller in Darkness • novelette by August Derleth ∗∗∗
A Gentleman from Prague • short story by August Derleth [as by Stephen Grendon]
Ride the El to Doom • novelette by Allison V. Harding
The Jar • short story by Ray Bradbury +
The Bat Is My Brother • short story by Robert Bloch
Dark Mummery • short story by Thorp McClusky
The Dead Man’s Hand • short story by Manly Wade Wellman
The Ghost Punch • short story by Hannes Bok

Non-fiction:
Cover • by Matt Fox
Interior artwork • by Boris Dolgov (x5), A. R. Tilburne (x2), Hannes Bok, Irwin J. Weill
The Shape of Thrills to Come
Superstitions and Taboos
• essay by Irwin J. Weill
The Eyrie • essay by The Editor
Weird Tales Club • address listings

_____________________

The Dweller in Darkness by August Derleth is the first of two pieces in this issue by this writer (the second one is pseudonymous). This ‘Cthulhu Mythos’ story opens with an overlong (and slightly dull) introduction about Rick’s Lake, an area of forest where strange events occur (missing people, and rumours of large beasts such as Wendigoes, etc.). After a few pages of this the narrator, Jack, eventually surfaces in a conversation with a Laird Dorgan about a Professor Gardiner. The academic has gone missing in the area while doing research for a volume on American folklore.
During Jack and Laird’s discussion they not only read Gardiner’s letters, which mention Miskatonic University in Arkham and H. P. Lovecraft, but also discuss the recovered frozen body of a monk who disappeared in the area decades earlier. The pair eventually depart for a cabin near Rick’s Lake to start their search for the professor.
On arrival they discover a number of things: Pete, the local “half-breed” tells them (while an unimpressed sheriff looks on) that there is a strange carving on an altar in the woods; they also find Gardiner has left voluminous notes which includes mention of Old Ones. That night they hear high winds but see no visible signs and, later on, they hear unearthly music from the woods, accompanied by incantations and a guttural scream.
The next day Jack and Laird decide to go on an overnight trip to Wisconsin so they can visit a Professor Partier, an expert in the Cthulhu Mythos. Partier provides several interesting data-dumps (your view may vary):

“We know nothing,” he repeated from time to time. “We know nothing at all. But there are certain signs, certain shunned places. Rick’s Lake is one of them.” He spoke of beings whose very names were awesome—of the Elder Gods who live on Betelguese, remote in time and space, who had cast out into space the Great Old Ones, led by Azathoth and Yog-Sothoth, and numbering among them the primal spawn of the amphibious Cthulhu, the bat-like followers of Hastur the Unspeakable, of Lloigor, Zhar, and Ithaqua, who walked the winds and interstellar space, the earth beings, Nyarlathotep and Shub-Niggurath—the evil beings who sought always to triumph once more over the Elder Gods, who had shut them out or imprisoned them—as Cthulhu long ago slept in the ocean realm of R’lyeh, as Hastur was imprisoned upon a black star near Aldebaran in the Hyades. Long before human beings walked the earth, the conflict between the Elder Gods and the Great Old Ones had taken place; and from time to time the Old Ones had made a resurgence toward power, sometimes to be stopped by direct interference by the Elder Gods, but more often by the agency of human or non-human beings serving to bring about a conflict among the beings of the elements, for, as Gardner’s notes indicated, the evil Old Ones were elemental forces. And every time there had been a resurgence, the mark of it had been left deep upon man’s memory—though every attempt was made to eliminate the evidence and quiet survivors.
“What happened at Innsmouth, Massachusetts, for instance?” he asked tensely. “What took place at Dunwich? In the wilds of Vermont? At the old Tuttle house on the Aylesbury Pike What of the mysterious cult of Cthulhu, and the utterly strange voyage of exploration to the Mountains of Madness? What beings dwelt on the hidden and shunned Plateau of Leng? And what of Kadath in the Cold Waste? Lovecraft knew! Gardner and many another have sought to discover those secrets, to link the incredible happenings which have taken place here and there on the face of the planet—but it is not desired by the Old Ones that mere men shall know too much. Be warned!”  pp. 19-20

Partier suggests to Jack and Laird that they pressure Pete for more information when they get back the next day. They do this, feeding Pete liquor and getting him to take them to the carving in the forest. When they arrive, the pair threaten to tie him up and leave him there unless he tells them what he knows. A terrified Pete recounts a tale of alien creatures arriving from the sky.
The last part of the story (spoiler) is set up when Jack and Laird go back to the cabin and listen a recording made by one of their machines while they were away. They hear the voice of Professor Gardiner, who says he was taken and is now “between the stars”, before adding that the creature appearing at the altar is Nyarlathotep, “The Dweller in Darkness”. The only way to vanquish it is to summon Cthugha, and Gardiner provides the incantation required.
Overall, I quite liked this, even though it is a bit of a mixed bag. Its weaknesses are the dull start, and a second appearance of Gardiner (or something that looks like him) at the cabin at the end of the story (the idea of a god impersonating a human to remove written evidence seems a little silly). Its strengths are the Mythos backstory (which makes the series more of a proto-SF one than I remember from my sparse reading of Lovecraft), and some of the descriptive scenes, such as the arrival of Cthugha:

With shaking hands, Laird tore the paper from my grasp.
“Ph’nglui mgliv’nafh Cthugha Fomalhaut n’gha-ghaa naf’l thagn. la! Cthugha!” he said, running to the veranda, myself at his heels.
Out of the woods came the bestial voice of the dweller in the dark. “Ee-ya-ya-haahaahaaa! Y gnaiih! Ygnaiih!”
“Ph’nglui mglw’nafh Cthugha Fomalhaut n’gha-ghaa naf’l thagn! la! Cthugha!” repeated Laird for the second time.
Still the ghastly melee of sounds from the woods came on, in no way diminished, rising now to supreme heights of terror-fraught fury, with the bestial voice of the thing from the slab added to the wild, mad music of the pipes, and the sound as of wings.
And then, once more, Laird repeated the primal words of the chant.
On the instant that the final guttural sound had left his lips, there began a sequence of events no human eye was ever destined to witness. For suddenly the darkness was gone, giving way to a fearsome amber glow; simultaneously the flute-like music ceased, and in its place rose cries of rage and terror. Then, instantaneously, there appeared thousands of tiny points of light—not only on and among the trees, but on the earth itself, on the lodge and the car standing before it. For still a further moment we were rooted to the spot, and then it was borne in upon us that the myriad points of light were living entities of flame! For wherever they touched, fire sprang up, seeing which, Laird rushed into the lodge for such of our things as he could carry forth before the holocaust made it impossible for us to escape Rick’s Lake.
He came running out—our bags had been downstairs—gasping that it was too late to take the dictaphone or anything else, and together we dashed toward the car, shielding our eyes a little from the blinding light all around. But even though we had shielded our eyes, it was impossible not to see the great amorphous shapes streaming skyward from this accursed place, nor the equally great being hovering like a cloud of living fire above the trees. So much we saw, before the frightful struggle to escape the burning woods forced us to forget mercifully the other details of that terrible, maddened flight.  p. 29-30

A Gentleman from Prague by August Derleth is the writer’s second (pseudonymous and minor) piece in this issue, and it involves a man called Dekrugh arriving home in Britain after travelling on the continent. He calls his business associate, Abel Speers, and when the latter arrives they examine and discuss a gold chain that Dekrugh robbed from a grave in Europe. Then the occupant of the grave turns up. . . .
This is well enough done but is far too straightforward.

I didn’t much like Allison V. Harding’s The Unfriendly World, her debut in Weird Tales (July 1943), so I’m pleased to report her story in this issue is much better.2 Ride the El to Doom has as its narrator Jack Larue, who regularly takes Chicago’s elevated railway to work; one day he sees a newspaper article reporting it is to be shut down and demolished.
On the train home that evening, Laure visits Pete the driver, an acquaintance of his:

“Pete, I see they’re going to pull down this el!”
The old man shook his head and then turned slightly to look at the foundry worker.
Jack went on, “That’s what they say. I saw it in the paper. They’re going to pull it down and we’ll be taking busses across.”
“They’ll never stop the el,” the old man rasped. “A thing like this, it ain’t like a dog you can shoot or an old car you can throw in a junk heap. It’s alive, I tell you! They can’t kill it!”
Jack started at the vehemence in the old motorman’s voice.
“Get out of here,” the engineer said suddenly. “Get out of here, ya—”
Larue, taken aback, stood in the front of the car for a moment.
“Why, you old devil!” he came back. “What’s got into you? You’re scared, eh?
You’re scared because they’re going to take down this rotten old el. Yeh, because you know when the el comes down, Nevers, you’re finished, too. You ain’t no good without it, are you? I know that. Nothing else you can do!” The laborer slammed the compartment door and departed.  p. 38

Larue later regrets his words and goes to Pete’s home to apologise. When he arrives—his first time there—he notes Pete’s spartan abode. Larue then apologises, saying that he can get Pete a watchman’s job at the foundry. Pete isn’t interested and, after a handshake “of steel”, Larue goes home. This latter act (spoiler) and the previous comment about the El being “alive” telegraph the rest of the story.
When Larue returns to Pete’s rooms the next day with a definite job offer, he meets a conductor called Philpot, Pete’s new roommate. Philpot is interested in the job offer but says that Pete won’t be, and adds a cryptic comment about how he doesn’t eat, and “will be staying with the El”. Philpott then picks the lock of Pete’s suitcase to show Larue the driver’s collection of scrap metal items—levers and bars and facings which Pete has stolen from the El. Pete unexpectedly returns and, when he sees what they have done, angrily throws them out.
Larue goes on the final trip of the El, during which he drinks steadily (it is the weekend and his day off), before going to see Pete in the driver’s compartment. Pete ignores him, so Larue punches him, but only succeeds in hurting his arm. Pete throws him out, and Larue gets off the El and to go and do more drinking. After he gets thrown out of a bar he goes to see Pete at home to have it out with him. Larue finds Philpot lying on the floor of Pete’s apartment, and he tells him to get the police before whispering something further in his ear. Larue leaves for the yards.
The final scene sees Pete taking the train out of the yard. Larue manages to board it as it leaves on its journey towards the partially dismantled river bridge:

The car grew brighter around him as the train thundered into a more brightly lit section. The Fender Street station loomed ahead. But desolate tonight. No persons watching, no lines of children with flags, no band, no dignitaries. Only loneliness. They flashed through the station and out. As the el thundered along in its cavern between buildings, here and there Larue fleetingly glimpsed a face at a tenement window or a person gesticulating.
These people knew the el. They had lived with it for years just as he had, lived with its noise and rattle and dirt, and they knew it had died at noon that day, died forevermore, and yet here was this monster ghost thundering again, this magic symbol of the railroad on stilts that refused to die. He could tell from some of the flash glances that they were startled, disbelieving what they saw—a yellow finger of light and then the rumbling clattering black train following the thin cone of brilliance, speeding through the night on the condemned el. And they knew as he knew that the train must stop, for men had killed the creature called the el. They had cut at it and torn at it and broken its structure.  p. 45

The supernatural gimmick at the heart of the story is probably its weakest part but, if you manage to suspend disbelief at this, you’ll be rewarded with a well written piece that is set in a convincingly described world.

The Jar by Ray Bradbury starts with this:

It was one of those things they keep in a jar in the tent of a sideshow on the outskirts of a little, drowsy town. One of those pale things drifting in alcohol plasma, forever dreaming and circling, with its peeled dead eyes staring out at you and never seeing you. It went with the noiselessness of late night, and only the crickets chirping, the frogs sobbing off in the moist swampland. One of those things in a big jar that makes your stomach jump like it does when you see an amputated arm in a laboratory vat.
Charlie stared back at it for a long time.  p. 49

Charlie wants to buy the thing in the jar because of the fascination it exerts—and also to encourage people to come and visit him and his wife—so he makes a deal with the carnival owner. When he takes the jar home the visitors soon start to arrive.
Looking at it encourages them to tell stories—one man tells a story about kittens he drowned, another woman thinks what is in the jar may be her lost child. A man called Tom Carmody has a more prosaic take, and says it’s a hoax, and that part of it is probably a jellyfish. He tells them they are all idiots and, when he leaves, Charlie’s wife follows him.
The denouement (spoiler) has the wife return to taunt Charlie—she and Carmody have been to the carnival owner to ask what was in the jar, and have found out it is just a mixture of random materials, liquid rubber, silk, papier-mache, etc. There is a beautiful line from this scene that describes the wife’s scorn:

Laughter bloomed in the dark, right out of her mouth, an awful kind of flower with her breath as its perfume.  p. 55

Charlie’s wife is missing when the neighbours reconvene the next day, and they comment that the contents of the jar seem to be different. . . .
The ending doesn’t really work—Carmody is there but says nothing, just shivers and stares. If he thought Charlie murdered his wife and put parts of her in the jar, why wouldn’t he say something?
This was a good piece otherwise (although probably not fantasy or SF).

The Bat Is My Brother by Robert Bloch gets off to a corny but fun start where a man called Graham Keene finds himself buried in a coffin. When he finally manages to dig himself out he meets a man at his graveside who tells him he has turned him into a vampire.
After this, the man takes Keene home and briefs him on his new situation (inconsistently—Keene is shown to have no reflection or mirror image, but is also told that the garlic and running water stories are myths because vampirism is a “disease”). Keene’s guardian also provides a rapey description of the feeding process:

“I want you to listen carefully now. Put aside your silly prejudices and hear me out. I will tell you that which needs be told regarding our nourishment.
“It isn’t easy, you know.
“There aren’t any schools you can attend to learn what to do. There are no correspondence courses or books of helpful information. You must learn everything through your own efforts. Everything.
“Even so simple and vital a matter as biting the neck—using the incisors properly—is entirely a matter of personal judgment.
“Take that little detail, just as an example. You must choose the classic trinity to begin with—the time, the place, and the girl.
“When you are ready, you must pretend that you are about to kiss her. Both hands go under her ears. That is important, to hold her neck steady, and at the proper angle.
“You must keep smiling all the while, without allowing a betrayal of intent to creep into your features or your eyes. Then you bend your head. You kiss her throat. If she relaxes, you turn your mouth to the base of her neck, open it swiftly and place the incisors in position.
“Simultaneously—it must be simultaneously—you bring your left hand up to cover her mouth. The right hand must find, seize, and pinion her hands behind her back. No need to hold her throat now. The teeth are doing that. Then, and only then, will instinct come to your aid. It must come then, because once you begin, all else is swept away in the red, swirling blur of fulfillment.”  p. 61

After this data-dump they go out for a snack—or a “waitress” as they are sometimes known.
Later, the guardian lays out his plans to raise a vampire army, but Keene has other ideas. The story ends (spoiler) with a biter-bit ending (boom, tish).

Dark Mummery by Thorp McClusky has a group of people leave a party after midnight to go to a nearby haunted house. There (spoiler), a couple of pranksters get mixed up with real ghosts. An unconvincing and slight piece.

The Dead Man’s Hand by Manly Wade Wellman is one of his ‘John Thunstone’ series, although that character only intermittently appears in the story before arriving at the climax. The bulk of the piece concerns a man and his young daughter, and a farm they have bought at auction. According to the locals it is haunted.
When the pair arrive at the farm after dark they find the farm locked, but a strange man arrives and greets them before producing a light and opening the locked door.
The next day the pair explore the farm separately and, as the girl looks around, the man who greeted them reappears with his light. She finds she cannot move, and the man starts talking, telling her that he is not human but a Shonokin, an ancient pre-Indian people, and that the land is theirs. However, if she and her father agree to serve his people in certain ways they will prosper like the previous owner. She refuses, and later talks to her father who relates a similar experience. They change the locks on the doors.
The climactic scene takes place that night when (spoiler) the Shonokin arrives bearing his light, which the father and daughter now see is a hand of glory (and which again paralyses them). The Shonokin says he will kill the girl’s father and that she will serve him but, before he manages to move a heavy table to crush the father, Thunstone arrives and extinguishes the hand of glory. Released, the father shoots the Shonokin with his shotgun. Thunstone states they will be safe if they bury the body at the entrance to the property.
This tale is quite well done for the most part, but the arrival of Thunstone to save the day (and give a lecture about Shonokins)—even though this is set up earlier—is contrived. How convenient he arrives at exactly the right moment!
A pity—this story could have been one of the stronger pieces in the issue.

The Ghost Punch by Hannes Bok opens with Terry the boxer getting ready for a big fight when the ghost of an old woman visits him. She tells him about a family curse, and how he will die in the third round.
The rest of the story describes the progress of the fight, and how the woman stops Terry from winning before the designated time for his death. Then (spoiler), Terry works out that he can use one of her limitations as a ghost to save himself: his “Indian” opponent’s name is “Running Water,” so she can’t pass over or through him—he keeps his opponent clinched in tight while he wins the fight. There’s a corny ending where we find out that his Native American girlfriend’s name, “Babbling Brook,” will give him continued protection.
Contrived but okay, I guess.

This issue’s Cover by Matt Fox is for the Derleth story: it is a bit too comic book for my taste.
The Interior artwork in this issue is mainly by Boris Dolgov, with him providing five out of the eight story illustrations. They are a bit of a mixed bag (the first of the Derleth illustrations is far too dark), but I liked the ones for the second Derleth and Bradbury stories, and his double-page spread for Harding’s tale is wonderful (he may not deserve a Retro Hugo Award for this piece, but he certainly deserves to be a finalist).
I’m not a fan of the two pieces by A. R. Tilburne, but Bok’s contribution is fine.
The Shape of Thrills to Come is a panel on p. 48 (see image above) that lists the titles of some of next month’s stories (including three from regulars Allison V. Harding, Manly Wade Wellman, and August Derleth).
The Eyrie is truncated this issue, and contains only two letter extracts from Manly Wade Wellman and Robert Bloch. These give background information about their stories. There is the usual Superstitions and Taboos by Irwin J. Weill, and the Weird Tales Club address listings.

This issue is worth reading for the Harding and Derleth novelettes (and the Bradbury and Wellman stories may be of interest too).  ●

_____________________

1. In Weinberg’s comments (The Weird Tales Story, p. 45) he mentions that Manly Wade Wellman’s ‘Thunstone’ stories “were to the 1940’s what de Grandin was to the 1930’s.” He adds:

One of the most interesting creations of the 1940’s Weird Tales was The Shonokins. The legend was created by Manly Wade Wellman [. . .] but within a few months, readers were writing in to The Eyrie about their knowledge of The Shonokins. Perhaps later, the same people wrote to Amazing Stories about deros.  pp. 45-46

Weinberg also mentions that an earlier ‘Mythos’ story by Derleth in the March issue, The Trail of Cthulhu, was part of a series that made up a novel of the same name. He adds that “the novelettes were undistinguished and read like parodies of Lovecraft’s work.” The Dweller in Darkness (which is not part of this series although it is a ‘Mythos’ story) isn’t specifically mentioned, but presumably Weinberg felt the same way about this piece.

2. Harding had ten consecutive stories in Weird Tales between July 1943 and January 1945: this was the ninth.

rssrss

Analog Science Fiction and Fact v140n1&2, January/February 2020

Summary:
This issue is (based on my limited recent reading of the magazine) a better than usual example. Apart from striking and redesigned (retro) cover, there are two very good alternate world stories from Harry Turtledove (The Quest for the Great Gray Mossy, a dinosaur/Moby Dick mash-up) and Eric Choi (The Greatest Day, an alternate world take on the space shuttle Columbia disaster). There are also notable stories by Sean McMullen (lost medieval tech in London) and Matthew Claxton (time travel and dinosaur pets); and good work by Adam-Troy Castro & Jerry Oltion (a classic reprint), A. J. Ward (a promising debut), Gregor Hartman, and Richard A. Lovett.
There is the usual non-fiction, which includes a guest editorial by Stanley Schmidt that introduces the reprint and mentions the magazine’s 90th year anniversary plans. There is also the 2019 Index and Analytical Laboratory ballot. [ISFDB]

_____________________

Other reviews:
Greg Hullender and Eric Wong, Rocket Stack Rank
Lähettänyt Tpi Klo, Tpi’s Reading Diary
John Loyd, There ain’t no such thing as a free lunch
Kevin P. Hallett, Tangent Online
Sam Tomaino, SFRevu
Various, Goodreads

_____________________

Fiction:
The Astronaut from Wyoming • reprint novella by Adam-Troy Castro & Jerry Oltion ∗∗∗
The Quest for the Great Gray Mossy • novelette by Harry Turtledove
Wheel of Echoes • short story by Sean McMullen +
Hive • short story by Jay Werkheiser
The Greatest Day • short story by Eric Choi
The Evolutionary Alice • short story by Rachel Rodman –
Bulkheads Make the Best Neighbors • short story by Ian Randal Strock –
Welcome to the New You: Terms and Conditions for the Icrispr Gene-Editing Kit • short story by Douglas F. Dluzen
The Grass Bows Down, The Pilgrims Walk Lightly • short story by Izzy Wasserstein
All the Turns of the Earth • short story by Matthew Claxton +
One Lost Space Suit Way • short story by A. J. Ward
Around a World in Ninety-Six Hours • short story by Wendy Nikel
Bird of a Feather • short story by Gregor Hartmann
Guns Don’t Kill • short story by Richard A. Lovett
Q-Ship Militant • short story by Joel Richards
The Shocking Truth about the Scientific Method That Privatized Schools Don’t Want You to Know
• novelette by Sarina Dorie
Hubble Rising • novelette by C. Stuart Hardwick

Non-fiction:
Cover • by Tomislav Tikulin
Interior artwork • by Kevin Speidell, Vincent Di Fate, Kurt Huggins
Guest Editorial: A Major Milestone and Places We’ve Been • by Stanley Schmidt
Making Waves: The Inventions of John W. Campbell • science essay by Alec Nevala-Lee & Edward M. Wysocki, Jr.
In Theory • poem by Rebecca Siegel
Saving Columbia: An In-Flight Options Assessment • science essay by Eric Choi
Ghost Transmission • poem by Robert Frazier
The Alternate View • science essay by John G. Cramer
In Times to Come
The Reference Library • book reviews by Don Sakers
Brass Tacks • letters
The 2019 Index
Analytical Laboratory Ballot
Upcoming Events
• by Anthony R. Lewis

_____________________

I don’t normally begin these reviews by discussing the Cover but in this case it is justified as, for their 90th anniversary year, Analog is using “retro” cover designs.1 This gives us the excellent result above, which not only sports a great piece of artwork by Tomislav Tikulin (you can’t beat dinosaurs as sailors/pirates), but also a design that addresses a persistent criticism I have, i.e. that the cover art is defaced by the story titles and the names of the authors. If I have one minor criticism it is that the “g” of the Analog and the top of the Turtledove story title crowd the artwork—why can’t they nudge the text in the top and bottom blocks up and down?2 Still, an A cover if not an A+ one.

The fiction leads off with another anniversary year feature, a classic reprint. This issue’s choice, The Astronaut from Wyoming by Adam-Troy Castro & Jerry Oltion (Analog, July-August 1999), is introduced by ex-editor Stanley Schmidt in Guest Editorial: A Major Milestone and Places We’ve Been. He discusses the magazine’s anniversary year plans before discussing the story:

“The Astronaut from Wyoming” grabbed me as soon as I started reading it, and I knew I’d found something very special. I remember telling myself, and later my wife and colleagues at Analog, “You’ll be seeing this one on the award ballots.” I said it not as a speculation, but as a mere statement of fact—and I was right, even more right than I realized at the time.
For starters, as you well know, Analog has its own awards: the annual readers’ poll called The Analytical Laboratory (or AnLab). “Astronaut” not only placed first in the novella category for 1999, but did so with the highest score, and the biggest lead over its competition, of any story I can remember during my tenure.3  p. 4

The Astronaut from Wyoming tells the story of Alexander, a baby boy born with Drier’s Syndrome:

Alexander wasn’t deformed, at least, not in the sense that I’m deformed. He had two of everything he needed two of and one of everything he needed one of. And it was all functional. It all worked. He was even beautiful, in the sense that all healthy babies are beautiful. But his head was unusually large: it mushroomed above the temples, bulging up and out like a sack stuffed with more than it was designed to hold. (The doctors had feared water on the brain, but it just happened to be the shape of the kid’s head; the only problem it caused was in delivery, and that had been handled by the cesarean.) His eyes were about three times larger, proportionally, than the norm for a baby of that size; and they were all black, with no whites showing at all. His nose, as if to compensate, was unusually small, little more than a nostrilled wrinkle in the center of his face. His mouth was a slit with thin, pursed lips. His ears were little round buds with holes.
[. . .]
It was, in short, the face of a Roswell Alien.  pp. 9-10

Of course the media go nuts, and then the lunatic fringe of the public arrive in droves at the family’s house, all of which causes problems for them. At one point the husband considers taking National Enquirer money, exchanging a story where he and his wife ‘admit’ their son is a creature from outer space for the money needed to improve their security, but she refuses.
The next part of the story charts Alexander’s childhood, which involves, among other things: watching TV and seeing Saudi astronauts on the Moon destroying the profane equipment left by previous US and Japanese missions; his father struggling to cope with the media pressure and eventually leaving; his schooldays; and a trip to Washington where he is finally interviewed by the media. The remainder of the story’s narrative arc is set up by his statement that that he wants to be an astronaut—not “the boy from space”, but “the astronaut from Wyoming”.
In the next part of the story he meets the (until then, off-stage) narrator, Colin Forsyth, a bed-bound teenage genius with muscular dystrophy (there is an explicit nod to Heinlein and Waldo). Forsyth starts mentoring Alexander to help him gain a place in the Mars mission (as well as obliquely helping out with other matters, such as his love life).
The final section details Alexander’s eventual recruitment to the Mars mission (through an unlikely equal opportunities program), the politics of his selection (aided by a contrived car accident involving one of the initial crewmembers), and (spoiler) the tragic outcome of his flight to Mars.
I can see why the story was so popular at the time, and how it was a finalist in several awards, but I found it much more of a mixed bag (and understand why, as mentioned in the afterword by the writers, Scott Edelman of SF Age rejected it). The good parts are the childhood scenes, some technically interesting passages, and that Alexander finally achieves his destiny. The parts I liked less include the near constant moan throughout the story about the tabloid media, and their horoscope and alien-obsessed readership (this is almost hectoring in places). Apart from giving the impression that all news media are like this, it seems a bit dated now (mostly because this kind of nonsense is now on the internet). Paradoxically, it also has a contemporary tone (‘Why, oh why, isn’t the world and its history the way I want it?’). The writers also grind their axes about Saudi Arabia in a couple of places, and about manifest destiny (I’m guessing, I forget) in Alexander’s final speech. More of a problem than this are the already mentioned plot twists.
Overall I liked this, but not as much as some.
A story that I did like a lot is The Quest for the Great Gray Mossy by Harry Turtledove. If you want a one line description of this, I’d say, ‘alternate-world dinosaurs do Moby Dick’. That is probably all the description that this review needs but for those who, like me, have not read the novel, the story tells of the dinosaur narrator’s (“Call me Milvil”) journey to Faraway town, where he joins a ship called Queepahd. He then meets the charismatic skipper, and learns of his obsessional quest for the eponymous whale. A previous encounter did not end well:

[The captain turned] to survey me. As he moved, his tail scraped against the deck beneath it. This tail was made from highly polished mossy bone, and attached to the stump of his gods-given appendage by a cunning arrangement of drosaw-leather straps. It was, I suppose, better than no tail at all, but not nearly so good as the one of which he’d been robbed by some catastrophe, I knew not what. That artificial tail was the most remarkable thing about him, but not by any great stretch.
He was the most weathered old salt I’d ever seen; his green-scaled hide was nearly as leathery as the straps sustaining his tail. Even his feathers were sad and draggled, showing the effect of sun and rain and storm. A great scar seamed his jaw and just missed his left eye.
That and its corresponder on the other side were two of the piercingest I’d ever encountered.4 Not to put too fine a point on it, at first glance he terrified me, a sentiment that increased on further acquaintance rather than dissipating.  p. 55

Later on in the voyage, the depths of his obsession become clear:

Captain Baja had not yet finished. He took from a pouch on his belt another goldpiece, a great fat lump of the precious metal, all stamped to perfection and worth ten times the first one; worth, to be honest, many times the concatenated wealth of most of the crewfolk.
“By the gods and by the Great Egg from which the world hatched at the beginning of days, my rogues, do ye see this?” Baja cried.
For a moment, a moment that stretched and stretched, he got no response at all. Staring at so grand and gaudy a goldpiece paralyzed us all, as the sea serpent’s venom is said to paralyze whatever it bites, leaving the victim ready to be engulfed. But then we all hissed and snarled as if we were so many middle raptors, not properly men at all. What a hornface’s meaty carcass might do for hungry animals, gold does for—or, I might say, does to—hungry people.
“This,” Baja said, “this to the huzzard-eyed rogue who spots for me the Great Gray Mossy, to be paid after we lower and harpoon and try the monster!” He nailed the second coin to the mast, well above the first. With a fierce laugh, he added, “I’ve spiked it well, I have. No thief will walk off with it in the middle of the night! “
I would not have wanted to try that, not when it ran the risk of having the skipper—who seemed to sleep very little—catch me in the act. What would he do to me, or to any other foolish, luckless would-be thief? If he only fed the miscreant to the ever-hungry sharks, the fellow might well count himself lucky.  p. 59

I liked this story for its its vivid description and antiquated language, the waspish asides about mammals (“Like ticks and mosquitos, mammals are an unfortunate part of life”), and for its sheer readability. One for my hypothetical ‘Best of the Year’ collection.

Wheel of Echoes by Sean McMullen starts with its voice-actress narrator arriving at a recording company in London, where she meets another invitee, a pompous professor of Shakespearian English. An executive called Elliot greets them, and then takes the pair to listen to, and comment on, several voice recordings:

Elliot [asked,] “What did you make of that fifth actor? Kirsty?”
“From his accent, American. Loads of hiss and crackle, so it was recorded a long time ago.”
“Professor?”
“American, backwoods northeast coast, and recorded in the 1920s. The accents of that region were an acoustic time capsule from seventeenth-century England. “
“Actually, the recording was made in London. Would you like to try again?”
“Maybe Welsh?” I replied.
“London?” said Wilson, frowning. “Probably someone who heard the 1920s recordings from the Appalachian Mountains and was using that accent to do a lash-up of a seventeenth-century English accent. Of course for Shakespeare it doesn’t work. “
“Why not?”
“Listen to Cumberbatch performing Hamlet, then go down to the corner pub and chat to one of the locals. Both are from twenty-first-century London, but they speak quite differently. The Appalachian recordings were of farmers and hunters, not Shakespeare’s actors.”
Have you ever met one of those people who gets his opinion accepted by sheer bluster? When Wilson gave an opinion, he left no room for doubt. Pompous git, I thought. Hope you just screwed up totally.
“Good point,” said Elliot.  p. 74

Elliot then shows them a large clay wheel, and explains that it is a primitive recording device which has been recently unearthed. After a demonstration of machine, which plays a primitive recording, Elliot gives them the startling information (spoiler) that the voice is Shakespeare’s. The professor does not respond well to this as it upends his beliefs.
After this climactic scene, the rest of the story is essentially an extended data dump explaining the details behind what has gone before.
Notwithstanding the story’s slightly odd (early climax) structure, I thought this was a pretty good story, especially if you are interested in stories about lost knowledge. The London setting was a bonus.

Hive by Jay Werkheiser has a three-person Earth team observing aliens on another planet: the insect-like creatures live in hives and use pheromones to communicate, and the story concerns their reactions to the human vehicle that houses the researchers. While this is intellectually interesting for the most part, I’m not clear about what happened in the final scene where (spoiler) the aliens attack the human vehicle.
I’d also point out that the strangled scientific prose doesn’t add to the story’s clarity:

Crawler pheromone trails continue bringing detail from upfield. The markers defining the new body forms suddenly disappear from the information trails. Talkers search the trails closely for more detail. Nest marker pheromones, but appended with a propyl group indicating motion across field lines. Chirality of the propyl branch point indicates motion rotationward.
A moving nest? Could the new body forms be part of a hive? Excitory pheromones roil in the nest’s air. The surge drops off rapidly as directors one by one reach the same conclusion. Inhibitory pheromones dominate, mixed with comm markers, a reminder of the body forms’ lack of identifiable pheromones. How would it self-organize? How would it communicate with other hives? No, these are simply things, predators or prey.  p. 84

Good idea and background, but an awkwardly told story.
The Greatest Day by Eric Choi5 is another alternate world story, this time about the space shuttle Columbia which, in our world, suffered wing damage on launch and broke up on re-entry. In this story’s time-line the operations personnel discover the damage and the narrative arc then works through some intriguing NASA politics, a planned rescue mission with a second shuttle, and (spoiler), when that fails, a bodged repair and attempt at re-entry:

Aboard Columbia
“Altitude 43,000 feet, speed 806 miles per hour,” Willie McCool called out.
Laurel Clark turned and saw blinking redand-white aircraft lights out the left-side window, just past Kalpana Chawla’s helmet.
“Houston, Columbia,”Ben Hernandez radioed. “It looks like we have company.”
“Roger, Columbia,” said Stephanie Wilson. “That would be Mike Bloomfield. He promised to come for you, and here he is.”
.
Mission Control Houston
A new window appeared on the screen, showing the feed from a night-vision camera aboard the T-38 chase plane flown by astronaut Mike Bloomfield. Columbia appeared as a ghostly image in shades of green against a black sky with greenish-white speckles of stars.
Audible gasps went through the room.
Some of the flight controllers stood front their consoles like an honor guard.
The hole in Columbia’s left wing was now an obsidian gash. There were black streaks over the wing and along the fuselage, and dark splatters on the left engine pod and tail—cooled residue of molten metal. The rudder and elevon were deflected, physical manifestation of the flight control system struggling to keep the ship steady.
A chill went down Wayne Hale’s spine. Columbia was mortally wounded, but she was still alive, still fighting to bring her crew home. She was simply a beautiful, magnificent, heroic flying machine.
“Don’t do it.”
Hale blinked. Had he said something aloud?
“Don’t anthropomorphize the vehicle,” said Joyce Seriale-Grush. “She doesn’t like it.”  pp. 99-100

The lean techno-thriller style used here makes this piece the polar opposite of the many bloated and navel-gazing works currently produced (and about which I regularly complain). That said, this story perhaps goes a little too far in the opposite direction (and the footnotes to the story state it is an abridged version of a much longer piece).6
If you like the movies Apollo 13, Gravity, or The Martian, then this will be right up your street. It is a very well done and would be in my ‘Year’s Best’.
The Evolutionary Alice by Rachel Rodman is a ‘Probability Zero’ mashup of Alice in Wonderland and evolutionary theory. Alice falls out with the Queen (an advocate of intelligent design), and the story finishes (spoiler) with Alice waking up and finding it was all a dream. Pah.
Bulkheads Make the Best Neighbors by Ian Randal Strock has two characters in orbit having a conversation about smashing up asteroids to form a barrier between them and the irritating groundhogs. Apart from the fact they sound like rednecks in space, this is a notion, not a story. Double pah.
Welcome to the New You: Terms and Conditions for the Icrispr Gene-Editing Kit by Douglas F. Dluzen uses various T&C’s to show us a world of gene-editing at home. Okay, I guess.

The Grass Bows Down, The Pilgrims Walk Lightly by Izzy Wasserstein has two narrative threads: the first is a moderately interesting one that has a biologist called Erika negotiating with the representative of an advanced alien species. If she can work out why the grass on the alien planet lies down in front of them as they walk towards it, the aliens will share their advanced tech. The second thread contains the now seemingly obligatory relationship/angst material about Erika’s failed relationship: they separated because she wanted to stay on Earth to reintroduce dolphins while her partner wanted to explore the Galaxy. There is also some unnecessary interstitial material—short, portentous passages of Norse myth. I was not surprised to find out from the author notes that the writer teaches writing and literature at university.

All the Turns of the Earth by Matthew Claxton starts with a young boy who is temporally displaced to prehistoric times. He learns to survive there, and eventually seeks refuge on an island. Then one day a herd of pterosaurs fly in and nest there. The young boy steals an egg and it later hatches . . . .
The second half of the story has quite a lot going on (spoiler: he is catapulted forward through time before returning years later), and some readers may struggle with a suspension of disbelief. Personally, I liked this piece, and found it an engaging tale that packs a lot of event and wonder into its short space.

One Lost Space Suit Way by A. J. Ward is about an autonomous spacesuit on an alien planet that escapes from its owner rather than go to the scrap dealer. Over the subsequent decades the suit wanders all over this world (which the settlers are terraforming), and we learn of its many adventures and experiences. During its journey animals start to use it as a home:

Once charged, I left the lumber station. I headed up the foothills into the new growth that didn’t interest the loggers. Earth plants grew here and there: graceful Frangipanis and strangling Bougainvillea amongst native nymphtrees. After several weeks I found a cat! I knew about them from back in the mines, where they watched the miners at work from the dormitory windows. The cat was black and red, and not all the red was from its fur. I opened my helmet and swallowed her up, warming my interior and providing water and air. The cat thrived and was soon joined by five kittens. During the day, she would haul the kittens by the nape of their neck to watch the forest go by from my helmet. At night, they scratched at my visor to be let out. Mother would go out and teach them to hunt, returning with red and blue stained mouths and paws, often leaving some viscera or head at my boots as an offering.  p. 135

At the end of its design life the suit returns home, and finds a “Lost” sign put up decades previously by the original owner. It eventually finds one of his descendants, and the story comes to an elegaic end.7
This is an interesting and quirky debut that probably shouldn’t work but does. I enjoyed it.
Around a World in Ninety-Six Hours by Wendy Nikel tells of an interplanetary circumnavigation race between a sister in a Venusian research balloon her brother in a high speed rover on Mars. The brother has a minor mishap that damages the rover’s gps, and then cannot be contacted.
The resolution (spoiler) revolves around the comm link that they use (apparently established just for them) and the fact that both of them know Morse code. This is well enough told but it just doesn’t suspend belief (apart from the personal comm link, the idea of the brother driving like a maniac on Mars doesn’t wash). You can also see the end coming a mile off.
Bird of a Feather by Gregor Hartmann is a partly tongue-in-cheek, partly gonzo-ish story of an astronomer whose revolutionary astronomical telescope (lasers and glitter) is sidelined by his boss so as not to upset the progress of a more expensive project. Matters look as if they are going to take a turn for the worse when the astronomer goes home to find his footloose twin brother has unexpectedly arrived:

“Yo, Frankie, long time no see.”
Rivo, his older brother, last reported adrift in Southeast Asia, had set up camp in the living room. A backpack the size of a washing machine threatened one wall. Pale purple smoke rose from a long bamboo pipe that jutted from the corner of Rivo’s mouth like a smoldering fuse.
Frank ducked under a parachute cord slung from window to bookcase. He squeezed between two flower-print sarongs and slammed his briefcase on the coffee table. “How’d you get in here?”
“It’s only four stories up. Easy peasy free climb. You really should lock your windows. Say hi to my fans.”
He was wearing a headband with a tiny camera like a high-tech miner’s lamp. Rivo said, “Camera start recording,” and a red light lit.
“Peeps! Meet Frank, my kid brother, who emerged from the same maternal womb six minutes later, after I told him it was safe to come out. Dr. Frank is a brainiac space scientist here in La La Land. He’s invented a humongo cosmic kaleidoscope, the better to spy on the Universe.”
“Knock it off,” Frank snarled. “I’m not in the mood.  p. 146

The rest of this entertaining tale tells how the visiting brother helps, with the aid of his posse, to get his brother’s telescope into orbit.
Guns Don’t Kill by Richard A. Lovett has AI meeting gun control in three short vignettes of near future armed encounters (hunting and police situations). It is wrapped up by (spoiler) two AIs discussing how to go forward with their different agendas. This is a slight piece but has a neat idea, and you could view this story as the first step on the road to the weapons in A. E. van Vogt’s ‘Weapon Shop’ series (which only work in self-defence).
Q-Ship Militant by Joel Richards tells of a sentient spaceship called Militant acting as a decoy to lure slavers. The narrative alternates between the ship’s point-of-view and that of Calderon, a human mercenary who works for it. Although this gets off to quite a good start, the ending, where they (spoiler) engage in space combat with a slaver and its two prize ships, is routine.
The Shocking Truth About the Scientific Method That Privatized Schools Don’t Want You to Know by Sarina Dorie has an awful title but is, I guess, an okay semi-satire about the travails of Ms Torres, a science teacher in a future education system where sponsors determine what is taught. Torres responds by using a lunchtime science club to teach the children proper science, and the story is about her subsequent problems with the pupils and the system.
The weak twist at the end, when she finally gives up and transfers to another school, is that it is (spoiler) funded by various crank organisations. This all seems a little far-fetched, although this perhaps easier to say from a European perspective than an American one.
I note in passing that the story does the same moaning-about-human-idiocy thing as The Astronaut from Wyoming.
Hubble Rising by C. Stuart Hardwick is another story set in the near future, and this time concerns a private space crew attempting a repair on the Hubble telescope. There are various problems for them to overcome before they can dock with the Hubble, not least its odd wobbling motion. When Kylie, a female astronaut, finally gets onboard, a previous rocket drone attached to the Hubble fires and pushes her and the telescope away from her ship.
The rest of the story is about how she saves herself, which is partly a hardware thing, and partly about her fear of heights. This unlikely phobia mars the story, as does the recounted childhood trauma that caused it (the characterisation in the story comprises this and selections from a music playlist that she plays throughout).8 Okay I suppose, just Analog-formulaic.

I’ve already mentioned the Cover above, but there are a number of pieces of Interior artwork by Kevin Speidell, Vincent Di Fate, and Kurt Huggins. I sometimes wonder why they bother with these little spot illustrations (I think they are larger and more impressive in the print edition than the ones I see on my Kindle iPad app), but I liked the Kurt Huggins one for A. J. Ward’s story.
There are three science articles, the first of which is Making Waves: The Inventions of John W. Campbell by Alec Nevala-Lee & Edward M. Wysocki, Jr. This examines Campbell’s sideline as a hobbyist inventor, and includes boring explanations about the operation of a couple of devices (one was patented, and looks related to John R. Pierce’s article in the Feb 1944 Astounding—well, it looks like it’s made from valve amplifiers, anyway).
At the end of the article we come to the nub of the matter:

Campbell never ceased to hope that a great discovery would emerge from the magazine, and this impulse—which had led him to support dianetics, L. Ron Hubbard’s “modern science of mental health,” which survives today as the Church of Scientology—contributed to his almost messianic sense of mission. He badly wanted to come up with an invention that would make him rich, not just for the obvious financial rewards, but for the legitimacy that it would confer on both him and the genre. He once wrote to his sister, “The larger-scale crackpot has to be a millionaire to be a genius, and I’ll be a millionaire.”
The reference to the “crackpot” was especially revealing. Campbell embraced a vision of scientific discovery that was produced by outsiders, as embodied by the tinkerer in his workshop, much like the heroes of his early superscience stories. For most of his life, he described himself proudly as an amateur, which led him to champion fringe beliefs while remaining out of step with the some of the most important research of his time. Campbell enjoyed visiting labs and universities, but he was too independent to participate seriously in the collective efforts—exemplified by the Manhattan Project and the space program—required to meet challenges that were too complex for any one individual. Science fiction had dreamed for decades about atomic power and the Moon landing, but when those goals were fulfilled at last, they arose from the contributions of thousands of professionals, not a few lone geniuses.
In the end, Campbell was left behind by the changing nature of scientific research. He clung throughout his life to an anachronistic notion of the heroic engineer and inventor—which, paradoxically, turned out to be one of his most significant contributions to the culture of the twentieth century. The competent man of science fiction was an unapproachable ideal, but it encouraged countless readers to enter engineering and the sciences, becoming part of the vast communal enterprise in which Campbell himself was never at home. Without the romantic vision of discovery that he presented, however, these fans might never have decided to devote their lives to science. Its values may have prevented Campbell from becoming the inventor he wanted to be, but the community that he created instead turned out to be his one great invention.  p. 50

It’s worth reading the article as context for this last passage.
Saving Columbia: An In-Flight Options Assessment by Eric Choi is an interesting follow up essay to The Greatest Day, the author’s story in this issue. It is an account of the Columbia space shuttle accident and the findings of the subsequent inquiry (this includes material about the options covered in the story). It ends with this:

[The] conclusion of “The Greatest Day” is absolutely the most optimistic possible outcome of the repair scenario. That is a rather sobering thought.  p. 107

The Alternate View by John G. Cramer is a short column about the irreconcilability of quantum theory and general relativity that mostly went over my head (my physical science degree’s quantum theory semester was a long, long time ago) but the conclusion is clear enough:

Contemporary theoretical physics finds itself in a difficult situation: it has become clear that the workhorse theories of QED and QFT, pillars of the Standard Model of Particle Physics, are fundamentally flawed, in some cases give ridiculously wrong predictions, and are in urgent need of replacement. However, no such replacement is on the horizon. New approaches are badly needed.  p. 118

The Reference Library by Don Sakers starts with a short introduction about the lack of empathy in SF, especially in war/conflict fiction, before reviewing four books that could be unsympathetically described as ‘space opera/SF combat filler’ (they seem mostly about humans fighting aliens, or each other, in space). My eyes started glazing over midway through the third review.
Fortunately, there are also four anthology reviews of more interest.9
Brass Tacks has three letters, one of which defends John W. Campbell against inappropriate comments made by Jeanette Ng at last year’s Worldcon Hugo Award ceremony.
There are two poems in this issue (neither of which did anything for me), In Theory by Rebecca Siegel and Ghost Transmission by Robert Frazier, and the usual departments, In Times to Come, and Upcoming Events by Anthony R. Lewis.
As it is the first issue of the year there is also The 2019 Index, and the Analytical Laboratory Ballot.

In conclusion, this issue is the usual wild mix of quality that I’ve grown to expect from Analog, from material that is very good to work (almost always at shorter lengths) that is just terrible. This time around there is a lot more good work than bad, and this issue is perhaps the best of the half dozen or so I’ve read over the last few years.

PS As you can see at the top of the page, I’ve decided to start adding a summary. This is not only for another type of post I intend doing, but also because it occurred to me that maybe not everyone wants to read five thousand word reviews about a single issue of a magazine (I’m not sure I’d want to myself).  ●

_____________________

1. Whether they will use the design above on all of this year’s Analog covers (I hope so) or whether they will use a variety (more likely) remains to be seen. This one hails from the early 1960s:

If they cycle through all the cover designs, then we can probably expect something like this for the next issue:

2. Let the cover art breathe (LHS original/RHS edit):

3. Although The Astronaut from Wyoming won that year’s Analytical Laboratory Best Novella category it didn’t do quite so well elsewhere. Its other award wins and nominations are listed on the story’s ISFDB page.

4. Harry Turtledove’s phrase “[they] were two of the piercingest I’d ever encountered” is not the most elegant I’ve encountered.

5. Another 90th anniversary innovation is the production of a podcast: Eric Choi’s The Greatest Day is here.

6. Eric Choi kindly provided (email, December 2019) this background information about The Greatest Day:

The story is adapted from a novelette called “A Sky and a Heaven” that was written for an anthology called Other Covenants: Alternate Histories of the Jewish People edited by Andrea Lobel and Mark Shainblum. There are two main differences between the versions for Analog and Other Covenants. First, the anthology version is very much centered on Israeli astronaut Ilan Ramon, who in my alternate history is shot down during the 1981 Israeli air strike against the Osirak nuclear reactor in Iraq and ends up years later in America as the lead NASA flight controller for the ill-fated Columbia mission (instead of Wayne Hale in the Analog story). The second significant thread in the anthology version concerns an Israeli scientist and Holocaust survivor named Joachim Joseph, who as a child at Bergen-Belsen was given a secret bar mitzvah ceremony and entrusted with a miniature Torah scroll that decades later flew aboard Columbia with Ilan Ramon (or in my story, the fictional Israeli astronaut Yael Dahan). So, the Analog short story is essentially a standalone adaptation of the engineering elements of the novelette.

7. If you like autonomous spacesuit stories I recommend Iain M. Banks Descendant (Tales from the Forbidden Planet, Titan, 1987).

8. If you use music playlists to characterise the people in your story, can I suggest that you don’t pick One Way or Another by Blondie (a sixty-year-old man’s choice) for a young, female, future astronaut.

9. Sakers’ comment about the anthology Footprints in the Stars’ striking cover made me track it down on Amazon:

This is a much cleaner cover layout than you normally get from US books, and is closer to UK design. I like it. Yes, I am aware of the irony of this given my comments about type defacing cover artwork.
I ended up buying the first book in this anthology series (another striking cover):

If We Had Known, edited by Mike McPhail (eSpec Books, 2017) is available on Amazon UK/ USA.  ●

Edited 10th July 2021: minor text edits.

rssrss

Astounding Science-Fiction v32n06, February 1944

ISFDB
Archive.org

Other reviews:1
Alva Rogers, A Requiem for Astounding  p. 129-134

_____________________

Editor, John W. Campbell Jr.; Assistant Editor, Catherine Tarrant

Fiction:
Off the Beam • novelette by George O. Smith ∗∗
Though Dreamers Die • novelette by Lester del Rey
Plague • novelette by Murray Leinster –
Taboo • short story by Fritz Leiber
The Anarch • novelette by Malcolm Jameson
Catch That Rabbit • short story by Isaac Asimov –

Non-fiction:
Cover • by William Timmins
Interior artwork • by Paul Orban (x5), Smith (x2), A. Williams (x8)
Practically Nothing • editorial by John W. Campbell, Jr.
In Times to Come
Sensory Range
• science essay
Brass Tacks • letters
“Eyes to See” • science essay
Universes to Order • science essay by John R. Pierce [as by J. J. Coupling]
The Plurality of Worlds • science essay by Willy Ley
The Analytical Laboratory: December 1943

_____________________

Off the Beam by George O. Smith is another of his ‘Venus Equilateral’ series, and it opens with Don Channing (the relay station’s Director of Communications) on a spaceship trip to Earth. When he receives a telegram from Venus Equilateral he has a short conversation with the steward, speculating that one day they’ll be able to reply to the station: this exchange telegraphs the story’s arc (one of the previous stories dealt with the reverse problem, of Venus Equilateral’s inability to urgently contact a ship in flight).
Shortly after their exchange the ship is hit by a meteor which damages the engine controls. The ship undergoes a 10g acceleration for ten hours and they fly past Earth.
When Channing recovers consciousness he explores the ship and finds many casualties and  fatalities floating around in the now zero gee spaceship. He goes to the surgery and finds the ship’s doctor patching up some injured nurses, before going down to the engineering section. Channing finds the repair crews trying to get the normal lighting back on, as well as restoring artificial gravity by decelerating the ship.
The rest of the story (spoiler) is a nuts and bolts (or anode and cathode) account of how Channing and crew turn the ship into a massive electron gun which will fire a crude communication beam at Venus Equilateral. Some of the scientific detail I understood, some of it I didn’t (the explanation about the ship’s speed and where they think they are heading made no sense). The story does, however, give you an idea of the vast distances covered a high gee acceleration.
This story is no worse and no better than the others in the series.

Though Dreamers Die by Lester del Rey has a dull ‘man waking up’ beginning which eventually reveals that Jorgen the narrator is on a spaceship, and is being revived by five robots. We learn he is the only human left alive on the ship as the other passengers have succumbed to a plague that killed all human life in the solar system. Later on in the story we find that Jorgen has early signs of the disease too, so the ship’s flight has been in vain.
When the robots discover a habitable planet the decision is made to land:

It was in many ways a world superior to that his race had always known, remarkably familiar, with even a rough resemblance between plant forms here and those he had known. They had come past five suns and through ninety years of travel at nearly the speed of light to a haven beyond their wildest imaginings, where all seemed to be waiting them, untenanted but prepared.
Outside, the new world waited expectantly. And inside, to meet that invitation, there were only ghosts and emptied dreams, with one slowly dying man to see and to appreciate. The gods had prepared their grim jest with painful attention to every detail needed to make it complete.  p. 46-47

They land near a perfect natural harbour, and (robot) Five describes a vision of the city that could have been built there. Jorgen then realises that man’s dream will only live on through the robots, so he orders them to forget humankind and build their own civilization. He later leaves on the ship but, just before that, there is a moving scene where he notices that Five has kept a picture of the planets of the solar system. Quite a good mood piece.
I’ve mentioned before that del Rey seems to be two writers in one: the first does more sober and (comparatively) literary pieces like this story, The Faithful (Astounding, April 1938), and Whom the Gods Love (Astounding, June 1943); the second does stories like Nerves (Astounding, September 1942).

Plague by Murray Leinster begins with a reserve officer called Ben Sholto—dishonourably transferred for using his common sense rather than blindly following orders—contacted by the space service, his previous employers, and put back on active duty. He is told to report any ship trying to leave a quarantined planet called Pharona. When he sees one he contacts HQ, who dispatch a destroyer as Sholto’s ship is unarmed. Meanwhile, Sholto establishes contact with the fugitive ship, and finds that his ex-girlfriend is on it.
This is a slick start to the story but thereafter it goes downhill, partly due to the long digressions at the start of each chapter that show how stupidly bureaucratic the administration has become. All of this is done in a smart-alecky style reserved for paper-pushers by SF writers:

A space cruiser resignedly took up post in an orbit about the dark star Lambda Bootes. It would circle that star for six months and be relieved. Forty years before, a subcommissioner had intended to change cruisers at that place, and commanded that one be there to meet him. He had later changed his plan of travel, but there was no order to withdraw the cruiser posted at the rendezvous. The first cruiser asked for relief after six months of utterly useless waiting.
It was relieved by a cruiser under orders to take its place. Seventy-eight cruisers, in turn, had uselessly swung about the dark star for six months each because of an order given forty years before and never rescinded.  p. 71

The other major drawback is the story’s ridiculous plot, which involves Sholto’s ex-girlfriend, Sally, having the plague (which causes her to glow due to some radioactive or energy effect). Eventually, Sholto realises that the plague isn’t a disease but that an alien has taken up residence in her. As he tries to exorcise the alien, there is much pseudoscientific gibberish involving positrons, electrons, and insulated chairs.
The story comes to a head when the Navy catch up with Sholto (now under a sentence of death for some earlier misdemeanour) just as he is away to transmit the cure to the rest of the Galaxy.
An awful story.

Taboo by Fritz Leiber begins with a bit of a Gather, Darkness! vibe, when an outlaw called Arnine seeks sanctuary at the Outsiders, a pseudo-religious order that has renounced the benefits of atomic power and the universal transmutators. Although these latter should have made Earth a paradise, it is in an almost post-holocaust state.
Seafor, the chief of the Outsiders, then finds a young boy of noble birth outside. Although the boy had previously been kidnapped by Arnine, he also demands refuge. Then the boy’s father turns up, demanding his release . . . .
This has an interesting background but the story isn’t developed, and it comes to a juddering halt. Disappointing.

Last year I was particularly impressed by Malcolm Jameson’s story Blind Alley (Unknown Worlds, June 1943) and, for the majority of its length, I thought that The Anarch was going to be its equal.

The story starts with Medical Inspector Garrison, who is struggling to issue a death certificate for a patient who has died from a condition that is supposed to be treatable:

He was in no ordinary dilemma, and was beginning to know it. It was more a being caught between two opposing sets of antlers bristling with scores of prickly points. The death, as far as that went, of the obscure Leona McWhisney meant nothing to a seasoned doctor. People were dying at Sanitar all the time. But they were dying in approved ways that could be reported on approved forms. Her departure from the normal played hob with the whole Autarchian set-up. Garrison groaned aloud, for he was, until that moment, a thoroughly indoctrinated, obedient, unthinking cog in the vast bureaucracy that was Autarchia. Not once in the thirty years of his life until then had the Code failed him. He had never doubted for an instant that that wonderful document was the omniscient, infallible, unquestionable guide to human behavior. It was unthinkable that he could doubt it now. And yet—
Yet Leona McWhisney was dead.  p. 124

But there were only three forms [. . .], for there were only three possible ways for an Autarchian to die. The most common—reportable on the gray form—was by euthanasia after recommendation of a board of gerocomists, and approved by the Bureau of Population Control. Elderly citizens beyond further salvage, or those in excess of the Master Plan were disposed of in this fashion. Then there was the yellow form that was employed when violent accidents occurred. Even the all-wise framers of the Code had not known how to recapitate or re-embowel a citizen thus torn apart. Last of all there was provided the scarlet form for the use of the executioner at Penal House after the monitors had finished dealing with dissenters. That one was on the road to obsolescence, for in recent generations there had been few who refused to abide by the Code, or scoffed at it. The trait of rebelliousness had been pretty well bred out of the race.  p. 125

Garrison then goes to the diagnostat department to get the dead patient’s diagnosis confirmed; while he is there, the technician tells him of a number of similar fatalities from supposedly non-fatal illnesses.
When Garrison goes to the mess hall for food that evening, there is an announcement that puts this story solidly into proto-1984 territory:

A fanfare of trumpets warned that something big and unusual was about to come through. He got to his feet and stood at attention. A uniformed figure appeared on the screen.
“By order of his supremacy, the Autarch,” he proclaimed in a deep, sonorous voice. “Effective immediately, those provisions of the Social and Penal Code requiring attendance during Renovation Hour at Social Halls is suspended for officials of C.I. one-thirty or better. Such officers may attend or not, as they choose—”
Garrison blinked. He had never heard the word “choose” before and had but the faintest idea of what it might mean. More obscure ones were to follow.
“If they so elect, they may stay within their own quarters or visit other officers of similar rank in theirs. Restrictions as to topics of conversation are lifted during this period. Officers will not be required to discuss assigned cultural subjects, but may talk freely on any topic they prefer. Monitors will make note of this alteration in the Codes.
“The order has been published. Carry on.”
The light failed, and with it the figure on the screen. Garrison continued to stand for about a minute, entirely at sea as to what the communication he had just heard meant. Such words as “elect,” “choose,” and “prefer” had long since become obsolete if not actually forbidden. The concept of choice was wholly absent under the autocracy. It never occurred to one that there could be such a thing—it was inconsistent with orderly life. One simply obeyed the Code, which always said “you shall.” To think of anything different was rank heresy and treason, and subject to the severest penalties. Garrison puzzled over the order a moment and gave it up. No doubt there would be further clarification later. Perhaps the Propag lecturer of the evening would have a word to say about it. The order would be carried out of course, but to Garrison’s well-disciplined mind it had the bad fault of ambiguity.  pp. 129-130

Later in the story, Garrison takes an elevated monorail home to his dorm. As he travels over the fields below he sees they are blighted. When Garrison notices an unusually healthy section, a senior medic sitting behind him starts a conversation about the similarities between the problems in the fields below and the growing number of medical problems in the larger population. Garrison is scared by the treasonous nature of these comments, but his bluster is met by the senior medic’s revelation that his heart is failing and he likely faces euthanasia at an imminent board hearing. Before they part, he tells Garrison that a man called Clevering is the agronomist in charge of the healthy section of field.

That evening at the social hour, no-one is brave enough to talk freely about the problems that their society faces.
The next day Garrison goes to work and finds a surge in admissions—and notices Clevering’s name among them. Garrison finds the agronimist close to death but, before he dies, Garrision finds out that he has conducted illegal agricultural research, and that he also has a small library of forbidden books. After Clevering dies, Garrison goes to recover them:

The book he came to love most of all was a very slim one—a little volume on “Liberty” by a John Stuart Mill. His limited vocabulary troubled him much at first, but he shrewdly arrived at the meanings of such words as “choice” and “freedom” by considering the context. He discovered to his delight that there were shades between good and bad. There were the words “better” and “best” as well as the bare, unqualified “good.”  p. 141

Garrison starts making experimental drugs and treats his patients with them. Eventually, he begins to cure them. Then the Monitors come for him.
The next part of the story involves his torture and maltreatment by the Monitors, which, initially, ties in with the previous arc of the story. The rest of it though, where Garrison is taken to see the Autarch,2 is where everything falls flat.
Garrison is questioned by the supreme leader, and does not mince his words when asked about what is wrong with the system. However, after a few pages of mildly adversarial talking heads material about democracy, etc., they end up working together. The story ends with them issuing conflicting codes, to force people to learn to think for themselves, and to compromise.
This ending is unconvincingly consensual (as well as being far too talky) but, for most of its length, this story is a very good piece about totalitarian society, and covers much of the same subject matter as George Orwell’s later 1984 (life in a regimented society, methods of control, what happens to language, etc.) The Autarch is worth reading, if only to gain an appreciation of what this writer might have produced had he not died of cancer in his early fifties.3

I didn’t much like the last ‘Donovan & Powell’ story from Isaac Asimov that I read, and thought even less of Catch That Rabbit. In this one the pair are on a mining asteroid where Dave the robot (who is running six subsidiary units) periodically goes into a fugue state which causes him to march the robots up and down the tunnels. Eventually, and after a lot of theorising, and a contrived situation which puts the two men in peril, we find the problem is that (spoiler) Dave giving orders to six other robots causes a malfunction, but giving orders to five doesn’t. The reader has no chance of working this out before the solution is presented on a plate.
The story is also hugely padded, and has completely unconvincing dialogue and interaction (you sometimes wonder if Asimov had ever listened to anyone other than obnoxious teenagers):

Michael Donovan’s face went beety, “For the love of Pete, Greg, get realistic. What’s the use of adhering to the letter of the specifications and watching the test go to pot? It’s about time you got the red tape out of your pants and went to work.”  p. 159

Powell groaned heavily behind a noticeably insincere smile. The unwritten motto of United States Robot and Mechanical Men Corp. was well-known: “No employee makes the same mistake twice. He is fired the first time.”
Aloud he said, “You’re as lucid as Euclid with everything except facts. You’ve watched that robot group for three shifts, you redhead, and they did their work perfectly. You said so yourself. What else can we do?”  p. 160

Powell scowled at the ceiling and pulled at his brown mustache. “I’ll tell you what, Mike. We’ve been stuck with pretty lousy jobs in our time, but this takes the iridium asteroid.”  p. 160

Clunk, clunk, clunk. This one is just awful, even worse than the Leinster.

This issue’s Cover by William Timmins (for Smith’s story) is of interest for the combination of realistic and abstract elements (the diagrams and the tear at the bottom of the page). Timmins had flirted with this kind of thing on the June 1943 cover, and would use the technique again. It’s a bit of a muddy affair nonetheless.
The Interior artwork is again hobbled by the fact that it is mostly spot work. Out of the three artists that contribute to this issue—Paul Orban, Smith, and A. Williams, the latter provides the best work (although even some of his is so-so; but the one on p. 132 is pretty good, as is the one on p. 99, which looks like a black and white Timmins).
Smith’s and Orban’s robots look very primitive and old-fashioned, and come from a future where they still use large rivets.
Practically Nothing by John W. Campbell, Jr. is in the editorial slot but is really a science essay that discusses the difficulty of testing equipment which requires a hard vacuum. It goes on to state that this would be easier on the Moon or in space.
In Times to Come talks about the improbability of mankind falling victim to alien microorganisms before ceding that it may happen on rare occasions and cause mutations. This preamble introduces one of next month’s stories, The Contract by E. Mayne Hull (who Campbell refers to as “he” funnily enough—a slip of the tongue I presume, as I think he knew that the writer was A. E. van Vogt’s wife).
Sensory Range is a half-page filler about the human auditory range, and suggests that, “The inhabitants of alien planets may not be able to speak our language, but they’ll hear it, and we’ll hear theirs.”
The Brass Tacks column contains four letters this month, including two from future SF writers Chan Davis and Frank Robinson.
Davis, of Sandwich, Mass., opens the column with his likes and dislikes (currently, his ratings are letters, he hasn’t yet graduated to the later 1 to 10 scale with decimals): he gives the August instalment of Moore’s Judgement Night an A+, and Leiber’s The Mutant’s Brother an A.
Virgil Utter,4 of Modesto, CA, also liked Moore’s piece best, and had this to say:

For her first stf epic Miss Moore has outdone herself. By far the most beautiful piece of writing this year has produced; better even than the marvelous “There Shall Be Darkness.” My favorite science-fiction stories embody certain little fantasy suggestions as are in this story. Little things like the ilar and its behavior, the visit to Cyrille—that was a real thrill!—and all the tiny fantasies that transpired there, and I especially enjoy going down into some deep underground passage that simultaneously holds so much of death and an equal amount of life. These are perfect touches, but they alone could not sell me on a story so completely. Moore has dug up a rather ancient plot, smoothed it into a new setting, and shined it up like new. The wonderful description is, to be VERY trite, out of this world.  p. 96

Frank M. Robinson, of Sacremento, IL, also thought highly of Moore’s novel (“outstanding”) and liked the other stories too. However, he criticises the artwork:

With Rogers gone, your covers have slipped tremendously. With Schneeman gone, so have your interior drawings. Williams—or Kolliker—is simply ng. Ditto for Orban and Fax. Kramer is so-so. One could hope for eventual inclusion of Virgil Finlay, Leydenfrost, Charles Chickering, or practically anybody else besides the Fax-Kolliker-Kramer-Orban-and-Williams quintuplets.  p. 98

He then asks about the future publishing plans of Street & Smith:

As a humble request: May we expect Astounding—and likewise Unknown—to return to the large-size magazine after the war is over and the paper shortage remedied? At least, here’s hoping.  p. 98

Campbell replies:

Ye Ed is doing no more prophesying for the duration; Astounding and Unknown may reappear in large size A. T. W., but don’t quote me! At present, paper is so tight, and gets tighter so suddenly, that the October Unknown carries an editorial about the new, small-size Unknown—but, after that issue was printed, our paper was cut again. Sorry—there won’t be any new Unknown for the duration! So I quit prophecy.  p. 97

The last letter is from John Samuel, from Evanston, IL, and comments further on the early meat replacement research I mentioned in an earlier review:

About that yeast—it has been my good (?) fortune to taste some of it. The biochemistry department of the University of Illinois tried out some of the Anheuser-Busch product on its students this summer. It tastes quite well undiluted—much like sodium glutamate, which is like a poor imitation of chicken soup. But it is dry and salty, and when diluted it is rather nauseating. However, it can undoubtedly be improved. As to its effects—none in particular except it increases purine metabolism—i.e., uric acid output.
I think readers of Astounding might like to know about this first nonagricultural food.  p. 98

“Eyes to See” is a short photo essay about x-ray and electron microscopes, which is followed by Universes to Order by John R. Pierce, an eye-glazingly dull piece about electron multipliers and amplifiers.

The Plurality of Worlds by Willy Ley is about the development of various cosmological theories, most of which are concerned with the construction of the solar system and the relative positions of Earth, Sun, planets and stars.
At the end of the article there is a mention of the discovery of a third extra solar planet and that, at the time of writing, there is no theory if planetary formation.

The Analytical Laboratory: December 1943 was discussed in the review of that issue, although I’m happy to moan once more about Anthony Boucher’s We Print the Truth coming in second (and not winning last year’s Retro Hugo for novella).5

A very mixed issue with some poor work from name writers. Worth digging out for the Jameson, though.  ●

_____________________

1. Alva Rogers hasn’t got anything to say about this issue in A Requiem for Astounding, but he does have something to say about the year:

Of all the years commonly considered Golden, 1944 was the least memorable; the outstanding stories that were published only pointed up the disappointing quality of the bulk of what was left. In some respects, 1944 can be regarded as a bridge between two peaks; the peak 1940 to 1943, and the peak 1945 to 1950. At any rate, the slump was short lived and things began to pick up considerably from 1945 on.  p. 134

2. I’m not sure why Jameson’s story is called The Anarch when the references in the story are to “The Autarch”.

3. Malcolm Jameson’s Wikipedia page. If I’m ever in New York, I’ll lay some flowers at his grave.

4. Virgil Utter later wrote various non-fiction pieces, as well as compiling a few bibliographies (including Moore and Kuttner among others). His ISFDB page is here.

5. The Analytical Laboratory results for this issue appeared in the June 1944 edition (late, according to Campbell, due to publication schedule changes):

At least the readers got the first and last places right, even if the Leinster snuck by them.  ●

rssrss

1945 Retro Hugo Awards

 

This isn’t a review, just a short note to mention that I’ve swapped the “1944 Retro Hugos” page that was in the menu above for a “1945 Retro Hugos” one. This page has a sortable table of stories that are eligible for next year’s (2020) Retro Hugo awards. More importantly, it has links to copies of the stories on the Internet Archive if you want to read them.

1944 (the qualifying year for the 1945 Retro Hugos) features, among other works, Olaf Stapledon’s Sirius, Theodore Sturgeon’s Killdozer, C. L. Moore’s No Woman Born, Fredric Brown’s Arena, a couple of ‘Foundation’ tales from Isaac Asimov, four of Clifford D. Simak’s ‘City’ series (including Huddling Place and Desertion) and many, many stories from Ray Bradbury. Add your favourites in the comments below (as well as anything I haven’t listed*).

* I’m still adding publications but hope to complete it soon (blame the delay on my other job as a part-time butler for two cats).

 

rssrss

The Best Science Fiction of the Year #6, edited by Terry Carr, 1977

ISFDB

Other reviews:1
Charles N. Brown, Isaac Asimov’s Science Fiction Magazine (January/February 1978).
John O’Neill, Black Gate

_____________________

Editor, Terry Carr

Fiction:2
I See You • short story by Damon Knight ∗∗∗∗
The Phantom of Kansas • novelette by John Varley
Seeing • novelette by Harlan Ellison
The Death of Princes • short story by Fritz Leiber +
The Psychologist Who Wouldn’t Do Awful Things to Rats • novelette by James Tiptree, Jr.
The Eyeflash Miracles • novella by Gene Wolfe
An Infinite Summer • novelette by Christopher Priest
The Highest Dive • short story by Jack Williamson
Meathouse Man • novelette by George R. R. Martin +
Custer’s Last Jump • novelette by Steven Utley and Howard Waldrop
The Bicentennial Man • novelette by Isaac Asimov

Non-fiction:
Introduction • by Terry Carr
Story Introductions • by Terry Carr
The Science Fiction Year • essay by Charles N. Brown
Recommended Reading1976 • essay by Terry Carr

_____________________

As I’ve previously read two ‘Best of the Year’ volumes for 1976 (as well as the Nebula Award Winners collection), the only stories I haven’t read in this anthology are the Varley, Leiber, Tiptree Jr., Wolfe, and Martin. The reviews of these stories are immediately below; the reviews of the stories I’ve read previously are pasted in at the end for the convenience of anyone who hasn’t yet read them.

John Varley makes a third appearance in the ‘Best Of’ volumes with another of his ‘Eight Worlds’ tales, a series which is set in a solar system where the Invaders have thrown humankind off of Earth to live in the rest of the solar system—an unrecognisable future of disneyland habitats, memory recordings, resurrection by cloning, sex-changes, and much else.
The Phantom of Kansas is set on Luna, and opens with a memory recording scene similar to that in Overdrawn at the Memory Bank (Galaxy, May 1976; The 1977 Annual World’s Best SF, edited by Donald Wollheim). The difference this time is that Fox, the female narrator, isn’t doing a routine update but is there to replace a previous recording—her bank has been robbed and the memory cubes deposited there destroyed. These robberies are sometimes used as cover by killers so they can permanently murder others, i.e., they kill the person and their memories.
When Fox wakes up she discovers, of course, that she has been dead for two and a half years, and murdered three times. As none of the previous three versions of her have made any subsequent memory recordings she is no more knowledgeable than they were when they woke up:

[Fox 3] took extraordinary precautions to stay alive. More specifically, she tried to prevent circumstances that could lead to her murder. It worked for five lunations. She died as the result of a fight, that much was certain. It was a very violent fight, with blood all over the apartment. The police at first thought she must have fatally injured her attacker, but analysis showed all the blood to have come from her body.
So where did that leave me, Fox 4? An hour’s careful thought left the picture gloomy indeed. Consider: each time my killer succeeded in murdering me, he or she learned more about me. My killer must be an expert on Foxes by now, knowing things about me that I myself did not know. Such as how I handle myself in a fight. I gritted my teeth when I thought of that. [My mother] told me that Fox 3, the canniest of the lot, had taken lessons in self-defense. Karate, I think she said. Did I have the benefit of it? Of course not. If I wanted to defend myself I had to start all over, because those skills died with Fox 3.  p. 25

She later discusses her security situation with a police detective called Isadora, who fills her in on the case, and urges her to stay inside her apartment while the police computer programs track the killer down. Fox reluctantly agrees to this, and thereafter spends her time composing a “weather symphony” for the Kansas disneyland (a huge simulated environment under the Moon’s surface).
Fox also discusses her case with the Central Computer:

“The average person on Luna deals with me on the order of twenty times per day, many of these transactions involving a routine epidermal sample for positive genalysis. By matching these transactions with the time and place they occurred, I am able to construct a dynamic model of what has occurred, what possibly could have occurred, and what cannot have occurred. With suitable peripheral programs I can refine this model to a close degree of accuracy. For instance, at the time of your first murder I was able to assign a low probability to ninety-nine point nine three percent of all humans on Luna as being responsible. This left me with a pool of 210,000 people who might have had a hand in it. This is merely from data placing each person at a particular place at a particular time. Further weighting of such factors as possible motive narrowed the range of prime suspects. Do you wish me to go on?
“No, I think I get the picture. Each time I was killed you must have narrowed it more. How many suspects are left?”
“You are not phrasing the question correctly. As implied in my original statement, all residents of Luna are still suspects. But each has been assigned a probability, ranging from a very large group with a value of 1027 to twenty individuals with probabilities of 13%.”
The more I thought about that, the less I liked it.
“None of those sound to me like what you’d call a prime suspect.”
“Alas, no. This is a very intriguing case, I must say.”
“I’m glad you think so.”
“Yes,” it said, oblivious as usual to sarcasm. “I may have to have some programs re-written. We’ve never gone this far without being able to submit a ninety percent rating to the Grand Jury Data Bank.”  p. 33-34

Eventually, Fox’s completes her weather symphony, and subsequently insists on attending the premiere. While she watches the performance she notices someone interfering with the programming and realises it must be the murderer. Fox sneaks off alone armed only with a knife to one of the  weather-control locations.
The identity of this murderer provides a clever surprise for the reader, and leads to a story resolution which ties in not only the original bank robbery but several other threads: the Fox 3 murder scene, the draconian population laws of the Eight Worlds, and the omniscience and compassion of the Central Computer. There is also a . . . ah, interesting sex scene.
I should note in passing that while Fox is cooped up in her apartment we get a lot of ‘Eight Worlds’ background (there is information about the disneylands, population laws, etc.), as well as some philosophical reflection about the nature of personal identity in a world of replacement bodies:

Human consciousness is linear, along a timeline that has a beginning and an end. If you die after a recording, you die, forever and with no reprieve. It doesn’t matter that a recording of you exists and that a new person with your memories to a certain point can be created; you are dead. Looked at from a fourth-dimensional viewpoint, what memory recording does is to graft a new person onto your lifeline at a point in the past. You do not retrace that lifeline and magically become that new person. I, Fox 4, was only a relative of that long-ago person who had her memories recorded. And if I died it was forever. Fox 5 would awaken with my memories to date, but I would be no part of her. She would be on her own.
Why do we do it? I honestly don’t know. I suppose that the human urge to live forever is so strong that we’ll grasp at even the most unsatisfactory substitute. At one time people had themselves frozen when they died, in the hope of being thawed out in a future when humans knew how to reverse death. Look at the Great Pyramid in the Egypt disneyland if you want to see the sheer size of that urge.
So we live our lives in pieces. I could know, for whatever good it would do me, that thousands of years from now a being would still exist who would be at least partly me. She would remember exactly the same things I remembered of her childhood; the trip to Archimedes, her first sex change, her lovers, her hurts and her happiness. If I had another recording taken, she would remember thinking the thoughts I was thinking now. And she would probably still be stringing chunks of experience onto her life, year by year. Each time she had a new recording that much more of her life was safe for all time. There was a certain comfort in knowing that my life was safe up until a few hours ago, when the recording was made.  pp. 27-28

The best of the ‘Eight Worlds’ stories I’ve reread so far.

The Death of Princes by Fritz Leiber is a conversational tale in which the narrator tells of a lifelong, if intermittent, friendship with a man called François Broussard. Broussard is known for being able to answer almost any maths question (but needs between ten and twelve hours to do so), and has other peculiarities as well. These latter include a recurrent dream about swimming around in space surrounded by various large objects, and a fascination with a observing a particular part of the night sky:

Speaking of the astral reminds me that there was one particular part of the heavens that Francois Broussard was especially interested in and somehow associated with himself—particularly in the late 1940’s and early 1950’s, when he was living in Arizona with its clear, starry nights that showed the Milky Way; he had some sort of occult coterie there, we learned; he’d stare and stare at it (the spot in the heavens) with and without a telescope or binoculars through the long desert nights, like a sailor on a desert island watching for a ship along a sea lane it might follow. In fact, he once spotted a new comet there, a very faint one. Not very surprising in an astrologer, what with their signs, or constellations of the zodiac, but this spot was halfway around the heavens from his natal sign, which was Pisces, or Aquarius rather by his way of figuring it.  p. 99

Eventually (spoiler), he is linked to Haley’s Comet, and a “seed of the Gods” idea. This isn’t particularly convincing, but the pleasure of the story is in the narrator’s erudite and atmospheric account of the recent historical periods which he and Broussard pass through. There is also a lot of literary name-dropping (which, among the mainstream names, includes five mentions of Heinlein—and two of his novels—and a one of Willy Ley).

The Psychologist Who Wouldn’t Do Awful Things to Rats by James Tiptree, Jr. gets off to an engrossing start with an account of a post grad student, Tilly Lipsitz, who works in a university psychology department where they vivisect animals. The sadistic ghastliness of this environment is chillingly and hypnotically described (at times I forgot I was reading, a rare event), and it soon becomes clear that Lipsitz has problems with the way they treat the animals. Both his suspected views, and lack of progress in his experimental work, result in a car crash interview with his supervising professor, one of the few moments of light relief—if you can call black comedy that—in the story:

And to his utter horror [Lipsitz’s] mind has emptied itself, emptied itself of everything except the one fatal sentence which he now hears himself helplessly launched toward. “Take us here. I mean, it’s a good principle to attack problems to which one has easy access, which are so to speak under our noses, right? So. For example, we’re psychologists. Supposedly dedicated to some kind of understanding, helpful attitude toward the organism, toward life. And yet all of us down here—and in all the labs I’ve heard about—we seem to be doing such hostile and rather redundant work. Testing animals to destruction, that fellow at Princeton. Proving how damaged organisms are damaged, that kind of engineering thing. Letting students cut or shock or starve animals to replicate experiments that have been done umpteen times. What I’m trying to say is, why don’t we look into why psychological research seems to involve so much cruelty—I mean, aggression? We might even . . .”
He runs down then, and there is a silence in which he becomes increasingly aware of Welch’s breathing.
“Doctor Lipsitz,” the older man says hoarsely, “are you a member of the SPCA?”  p. 125

After this, Lipsitz returns to the labs, where the horror continues:

A wailing sound alerts him to the fact that he has arrived at the areaway. A truck is offloading crates of cats, strays from the pound.
“Give a hand, Tilly! Hurry up!”
It’s Sheila, holding the door for Jones and Smith. They want to get these out of sight quickly, he knows, before some student sees them. Those innocent in the rites of pain. He hauls a crate from the tailboard.
“There’s a female in here giving birth,” he tells Sheila. “Look.” The female is at the bottom of a mess of twenty emaciated struggling brutes. One of them has a red collar.
“Hurry up, for Christ’s sake.” Sheila waves him on.
“But . . .”
When the crates have disappeared inside he does not follow the others in but leans on the railing, lighting a cigarette. The kittens have been eaten, there’s nothing he can do. Funny, he always thought that females would be sympathetic to other females. Shows how much he knows about Life. Or is it that only certain types of people empathize? Or does it have to be trained in, or was it trained out of her? Mysteries, mysteries. Maybe she is really compassionate somewhere inside, toward something. He hopes so, resolutely putting away a fantasy of injecting Sheila with reserpine and applying experimental stimuli.  p. 127

That evening, Lipsitz reflects on his situation and decides to get with the program: he decides that going to the lab and euthanizing his rats—rather than appearing to treat them as pets—will be a good first step. On his arrival he begins the process, attempting to be as compassionate as he can, but then finds (spoiler) a tangle of rats in a tunnel behind one of the cages.
The fantasy sequence that follows has him realise he is looking at a “king rat” and, after Lipsitz follows it into the space it inhabits, he meets a young woman. They talk. Eventually, the king rat leads the lab animals away to some other world. Although Lipsitz wants to go with them, the woman explains that he cannot. He later wakes up on the lab floor (I’m not sure I’ve described this passage entirely accurately, but this is the gist of it).
Lipsitz then does the usual Tiptree-rejected-man stuff, i.e., brutally kills all his rats (he tips the squealing mass into a large bin with a bottle of ether), and then thinks about his plans to develop a commercial procedure to increase the intensity of animal behaviour (so, for example, a racehorse will be able to run faster than ever—even if its bones break in the process).
The first part of this story has some excellent description and scene-setting, but I didn’t find the midway fantasy swerve convincing. However, if you’re looking for another Tiptree tale about death, pain, and rejected men becoming psychotic rapists/murderers (e.g. Houston, Houston, Do you Read?), then this will be right up your street.

(The page of illustrations above for the Tiptree story are by “Racoona Sheldon”.)

The Eyeflash Miracles by Gene Wolfe begins with a blind boy called Little Tib meeting two men near a railway track: one of the men is Nitty, who is the assistant of the other man, Mr Parker. The latter has lost his job as a school superintendent due to computerisation and now has mental problems.
Parker asks Little Tib to come with them to a computer building in another city to help them break in. There, Parker will be able alter the computer’s programming so that he gets his job back. Little Tib agrees.
As the three travel we learn that in this future society everyone’s retinal scans are stored on a central computer, which uses this information to provide benefits. Tib doesn’t have any retinas, and so doesn’t exist as far as the state is concerned. More importantly, we find out that Little Tib has parapsychological powers that enable him to produce “miracles” (Carr unnecessarily telegraphs this in his introduction). When Tib performs these miracles, they coincide with strange dreams or visions, such as when the three are tear-gassed by two female railway cops:

Little Tib could hear the sound of the women’s boots on the boxcar floor, and the little grunt Alice gave as she took hold of the ladder outside the door and swung herself out. Then there was a popping noise, as though someone had opened a bottle of soda, and a bang and clatter when something struck the back of the car. His lungs and nose and mouth all burned. He felt a rush of saliva too great to contain. It spilled out of his lips and down his shirt; he wanted to run, and he thought of the old place, where the creek cut (cold as ice) under banks of milkweed and goldenrod. Nitty was yelling: “Throw it out! Throw it out!” And somebody, he thought it was Mr. Parker, ran full tilt into the side of the car. Little Tib was on the hill above the creek again, looking down across the bluebonnets toward the surging, glass-dark water, and a kite-flying west wind was blowing.  p. 161

Little Tib neutralises the gas, and we later find that Parker’s mental problems have also gone.
This is almost immediately followed by a longer dream/fantasy sequence where Little Tib walks down a path with talking birds in the trees above, and where he later meets a “copper man”. This sequence rambles on for some time before Tib wakes up in a doctor’s office. There he cures a crippled girl.
The three later meet a travelling prophet called Dr Prithivi and, shortly after this, Tib ends up levitating in front of a number of other people. Dr Prithivi involves Tib in his plans for an upcoming religious service but, before this takes place, Tib breaks into the computer building and lets Parker in (this involves another fantasy/vision sequence).
At the festival, Tib’s supposed father appears in disguise as one of the characters in a religious play, and we get a lot of backstory about how Tib is the product of an experimental government eugenics program where all the other children were killed. The father later attempts to do the same to Tib.
This sightly hackneyed finale is somewhat at odds with the rest of the narrative, and the enjoyment provided by the story largely comes from its quirkiness, the way it slips between reality and fantasy, and its various levels of religious, historical, and literary allusion (e.g. there are various Wizard of Oz references in the story—Dorothy and the skipping in the final scene, the metal man, etc.3).
Although I thought this pleasant enough, it’s not up to the level of Wolfe’s best work.

Meathouse Man by George R. R. Martin is one of his ‘Corpse Handlers’ series of stories, and gets off to a disturbing start when Trager visits a “meathouse”, a brothel, on Skrakky:

He came to the bed slowly and sat, to a chorus of creaking springs. He touched her and the flesh was warm. Of course. The body was alive enough, a heart beat under the heavy white breasts, she breathed. Only the brain was gone, replaced with a deadman’s synthabrain. She was meat now, an extra body for a corpse handler to control, just like the crew he worked each day under sulfur skies. She was not a woman. So it did not matter that Trager was just a boy, a jowly frogfaced boy who smelled of Skrakky. She (no, it, remember?) would not care, could not care.
Emboldened, aroused and hard, the boy stripped off his corpse handler’s clothing and climbed in bed with the female meat. He was very excited; his hands shook as he stroked her, studied her. Her skin was very white, her hair dark and long, but even the boy could not call her pretty. Her face was too flat and wide, her mouth hung open, and her limbs were loose and sagging with fat.
On her huge breasts, all around the fat dark nipples, the last customer had left toothmarks where he’d chewed her. Trager touched the marks tentatively, traced them with a finger. Then, sheepish about his hesitations, he grabbed one breast, squeezed it hard, pinched the nipple until he imagined a real girl would squeal with pain. The corpse did not move. Still squeezing, he rolled over on her and took the other breast into his mouth.
And the corpse responded.  p. 261

In this dark interplanetary future, criminals (and the unfortunate victims of kidnappers and people traffickers) have their brains replaced with bioelectronic units that enable their “corpses” to be controlled by qualified handlers. Trager is a one of these handlers, and works a five-crew at an open mine. Although he considers himself a good operator, he is in awe of the handler at the meathouse, and starts to fantasise about meeting her someday—until, that is, one of his work colleagues scathingly tells him that the corpses at the meathouse have no controller, but a biofeedback unit (which is why the sex is so good). Trager stops going.
Later, when one of his automills breaks down, he meets a female tech called Josie, and starts seeing her socially. After a year of friendship Trager professes his love for her but is rejected.
He eventually leaves the planet and goes to Vendalia intending to become a handler in the gladiatorials. However, he is repelled by the butchery of the contests, so instead gets a job with a forestry crew:

They had a tight-knit group: three handlers, a forester, thirteen corpses. Each day they drove the forest back, with Trager in the lead. Against the Vendalian wilderness, against the blackbriars and the hard gray ironspike trees and the bulbous rubbery snap-limbs, against the tangled hostile forest, he threw his six-crew and their buzztrucks. Smaller than the automills he’d run on Skrakky, fast and airborne, complex and demanding, those were buzztrucks. Trager ran six of them with corpse hands, a seventh with his own. Before his screaming blades and laser knives, the wall of wilderness fell each day. Donelly came behind him, pushing three of the mountain-sized rolling mills, to turn the fallen trees into lumber for Gidyon and other cities of Vendalia. Then Stevens, the third handler, with a flamecannon to burn down stumps and melt rocks, and the soilpumps that would ready the cleared land for farming. The forester was their foreman. The procedure was a science.
Clean, hard, demanding work; Trager thrived on it by day. He grew lean, athletic; the lines of his face tightened and tanned, he grew steadily browner under Vendalia’s hot bright sun. His corpses were almost part of him, so easily did he move them, fly their buzztrucks. As an ordinary man might move a hand, a foot. Sometimes his control grew so firm, the echoes so clear and strong, that Trager felt he was not a handler working a crew at all, but rather a man with seven bodies. Seven strong bodies that rode the sultry forest winds. He exulted in their sweat.  p. 275

The next chunk of the story charts Trager’s first proper relationship with a woman called Laurel, but (spoiler) she eventually ends up with his friend Donnelly. Trager finds this breakup even worse, and the story ultimately ends with him, after much angst and soul-searching, as a successful gladiator handler:

The enemy corpse is huge and black, its torso rippling with muscle, a product of years of exercise, the biggest thing that Trager has ever faced. It advances across the sawdust in a slow, clumsy crouch, holding the gleaming broadsword in one hand. Trager watches it from his chair above one end of the fighting area. The other corpsemaster is careful, cautious. His own deadman, a wiry blond, stands and waits, a morningstar trailing down in the blood-soaked arena dust. Trager will move him fast enough and well enough when the time is right. The enemy knows it, and the crowd.
The black corpse suddenly lifts its broadsword and scrambles forward in a run, hoping to use reach and speed to get its kill. But Trager’s corpse is no longer there when the enemy’s measured blow cuts the air where he had been.
Sitting comfortably above the fighting pit/down in the arena, his feet grimy with blood and sawdust, Trager/the corpse snaps the command/swings the morningstar—and the great studded ball drifts up and around, almost lazily, almost gracefully. Into the back of the enemy’s head, as he tries to recover and turn. A flower of blood and brain blooms swift and sudden, and the crowd cheers.
Trager walks his corpse from the arena, then stands to receive applause. It is his tenth kill. Soon the championship will be his. He is building such a record that they can no longer deny him a match.  pp. 288-289

The story finishes with Trager returning to his trophy partner who is, of course, a corpse. After they have sex (or after Trager masturbates), there is a bitter coda about the impossibility of finding one’s dream, and how “of all the bright cruel lies they tell you, the cruelest is the one called love”.
This is a downer story written, one suspects, by an author who did not have a happy love life when he was younger, and spent far too much time brooding about it.4 Probably not one to read if you have just been dumped.
That said, even if the story’s concerns are those of a young man and the conclusion overly maudlin, the description is well done and there is a strong story arc. If the darkness and loss don’t turn you off, you’ll find it pretty good.

The following story reviews appeared here previously, and are presented below for easy reference. If you have already read them and do not wish to do so again (perhaps your insomnia has improved?) then skip down to the discussion of the non-fiction content below.

I See You by Damon Knight has, for such an accomplished writer and editor, quite a confusing start (and there are one or two other passages that have this problem too). Fortunately, the rest of it is an accomplished story about the development of a device called an Ozo, a time and space viewer that can be used to see any place at any time. The first half follows the inventor’s development of the device, and then his anonymous production and distribution of it. Once it becomes widespread, and any person can see what any other is doing (now, or in the past), it transforms society:

You are watching an old movie, Bob and Ted and Carol and Alice. The humor seems infantile and unimaginative to you; you are not interested in the actresses’ occasional semi-nudity. What strikes you as hilarious is the coyness, the side-long glances, smiles, grimaces hinting at things that will never be shown on the screen. You realize that these people have never seen anyone but their most intimate friends without clothing, have never seen any adult shit or piss, and would be embarrassed or disgusted if they did. Why did children say “pee-pee” and “poo-poo,” and then giggle? You have read scholarly books about taboos on “bodily functions,” but why was shitting worse than sneezing?  p. 276

Apart from the story’s “if this goes on” inevitability, its other strength is the sense of wonder buzz, the feeling of infinity, that several of the passages provide:

You are forty, a respected scholar, taking a few days out to review your life, as many people do at your age. You have watched your mother and father coupling on the night they conceived you, watched yourself growing in her womb, first a red tadpole, then a thing like an embryo chicken, then a big-headed baby kicking and squirming. You have seen yourself delivered, seen the first moment when your bloody head broke into the light. You have seen yourself staggering about the nursery in rompers, clutching a yellow plastic duck. Now you are watching yourself hiding behind the fallen tree on the hill, and you realize that there are no secret places. And beyond you in the ghostly future you know that someone is watching you as you watch; and beyond that watcher another, and beyond that another . . . Forever.  p. 279

Seeing by Harlan Ellison is a story about Lorna, a prostitute in the urban squalor that surrounds a future Polar Interstellar Exchange spaceport in the Artic. Her clients include the many alien species that frequent the area. More significantly, she has mutant eyes that provide a different type of sight:

She told the old woman of seeing. Seeing directions, as blind fish in subterranean caverns see the change in flow of water, as bees see the wind currents, as wolves see the heat auras surrounding humans, as bats see the walls of caves in the dark. Seeing memories, everything that ever happened to her, the good and the bad, the beautiful and the grotesque, the memorable and the utterly unforgettable, early memories and those of a moment before, all on instant recall, with absolute clarity and depth of field and detail, the whole of one’s past, at command. Seeing colours, the sensuousness of airborne bacteria, the infinitely subtle shadings of rock and metal and natural wood, the tricksy shifts along a spectrum invisible to ordinary eyes of a candle flame, the colours of frost and rain and the moon and arteries pulsing just under the skin; the intimate overlapping colours of fingerprints left on a credit, so reminiscent of paintings by the old master, Jackson Pollock. Seeing colours that no human eyes have ever seen. Seeing shapes and relationships, the intricate calligraphy of all parts of the body moving in unison, the day melding into the night, the spaces and spaces between spaces that form a street, the invisible lines linking people. She spoke of seeing, of all the kinds of seeing except. The stroboscopic view of everyone. The shadows within shadows behind shadows that formed terrible, tortuous portraits she could not bear.  p. 200-201

The old, powerful, and rich 26-Krystabel Parsons has had a number of transplants in the past, and desires a pair of eyes like Lorna’s for her next surgery. She commissions a “Knoxdoctor” called Bream to find her a set, and he in turn sends two “prongers” called Berne and Grebbie to search.
This isn’t an entirely successful work and there are various reasons for this. One is that Ellison can’t seem to get out of his own way. There is one early passage that introduces extraneous camera directions (“From extreme long shot, establishing, etc.”) which distanced me from the story just I was getting into it. Another aspect of the story that had a similar effect was some of his word choices, which had me stop reading on more than one occasion and reach for a dictionary.5 I also wasn’t that impressed with the scene where an angry customer, in the form of a giant slug, comes looking for Lorna: this read like some sleazy update of a Planet Stories tale.
The story improves somewhat towards the end but is definitely a mixed bag. It’s a pity that he didn’t write the story that the quoted passage above suggests.

An Infinite Summer by Christopher Priest is set partly in Victorian times, so this is probably a non-associational spin-off from his contemporaneous novel The Space Machine. A man wanders around a 1940s London visited by “freezers”—people from the future who use humans to create frozen tableaux. These are not visible to the people of the time but they are to Thomas, although this is never explained. It materialises that he and Sarah, a woman he was in the process of proposing to, were frozen in 1903 but that his part of the tableaux decayed in 1935. Since then he has been waiting for the release of Sarah, and visits her every day. His vigil ends with a nice final image.
This one is perhaps best appreciated on an subconscious level as it doesn’t bear too much analysis: judging by the number of tableaux Thomas notices on his short journey so see Sarah, you would think the police would notice the massive number of missing persons.

The Highest Dive by Jack Williamson is an old-school SF story that opens with a young man called Max caught in a violent storm on Atlas, a massive alien planet with very low gravity and high winds. As Max struggles to avoid being blown away he lapses into unconsciousness, and the story flashbacks to his time on Earth, his decision to go to the planet, and his familiarisation on arrival. This latter includes a trip to a pool:

He saw no water anywhere. The ridge was nearly flat on top, flaked and cracked with time. Ropes stretched along its rim. The reddish desert lay far, far below. Feeling bewildered, he looked back at Komatsu.
‘There’s our pool.’ Komatsu leaned out to point straight down. ‘The only open water we’ve found on Atlas.’
He gripped the rope and looked. The time-worn wall of something like black rock dropped straight down so far it made him giddy. At last he found the pool—a small round mirror of bright blue water tucked under the very foot of that frightening cliff.
‘It’s deep enough.’ Queerly casual, Komatsu pointed at another hand-rope, stretching from their feet to a rock down in the pool. ‘We climb that to get back.’ He grinned at Max. ‘Want me to go first?’
‘You’ve got to be kidding!’ Max stared at his dark, gaunt face. ‘We’re too . . . too high!’
‘Just a thousand feet.’ Komatsu’s grin grew wider. ‘About the same as ten at home. You fall slow here, kid. With air resistance, your terminal velocity is about fifteen feet a second. From any height, you never fall faster. Watch me.’
He peeled off his yellow suit, moved to the rim in a lazy, one legged dance, floated over it. Max leaned out to watch him drifting slowly down, arms spread like wings to guide him. He was a long time in the air, and his body had dwindled to a far dark speck before he broke the blue mirror of the pool.  p. 3

When Max recovers consciousness he finds himself miles up in the air. As the near-permanent clouds temporarily clear, he sees (spoiler) a huge alien city. Max contacts his team, and they gain an insight into what the planet really is . . . . After this conversation, Max’s only chance of survival is to try control his descent to dive into a body of water beside the camp.
This has a slightly dated feel, and there is no explanation as to why the alien city wasn’t revealed earlier by ground radar, but the story isn’t bad, and the final scene gives a mini-sense of wonder buzz.

Custer’s Last Jump by Steven Utley and Howard Waldrop is an alternate world non-fiction account about Custer and Crazy Horse and the Battle of Little Big Horn—which, in this world, involves the 7th Cavalry parachuting into action from dirigibles!
The story starts much earlier than the battle however, and rather slowly, with an account of formation of the 1st Western Interdiction Wing of the Confederate States Army Air Corps. Their early monoplanes affect the course of the American Civil War.
The second section tells of Crazy Horse and Custer’s deployment during that war, and how Crazy Horse and other members of his tribe agree to give land to the CSAAC for an airfield in return for pilot training:

It fell to Captain Smith to train Crazy Horse. The Indian became what Smith, in his journal,144 describes as “the best natural pilot I have seen or it has been my pleasure to fly with.” Part of this seems to have come from Smith’s own modesty; by all accounts, Smith was one of the finer pilots of the war.
[. . .]
Smith records146 that Crazy Horse’s first solo took place on August 14, 1864, and that the warrior, though deft in the air, still needed practice on his landings. He had a tendency to come in overpowered and to stall his engine out too soon. Minor repairs were made on the skids of the craft after this flight.
All this time, Crazy Horse had flown Smith’s craft. Smith, after another week of hard practice with the Indian, pronounced him “more qualified than most pilots the CSAAC in Alabama turned out147 and signed over the aircraft to him. Crazy Horse begged off. Then, seeing that Smith was sincere, he gave the captain many buffalo hides. Smith reminded the Indian that the craft was not his: during their off hours, when not training, the Indians had been given enough instruction in military discipline as Moseby, never a stickler, thought necessary. The Indians had only a rudimentary idea of government property. Of the seven other Indian men, three were qualified as pilots; the other four were given gunner positions in the Krupp bi-wing light bombers assigned to the squadron.  p. 34

Custer, meanwhile, becomes a parachutist at Jump School.
Later in the war Crazy Horse’s squadron is almost completely destroyed during a Union attack on his unit’s airfield, and he and a few others escape with a handful of aircraft, which they hide in tribal caves. Around the same time, Custer leads a parachute assault on another Native American tribe’s settlement (even though they are, unknown to Custer, a Union ally). Custer massacres the natives and, when Crazy Horse visits the scene after the Union troops have left, Custer’s fate is sealed.
The next section is a Collier’s Magazine article called Custer’s Last Jump, which describes The Battle of the Little Big Horn:

Few events in American history have captured the imagination so thoroughly as the Battle of the Little Big Horn. Lieutenant Colonel George Armstrong Custer’s devastating defeat at the hands of Sioux and Cheyenne Indians in June 1876 has been rendered time and again by such celebrated artists as George Russell and Frederic Remington. Books, factual and otherwise, which have been written around or about the battle, would fill an entire library wing. The motion-picture industry has on numerous occasions drawn upon “Custer’s Last Jump” for inspiration; latest in a long line of movieland Custers is Erroll Flynn [see photo], who appears with Olivia de Havilland and newcomer Anthony Quinn in Warner Brothers’ soon-to-be-released They Died with Their Chutes On.  p. 42

The penultimate part is a more detailed account written by Mark Twain, composed after his interview of one of the battle’s participants, Black Man’s Hand. He tells Twain that Custer lost the fight because (spoiler) Crazy Horse’s monoplanes attacked the 7th Cavalry’s dirigibles, and brought most of them down.
There follows a short, vainglorious extract from a history of the 7th Cavalry (written by Edgar Rice Burroughs), just before an extensive bibliography of alternate historical texts.
This is not only a very good parallel world story, with every section making this world more detailed and convincing, it’s an entertaining one too.

The Bicentennial Man by Isaac Asimov, is probably one of the best stories of his I’ve read—vastly superior to his early work in the various 1940s Astoundings I’ve read recently (there is nothing like thirty years of practice to improve your writing).
The story concerns Andrew, a valet robot who is the property of a family who discover that he can carve wood and “enjoy” the experience. His owner begins selling the carvings, and puts half the money in an account for the robot. Andrew becomes increasingly human-like, and he eventually has enough money to “buy” his freedom. His owner doesn’t want the money, but he does institute a court case to give Andrew’s wishes legal foundation, and they win. Nonetheless, years later, after the death of the owner, and even though Andrew is legally free, he almost comes a cropper at the hands of two yobs as a result of his programming, which means he must obey their orders to dismantle himself. Andrew is only just saved in time by the son of the family. Andrew then determines to write a history of robots, which eventually results in the establishment of robot rights.
This first part of the story mirrors, in some respects, the emancipation of American slaves, but the rest of it goes somewhere else entirely in that it details Andrew’s long struggle to become human. This begins after the “Little Miss” of the story, the young girl that Andrew used to care for, dies in her eighties, and Andrew goes to United States Robots with one of the grandsons to pressure them to give him one of their new android bodies. Andrew eventually gets his way, but causes US Robots to change their business model so they never deal in autonomous robots again.
Even after getting his android body, Andrew wants to become even more human, and this leads him into the design of ever more sophisticated prosthetics:

He accepted membership in several learned societies, including one that was devoted to the new science he had established—the one he had called robobiology but which had come to be termed prosthetology. On the one hundred and fiftieth anniversary of his construction, a testimonial dinner was given in his honor at U.S. Robots. If Andrew saw an irony in this, he kept it to himself.
Alvin Magdescu came out of retirement to chair the dinner. He was himself ninety-four years old and was alive because he, too, had prosthetized devices that, among other things, fulfilled the function of liver and kidneys. The dinner reached its climax when Magdescu, after a short and emotional talk, raised his glass to toast The Sesquicentennial Robot.
Andrew had had the sinews of his face redesigned to the point where he could show a human range of emotions, but he sat through all the ceremonies solemnly passive. He did not like to be a Sesquicentennial Robot.  p. 153

The rest of the story describes the processes which make Andrew completely “human” (spoiler): first, there is a court case which defines him so; second, he has surgery which makes him mortal. The last scene has the World President arriving at Andrew’s deathbed to sign the new law, and to declare him The Bicentennial Man.
This is an exceptional piece which is smoothly written, has a number of smart set pieces, builds a great story arc (which stretches over generations), and has a great last line.

Terry Carr provides a short Introduction at the start of the book and various Story Introductions throughout. Both provide interesting snippets of opinion and information (read the Story Introductions above and you will see what I mean):

I have a theory that short stories don’t thrive today because people don’t like to think.
It’s been said that a good short story is essentially the pivotal chapter of a novel, embodying all the elements that could go into a longer story but inviting readers to extrapolate the background and aftermath for themselves. But evidently people prefer to have their thinking done for them by the authors: they’d rather spend an extra hour or two reading someone else’s thoughts, in a novel, than thinking for themselves. They want writers to tell them what Maria said to her lover when she found out he was her uncle, and whether or not he knew it himself. Who wants to speculate?—we live in a world that worships data.  pp. vi-vii

Carr also adds a Recommended Reading1976 list at the back of the book, which adds another couple of dozen stories to his picks in this book (see the table below to see what they are6).
Finally, there is a good, concise summary of 1976 by the then Locus editor Charles N. Brown, The Science Fiction Year, which covers just about every aspect of the field including, of course, the magazines:

The sf magazine field showed a number of changes in 1976, most for the better. The average circulation was up and several new magazines appeared or were announced. Odyssey, a large-size magazine marred by poor production, had two issues in 1976 before folding; the British magazine Science Fiction Monthly also ceased publication. But two new magazines appeared to take their place. Isaac Asimov’s Science Fiction Magazine is a new digest size magazine which hopes to capitalize on Dr. Asimov’s name and fame. Galileo is a large-size effort with no newsstand distribution. Cosmos, another large-size magazine, has been announced for 1977 publication. The two leading magazines, Analog and Fantasy and Science Fiction, continued to dominate the field. Galaxy skipped several issues and the other two, Amazing and Fantastic, dropped back to quarterly publication. Analog announced a price hike to $1.25 per issue and the other magazines will probably follow in due course.  pp. 383-384

In conclusion, this volume has one excellent and two very good stories as well as a number of other worthwhile pieces but, unlike the Dozois and Wollheim entries, it also has a number of stories that are less impressive and perhaps should not be here. The only material this collection adds if you have read those other two volumes are the Varley and the Martin pieces.
If I had to pick one of the three it would probably the Wollheim.  ●

_____________________

1. According to ISFDB, there appears to be only one magazine review of this volume, and that was done by Charles N. Brown (of Locus fame), who reviewed it along with the Carr and Wollheim volumes in the January-February 1978 edition of Isaac Asimov’s Science Fiction Magazine:

There are now three “best of the year” volumes published (down from four last year). The Best Science Fiction of the Year #6 edited by Terry Carr is the longest and best with four stories I consider excellent: “I See You” by Damon Knight, “The Phantom of Kansas” by John Varley, “Seeing” by Harlan Ellison, and “The Bicentennial Man” by Isaac Asimov. There are seven others, including four I’d rate as “B” and only three I didn’t care for. The 1977 Annual World’s Best SF edited by Donald Wollheim is nearly as good with six of the ten stories rates “B” or better. The Asimov and Knight stories also appear here as do two other “A” stories, “Appearance of Life” by Brian W. Aldiss and “The Hertford Manuscript” by Richard Cowper. Best Science Fiction Stories of the Year: Sixth Annual Collection has a new editor, Gardner Dozois, replacing Lester del Rey. I’d rate only two of the eight stories as excellent, “The Samurai and the Willows” by Michael Bishop and “The Diary of the Rose” by Ursula K. Le Guin. There is also a good summary of the year. (There’s also one in the Carr volume, but I’m prejudiced since I wrote it.) On the whole, all three volumes are worth having although you should probably wait for the paperback on the Dozois book.  p. 128

2. The stories are taken from F&SF (Knight), Galaxy (Varley), Andromeda #1 (Ellison,* Priest), Amazing (Leiber), New Dimensions #6 (Tiptree), Science Fiction Monthly (Williamson), Future Power (Wolfe), Orbit #18 (Martin), Universe #6 (Utley/Waldrop), Stellar #2 (Asimov). There is nothing from Analog or Fantastic magazines.
* Ellison’s story also appeared in the American anthology, The Ides of Tomorrow: Original Science Fiction Tales of Horror, edited by Terry Carr (published in October 1976 vs. Andromeda #1’s May—see ISFDB).

3. There is a list of the Wizard of Oz references in Wolfe’s The Eyeflash Miracles here.

4. Unsuccessful/unrequited love is a common feature of George R. R. Martin’s early work (A Song for Lya and his first novel, After the Festival, have a similar theme if I recall correctly).

5. I’m not suggesting that writers use an 800 word vocabulary, but:
“As though they had been wind-thrown anemophilously,” p.187. “Anemophilous” not only needs to researched (by me, anyway) but means, “(of a plant) wind-pollinated,” which would seem to make the quoted phrase a tautology.
“. . . clearly identifiable as but’n’ben prongers . . .” p.188. I’m Scottish so I thought that I knew a “but’n’ben” was a small holiday cottage in the country. Apparently (thanks internet) it is a two bedroomed house with the “but” the living room/kitchen, and the “ben” the bedroom. What chance would anyone in 1977 have of figuring that one out?
There is also a drink called a “chigger”. That is either an insect or a cocktail of melon liqueur with orange juice. It didn’t appear to be a cocktail bar she was drinking in . . . .

6. If you want a better idea of how this book measures up against what I might pick for a 1976 ‘Year’s Best’, or learn what other anthologists chose, look at the table below (this is the same one which appears at the end of the review of the Dozois and Wollheim volumes). I’ll update it as and when I find stories I like, or citation sources that should be included (for more on the latter see below).

The first to fourth column give the story titles, authors, lengths and place of publication (see below the table for abbreviation legend).
The ‘T’ column lists Terry Carr’s choices with an ‘x’, and his recommendation list with an ‘o’.
The ‘D’ column lists Gardner Dozois’ choices with an ‘x’, and his other recommendations (comments in his introduction and in Walton’s An Informal History of the Hugo Awards) with an ‘o’.
The ‘W’ column lists Donald Wollheim’s choices with an ‘x’.
The ‘A’ column lists Lin Carter’s choices with an ‘x’.
The ‘S’ column shows my (SF Magazine’s) current choices an ‘x’ (historical choices are an ‘o’). A dash means read but passed over (I only select stories better than ∗∗∗+ and above, and not all of them). Blank means unread.
The ‘C’ column shows how many of the anthologies and/or polls used in the Classics of Science Fiction list included the story in their collections or lists (note that CoSF is SF only and skews against fantasy), minus the anthology or award citations which have their own column (Carr, Dozois, Wollheim, Hugo, Nebula, etc.).
The ‘O’ column shows the number of inclusions in other major anthologies or recommendation lists not on the CoSF (Classics of SF) list. These are selected by me (usually to include fantasy retrospectives or awards that CoSF doesn’t include) but I may not yet have done this for some/all of the stories.*
The ‘H’ column shows the story’s 1977 Hugo award placing (F for finalist, W for winner).
The ‘N’ column shows the story’s 1977 Nebula award placing (F for finalist, W for winner).
The ‘U’ column shows stories that were one of the 1977 Locus Poll’s top ten short stories, novelettes, or novellas.
The ‘T’ column shows the total points that each story gets (they get a point for being in each column and for each of the CoSF and other anthology citations).

The titles, names, lengths, publications, and overall score columns are sortable.

A good way to sample 1976’s best short fiction may be to start at the top of the table and work down until you get to the last of the 2-point stories. Bear in mind this is statistically invalid, but it will give you something to aim at. Enjoy.

Best Science Fiction and Fantasy Stories 1976

na=novella, nv=novelet, ss=short story

AMZ, Amazing Stories; ANA, Analog; ANB, Analog Annual; AND, Andromeda #1; ASI, Isaac Asimov’s SF Magazine; AUR, Aurora: Beyond Equality, BET, Beyond Time; COK, Cosmic Kaleidoscope; DYS, Dystopian Visions; FLA, Flashing swords #3; FRI, Frights; FSF, Fantasy and Science Fiction; FTL, Faster Than Light; FUT, Future Power; GAL, Galaxy; IOT, The Ides of Tomorrow; LON, Lone Star Universe; NEC, New Constellations; NED, New Dimensions #6; NEW, New Worlds #10; ODY, Odyssey; ORB, Orbit #18; ROW, The Best from the Rest of the World; SFD, Science Fiction Discoveries; SFM, Science Fiction Monthly; STE, Stellar #2; STN, Stellar Short Novels; TCS, The Crystal Ship; TSV, The Seventh Voyage; UNI, Universe #6.

* The ‘O’ (Other) recommendations column currently includes a Rich Horton ‘Best Of’ list extracted from his comments in Walton’s An Informal History of the Hugo Awards, and a couple of anthology inclusions for the Norton ●

 

rssrss

Clarkesworld #40, January 2010

ISFDB
Magazine

Other reviews:
Various, Goodreads
Various, Vector Short Story Club

_____________________

Editors, Neil Clarke & Sean Wallace

Fiction:
The Things • novelette by Peter Watts ∗∗∗+
All the King’s Monsters • short story by Megan Arkenberg

Non-fiction:
Cover • Sergio Rebolledo
Lucius Shepard: An Expatriate Writer of Exotic Tales • interview by Jason S. Ridler
Video Game Sci-Fi Comes of Age • essay by Brian Trent
2009 Reader’s Poll and Contest • editorial by Neil Clarke

_____________________

When I researched the previous post (John W. Campbell’s Frozen Hell, the recently published longer version of Who Goes There?) I came across mention of The Things by Peter Watts, a story which retells the events of the original piece from the alien’s (rather than the human’s) viewpoint. (I note in passing that Watts references the John Carpenter movie version, The Thing, and not Campbell’s story.1)
If you are unfamiliar with any of these, or haven’t read my original review, I’ve cut and pasted the latter into the footnotes below so you can catch up.2
Watts’ story gets off to an engrossing start with the thoughts of one of the alien Things:

I am being Blair. I escape out the back as the world comes in through the front.
I am being Copper. I am rising from the dead.
I am being Childs. I am guarding the main entrance.
The names don’t matter. They are placeholders, nothing more; all biomass is interchangeable. What matters is that these are all that is left of me. The world has burned everything else.
I see myself through the window, loping through the storm, wearing Blair.
MacReady has told me to burn Blair if he comes back alone, but MacReady still thinks I am one of him. I am not: I am being Blair, and I am at the door. I am being Childs, and I let myself in. I take brief communion, tendrils writhing forth from my faces, intertwining: I am BlairChilds, exchanging news of the world.
The world has found me out. It has discovered my burrow beneath the tool shed, the half-finished lifeboat cannibalized from the viscera of dead helicopters. The world is busy destroying my means of escape. Then it will come back for me.
There is only one option left. I disintegrate. Being Blair, I go to share the plan with Copper and to feed on the rotting biomass once called Clarke; so many changes in so short a time have dangerously depleted my reserves. Being Childs, I have already consumed what was left of Fuchs and am replenished for the next phase. I sling the flamethrower onto my back and head outside, into the long Antarctic night.
I will go into the storm, and never come back.

The rest of the story alternates between a retelling of events from the Thing’s point of view, and its various epiphanies. One of these is the realisation that its spaceship has been covered in ice for millions of years and that no rescue is coming; another, more important, discovery is that humans are unable to “commune”, to reach into each other like the aliens do. The Thing finds the inability of humans to do this horrific and later, after discovering the function of the human brain, concludes that is it is sharing its flesh “with thinking cancer”:

Those encysted souls. Those tumors. Hiding away in their bony caverns, folded in on themselves.
I knew they couldn’t hide forever; this monstrous anatomy had only slowed communion, not stopped it. Every moment I grew a little. I could feel myself twining around Palmer’s motor wiring, sniffing upstream along a million tiny currents. I could sense my infiltration of that dark thinking mass behind Blair’s eyes.
Imagination, of course. It’s all reflex that far down, unconscious and immune to micromanagement. And yet, a part of me wanted to stop while there was still time. I’m used to incorporating souls, not rooming with them. This, this compartmentalization was unprecedented. I’ve assimilated a thousand worlds stronger than this, but never one so strange. What would happen when I met the spark in the tumor? Who would assimilate who?

This is all pretty good stuff, and the story has an appropriately chilling ending (spoiler: the remaining Thing decides to end the isolation that humans experience by infiltrating them all). The story later appeared in at least four of the ‘Year’s Bests’, as well as winning the Shirley Jackson Award.
Nevertheless, I have a number of minor criticisms: first, it rambles at points and becomes a little unfocused (which also makes the story slightly overlong); second, the last line is jarring: “I will have to rape it into them.” “Rape” seems an odd word choice here for a couple of reasons—not only is it is a sexually charged one which produces a discordant note in a story that features only men at a remote Antarctic station, but it also seems like an inappropriate word for the Thing to use. Even if the Thing (which reproduces in an entirely different way) could comprehend what the word means to humans, it is unlikely that it would misdescribe its act of salvation in this way.
There is only one other story in this issue (Clarkesworld was a much slimmer magazine a decade ago), All the King’s Monsters by Megan Arkenberg. It opens with a woman who is a prisoner in some kind of fantasy tower:

Before Hunger came, I shared a cell with Grief. Her child was dead. She called his name at night, weeping into her ragged white hair. I could not comfort her. She flinched from my hands, from my voice, from my offers to comb her hair or share my half of the gritty gray bread the guards brought us.
I whispered to her sometimes, telling of Uri, but she did not listen—or else she did not hear. I learned long ago that Grief is a monster without ears.

There is a second woman who comes later for the other prisoners, and who talks of a king and his iron monsters, but I finished the story baffled. It all felt rather pretentious.

The Cover for this issue is by Sergio Rebolledo, and it is a striking, if dark and monochromatic one (there is a lot of black and grey there, and I found my eye initially drawn to the light, not the robot or the child).
I was looking forward to Lucius Shepard: An Expatriate Writer of Exotic Tales, the interview by Jason S. Ridler, but ended up finding it a dry and stilted affair (I got the impression that Shepard was responding to a posted or emailed set of questions). Nevertheless, I learned a few useful snippets about an author I really like but don’t read as much of as I should.3
Video Game Sci-Fi Comes of Age by Brian Trent is an article about a pastime I never managed to get into (my poor coordination limited my progress with the likes of Halo and Mass Effect (?), and I wasn’t prepared to put in the time to improve my hand-eye coordination). The article is probably quite dated by now, but there is the odd comment I found of interest:

Sci-fi is speculative fiction rooted in science. It puts society and the human condition through an imaginative filter. It builds structured worlds and histories. We can loosely group its contributions into the Verne and Wells camps; the former wrote optimistic odysseys of techno-exploration, while the latter probed a grimmer (and often dystopian) depth.
Interestingly, one of the most notable features of the gaming industry’s growth is the overwhelming adoption of the Wellsian perspective. Societal collapse, war, and the negative consequences of technology feature prominently in today’s story-based sci-fi games.

2009 Reader’s Poll and Contest by Neil Clarke is a short editorial/note about the 2009 Reader’s Poll, and lists the stories published by Clarkesworld in the previous year. There are also images of all the covers, some of which seem very dark and monochromatic (July, August, and October for a start):

This issue is worth getting a hold of for Watts’ story.  ●

_____________________

1. I’m curious as to the copyright implications, if any, of Watts using The Thing movie as the background for his story (or share-cropping, as I believe this is called).

2. My review of John W. Campbell’s Who Goes There? (Astounding Science-Fiction, August 1938):

Who Goes There?” by John W. Campbell, Jr.5 opens at an Antarctic research station with the crew standing around the tarpaulined body of a frozen alien. One of the main characters, McReady, tells the men that they discovered it at a crashed spaceship near a magnetic anomaly they were investigating. During the process of digging the alien out of the ice they accidentally destroyed the ship.

After this atmospheric but data-dump start the men then discuss whether it is safe to defrost the creature and examine it. The camp physicist, Norris, is vehemently opposed, and his warning telegraphs the arc of the story:

“How the hell can these birds tell what they are voting on? They haven’t seen those three red eyes, and that blue hair like crawling worms. Crawling— damn, it’s crawling there in the ice right now!
“Nothing Earth ever spawned had the unutterable sublimation of devastating wrath that thing let loose in its face when it looked around his frozen desolation twenty million years ago. Mad? It was mad clear through—searing, blistering mad!
“Hell, I’ve had bad dreams ever since I looked at those three red eyes. Nightmares. Dreaming the thing thawed out and came to life—that it wasn’t dead, or even wholly unconscious all those twenty million years, but just slowed, waiting—waiting. You’ll dream, too, while that damned thing that Earth wouldn’t own is dripping, dripping in the Cosmos House tonight.
“And, Connant,” Norris whipped toward the cosmic ray specialist, “won’t you have fun sitting up all night in the quiet. Wind whining above—and that thing dripping—” He stopped for a moment, and looked round.
“I know. That’s not science. But this is, it’s psychology. You’ll have nightmares for a year to come. Every night since I looked at that thing I’ve had ’em. That’s why I hate it—sure I do—and don’t want it around. Put it back where it came from and let it freeze for another twenty million years. I had some swell nightmares—that it wasn’t made like we are—which is obvious—but of a different kind of flesh that it can really control. That it can change its shape, and look like a man— and wait to kill and eat—
“That’s not a logical argument. I know it isn’t. The thing isn’t Earthlogic anyway.”  p. 66-67

After some more discussion the men agree to have Connant babysit the alien’s body overnight, but it isn’t long before he falls asleep and the body goes missing. Then everything kicks off when the Thing is found in the huskies’ enclosure, and the men head there with ice-axes, .45s, and flamethrowers:

Connant stopped at the bend in the corridor. His breath hissed suddenly through his throat. “Great God—”
The revolver exploded thunderously; three numbing, palpable waves of sound crashed through the confined corridors. Two more. The revolver dropped to the hard-packed snow of the trail, and Barclay saw the ice-ax shift into defensive position. Connant’s powerful body blocked his vision, but beyond he heard something mewing, and, insanely, chuckling. The dogs were quieter; there was a deadly seriousness in their low snarls. Taloned feet scratched at hard-packed snow, broken chains were clinking and tangling.
Connant shifted abruptly, and Barclay could see what lay beyond. For a second he stood frozen, then his breath went out in a gusty curse. The Thing launched itself at Connant, the powerful arms of the man swung the ice-ax flatside first at what might have been a head. It scrunched horribly, and the tattered flesh, ripped by a half-dozen savage huskies, leapt to its feet again. The red eyes blazed with an unearthly hatred, an unearthly, unkillable vitality.  p. 73

I love that “mewing and insanely chucking” description.
Even though they finally manage to kill the Thing they note that it has changed shape during the fight to become part-dog. This ability of the alien to change itself down to the cellular level drives the rest of the narrative, as the men no longer know who is human and who is a Thing . . . .
There are a couple of later scenes that rise above the well done paranoia and claustrophobia: one of these is (spoiler) when the men have their blood tested (the theory is that a Thing’s blood will want to “live”); and the other is when McReady and Barclay go to see Blair, who has been isolated in another part of the camp. This last part provides an SFnal finish to the story (in contrast to the movie) when they discover the Thing has built a blue-light emitting atomic reactor to power an anti-gravity device it intends to use to escape.
The best parts of this story are very good but the story as a whole is rather uneven, with some parts that don’t really work (e.g., I didn’t understand the explanation for the failure of the serum samples before they attempted the blood test). A greater problem (and one that I wouldn’t have been able to articulate until I saw it discussed elsewhere) is that the characterisation and point of view is all over the place. If the men were more clearly drawn, and the story told from McReady’s point of view (rather than the semi-omniscient one used), it would have been a much smoother and more effective piece. Overall you get the feeling of a story that needs another draft—but, for all that, it is well worth reading.

The review of the expanded version of this story, Frozen Hell, is here.

3. I learned that, among other things, Shepard’s Over Yonder has a companion piece, and that Viator Plus is a rewritten version of Viator, the latter completed as the author suffered a breakdown (clinical depression). There is also mention of a long novel, Piercefields, which I presume is unfinished (it’s not listed on ISFDB, unless it is the 2013 Beautiful Blood).
There are only two comments after the Shepard interview on the Clarkesworld website, and one of those is someone who has never heard of Shepard (sigh), a great writer and multiple award winner. (Arkenberg’s story has nine comments and Trent’s article has four; Watts’ story has 153).  ●

rssrss